IHti^J.*^  HfcAi^^ 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


TRINITY  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 
DURHAM,  N.C. 


7//> ,0/    ^    '^':^t!^<uM^^ 


The  Gift  of. 


Date  I  ^3/ 


(^,0i-^->%J^^ 


□DDnnan 

i 


...JL  ■-(■. 


nDanoDD 


I- 


/fi    to//z//orty. 


.9'''6c 


5  "•  SL 


Ofn/xr.»f. 


DanDapD   :  nnnonDnaiirnnannaaa     ncnnncn     anaadnn  ,  nnoDDnn  ■  nnnannn  '00000001^: 


^S^a  Rri^k^agiMiBLa 


'J^..!:ii^.i:iL'y:.iii.M:J!iL.^Mli^.:'J, 


\ic 


^Hk 


Ofnptvf^ 


Len      Wijia' 


LdKJ  f'o/or  and  ^"/rrr/ 


pS.p.Mojler^u 


1   M    1   1    1  I  M 

1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1 

M   1  1!   I  1    1    1 

1  r  1  n  I  1  1  1  r 

1    1    1    1    1    1    M    1 

I   1  M   1   1   1  1  1 

1   1    1   11   1  1    1    1 

rTTI"!  r  !_1_L1^ 

s 

A 

if 

5                        B 

E! 

A                     □ 

^"  fia/aon. 


y'^  J'la/,. 


'  '\  _■_"_'  / 

r~l     (,r/>/a'/f 

Kl    /?>.■'/  ■■'>''-'j' 

B    Tkuri  Ser/' 
El    /»/////'(  -V//' 


I 


I 


A  MANUAL 


OP 


fttfimti'i  mt\  %iiU  %Mi\0, 


WITH 


HONORS  PAID  BY  THE  TEOOPS, 


INSPECTIONS— REVIEWS,  &c. 


ABRIDGED  AND  COMPILED  BY 


RICHMOND,  Va. 

PUBLISHED  BY  A.  MORRIS. 
1861. 


Lieut.  Col.  WM.  H.  RICHARDRON,  " 

Graduate  and  formerly  assistant  Instructor  of  Tactics,  Virginia  J 

Military  Institute. 


CHAS.  H.  WYNNE,  PEINTEB,  BICHMOND. 


PREFACE.  \ 


This  compilation  was  undertaken  to  meet  a  pressing 
and  urgent  call  for  books  of  tactics,  at  a  time  when 
none  of  the  more  elaborate  works,  which  had  been  in 
use,  could  be  procured. 

It  is  an  abridgment  of  Hardee  —  the  "Balance 
step,"  and  "The  manual  of  arms  for  the  muskef 
being  introduced  from  Gilham's  manual,  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier.  Also,  "  Honors  to  be  paid  by  the  , 
troops  " — under  which  head  will  be  found  the  forms 
for  review,  inspection,  dress  parade,  guard  mounting, 
duties  of  guards,  &c. ;  placed  after  the  tactical  part  of 
the  book. 

The  arrangement  of  the  book  is  not  such  as  it  would 
have  been,  had  not  unavoidable  circumstances  inter- 
posed to  change  it.  But  this  will  not  materially  inter- 
fere with  its  use. 

Paragraphs  retain  their  original  numbers,  as  in  the 
originals. 

The  work  is  offered  to  the  military  of  the  Confede- 
rate States,  with  the  hope  that  it  may  be  found  useful 
as  a  book  of  reference — although  with  diffidence — for 


*t>' 


17638^ 


9Q  ^1 


iv  Preface* 

the  haste  in  which  it  was  commenced,  and  the  numer- 
ous difficulties  attending  its  preparation,  have,  it  is 
feared,  been  productive  of  errors,  which  the  compiler 
will  regret — but  he  trusts  will  be  charitably  over- 
looked. 

W.  H.  K.,  Jr. 

Richmond,  June,  1861. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


TITLE    FIRST. 

Article   First. 

PAGE 

Formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle  or  in  line,  13 

Posts  of  Company  officers,  sergeants,  and  corporals,  14 

Posts  of  field  ofi&cers  and  regimental  stafi" 15 

Posts  of  field  music  and  band 16 

Color-guard 17 

General  guides 17 

Article  Second. 

Instruction  of  the  battalion 18 

Instruction  of  sergeants 18 

*'           "    corporals 19 

Commands 19 


TITLE    SECOND. 

SCHOOL    OF   THE   SOLDIER. 

Part  First. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier   20 

Lesson      I. — Position  of  the  soldier '  21 

Lesson    II. — Facings 22 

Lesson  III. — Balance  step 23 


1  i  t}  6  O  -i 


vi  Table  of  Contents. 

PAGE 

Principles  of  the  direct  step,  in  common  and  quick 

time 25 

Lesson   IV. — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step....  26 

Part  ^Second. 

General  rules 28 

Lesson      I. — Principles  of  shouldered  arms 29 

Lesson     IL — Manual  of  arms  for  the  rifle 30 

Lesson  III. — Load  in  four  times,  and  at  will 49 

Lesson  IV. — Firings 52 

Lesson    V. — Fire  and  load,  kneeling,  and  do.  lying..  54 

Lesson  VI.— Bayonet  exercise 65 

Manual  of  arms  for  the  mushet. 

Principles  of  shouldered  arms ...»  57 

Support  arms 57 

Present  arms 58 

Order  arms 59 

Charge  bayonet 60 

Load  in  ten  times 61 

Load  in  four  times,  and  unfix  bayonet 67 

Fix  bayonet 68 

Secure  and  trail  arms 69 

Right  shoulder  shift  arms,  1  r.Q 

Arms  at  will,  J  

Inspection  of  arms 71 

Fix  bayonet,  spring  rammers,  >  yo 

Arms-port,  ^ 

Part  Third. 

Lesson    I. — Alignments 73 

Lesson   II. — March  by  the  front,  ditto,  in  double 
quick  time.    Face  about  in  marching,  and  march 

backwards 75 

Lesson  III. — March  by  the  flank,  ditto,   in  double 

quick  time 79 


Table  of  Contents.  vii 

PAGE 

Lesson    IV. — General  principles  of  wheeling — from 
a  halt,   marcUing.     Turning.     Both,   in   double 

quick  time 83 

Stack  arms 87 

Take  arms ■. 88 


TITLE   THIRD. 
SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany      90 

Manner  of  forming  the  company 90 

Lesson  First. 

Article     I. — To  open  ranks 92 

Article   II. — Alignments  in  open  ranks ^3 

Article  III. — To  close  ranks 94 

Article  IV. — Alignments  and  manual  of    arms   in 

closedranks 95 

Lesson  Second. 

Article     I. — To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will 96 

Article   II. — To  fire  by  company 96 

Article  III. — To  fire  by  file 97 

Article  IV. — To  fire  by  rank 98 

Article    V. — To  fire  by  the  rear  rank 99 

Lesson   Third. 

Article    I, — To  advance  in  line  of  battle 100 

Article   II. — To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it 102 

Article  III. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle 103 


viii  Tahle  of  Contents. 

PAGE 

Akticlt:  IV. — To   mark   time,  to  march  in  double 

quick  time,  and  the  back  step 104 

Article    V. — To  march  in  retreat 105 

Lesson  Fourth. 

Article     I. — To  march  by  the  flank 107 

Article    II. — To  change  direction  by  file 109 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  company  marching  by  a 

tiank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front 109 

Article  IV. — The  company  marching  by  the  flank, 

to  form  it  on  the  right  (or  left),  by  file,  into  line,  110 
Article    V. — The  company  marching  by  the  flank, 
to  form  it  by  company  in  platoon  into  line,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left,  in  march- 
ing   112 

Lesson  Fifth. 

Article     I. — To   break    into    column    by  platoon, 

^  either  at  a  halt,  or  marching 114 

Article    II. — To  march  in  column 118 

Article  III. — To  change  direction 119 

Article  IV. — To  halt  the  column 121 

Article  V, — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 
to  the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle,  either  at 
a  halt,  or  marching 122 

Lesson  Sixth. 

Article     I. — To  break  the  company  into  platoons, 

and  to  re-form  the  company 127 

Article    II. — Being  in  column,  to  break  files  to  the 

rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  the  line 129 

Article  IIL — To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to 

execute  the  movements  incident  thereto 132 

Article  IV. — Countermarch 137 

Article    V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 

on  the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle 139 


Tahle  of  Contents.  ix 

PAGE 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 

rank,  and  reciprocally 141 

Formation  of  a   company  from   two  ranks  into  four, 

and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  in  march 143 

Manual  of  the  sword  or  sabre,  for  officers 147 

Color-salute 148 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels 148 

Instruction  for  parade-rest 149 


TITLE    FOURTH. 
SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  battalion 150 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort 160 

Honors  paid  to  the  color 151 

Part  First. 

Article  I. — To  open  and  close  ranks "  152 

Article  III. — The  firings 153 

Part  Second. 

Article  I. — To  break  into  column,  by  company,  or 
division,  to  the  right  or  left,  from  a  halt,  and  in 
march 158 

Article  II. — To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  from  a  halt  and  in  march.  To 
advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  compa- 
nies, from  a  halt,  or  in  march.  From  same 
movement  to  form  line  to  the  front 160 

Article  III. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column, 

from  a  halt,  or  in  march 164 

Part  Third. 

Article  I. — March  in  column  at  full  distance — the 
right  about 169 


X  Table  of  Contents. 

Page. 
Article  III. — Change  of  direction  in  column  at  full 

distance 171 

Article  IV. — Halt  the  column .^ 172 

Article  V. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or 

in  mass,  on  the  leading  or  rear  company,  from  a 

halt,  or  in  march 173 

Article  VI. — March  in  column  at.  half  distance  or 

closed  in  mass 177 

Article  VII. — Change  direction  in  column  at  half 

distance  177 

Article  VIII. — Change  direction  of  a  column  closed 

in  mass,  marching  or  from  a  halt 178 

Article  IX. — Take  distances 181 

Article  X. — Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or 

half  distance ;  or  closed  in  mass 185 

Article  XL — Being  in  column  by  company,  closed 

in  mass,   to  form  divisions,  from  a  halt,  or  in 

march, 187 

Part  Foitrth. 

Article  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  bat- 
tle    190 

Article  II. — Different  modes  of  passing  from  column 

at  full  distance  into  line  of  battle ^....  190 

Article  III. — Fqrmation  in  line  of   battle  by  two 

movements; ..  204 

Article  IV. — Different  modes  of  passing  from  co- 
lumn at  half  distance  into  line  of  battle 206 

Article  y. — Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass,  208 

Part  Fifth. 

Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle 216 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it 220 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle...  223 
Article  VI. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  re- 
treat, and  to  face  it  to  the  front 225 


Tahle  of  Contents.  xi 

PAGE. 

Article  VIII. — Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and 

retreating 225 

Article  IX. — To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the 

right  or  left  flank 229 

Article  X. — To  march  by  the  flank 231 

Article  XI. — To   form  on  the  right  or  left  by  file 

into  line 233 

Article  XII. — Changes  of  front 235 

Article  XIII. — Formation  and  deployment  of  the 
column  doubled  on  the  centre,  from  a  halt,  and 
in  marching,  and  to  form  it  into  line  to  the  right 

or  left 238 

Article  XIV. — Dispositions  against  cavalry 244 

Article  XV.— The  rally 258 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

General  principles,   &c 260 

Article  I. — Deployments;  extend  or  close  intervals; 

relievG%kirmishers 262 

Article  II. — March  to  the  front ;  in  retreat ;  by  the 

flank;  change   direction..  271 

Article  III. — Firings 276 

Article  IV. — The  rally  and  the  assembly 280 

Article  V. — Deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers,  to 

rally  it 289 


HONORS  PAID  BY  THE  TROOPS. 

INSPECTIONS— REVIEWS,  &c. 

Compliments  to  officers  of  high  rank — civil  and  mili- 
tary   294 

Artillery  salutes 297 

Escorts  of  honor , 298 


xii  Tahle  of  Contents. 

PAGE 

Funeral  honors 298 

Form  of  inspection  for  infantry 302 

Forms  of  parade 306 

To  form  the  regiment  or  battalion 306 

Dress  parade 307 

Keview  of  a  battalion  of  infantry 311 

Guard-mounting 317 

Pveception  of  one  body  of  troops  by  another 322 

Musters \ 323 

The  roster,  or  details  for  service 324 

Duties  of  guards 326 

Guards 330 

Police  Guards 332 

Pickets 336 

Grand-guards  and  outposts 336 

Article  XIII. 

DUTIES   OF   CAPTAINS— COMPANIES— DUTIES   IN 
CAMP  AND  GARRISON,  Etc. 

Duties  of  Captains,  &c .§ 343 

Duties  in  camp  and  garrison 346 

Camps. 

Camp  of  infantry 349 

Cautionments 350 

Marches  351 

Soldiers  Rations — mode  of  cooking  them 355 

Suggestions  to  Soldiers 358 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE  FIRST. 


Article  First. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  order  of  battle,  sr  in 

line. 

1.  A  REGIMENT  IS  composed  of  ten  companies,  which 
■vrill  habitually  be  posted  from  ricjht  to  left,  in  the 
following  order:  first,  sixth, fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth, 
fifth,  tenth,  seventh,  second,  according  to-  the  rank  of 
captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  prin- 
ciple will  be  observed,  viz:  the  first  captain  will  com- 
mand the  right  company,  the  second  captain  the  left 
company,  the  third  captain  the  right  centre  company, 
and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated 
from  right  to  left,  frst  company,  seeo7id  company, 
&c.  This  designation  will  be  observed  in  the  ma- 
noeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever 
their  denomination,  will  form  the  frst  division;  the 
next  two  companies  the  second  divi&ion ;  and  so  on, 
to  the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal 
parts,  which  will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second 
platoon,  counting  from  the  right ;  and  each  platoon, 
in  like  manner,  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

2 


14  Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment, 
or  part  of  a  regiaient,  composed  of  two  or  more  com- 
panies, will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter  desig- 
nated, will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre 
battalion  company.  That  company,  and  all  on  its 
right,  will  be  denominated  the  right  wing  of  the  bat- 
talion ;  the  remaining  companies  the  left  loing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks ; 
and  each  company  will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in 
the  following  manner:  the  corporals  will  be  posted  in 
the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons, 
according  to  height ;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  tall- 
est man  will  form  the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest 
men  will  form  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last 
file,  which  will  be  composed  of  the  shortest  corporal 
and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in 
the  company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of 
four  men,  who  will  be  designated  comrades  in  battle. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  be 
thirteen  inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the 
rear  rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front 
rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion 
will  always  be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from 
the  strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 

Posts  of  Company  Officers,   Sergeants  and  Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  are  nine  in 
number,  and  will  be  posted  in  the  following  manner: 

13.  The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touch- 
ing with  the  left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow,  and  covering  the  captain.  In  the 
manoeuvres  he  will  be  denominated  covering  sergeant^ 
or  right  guide  of  the  company. 


Formation  of  the  Battalion.  '15 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be 
posted  as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  behind  the  rear 
ranks 

IG.  ThQjirst  lieutenant^  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
fourth  section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant^  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon. 

18.  The  third  lieutenant^  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
second  platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he 
will  be  designated  left  guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  T\\Q>  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  l^haffth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion, 
the  second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
and  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
as  prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — 
officers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals.  The 
colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from  one  com- 
pany to  command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain 
and  first  lieutenant  are  absent ;  but  this  authority  will 
give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  de- 
tached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and 
major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active 
service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when 
the  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear 


16  formation  of  the  Battalion. 

of  the  file-closers,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion. This  distance  will  be  reduced  whenever  there 
is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the  battalion.  » 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be 
opposite  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  re- 
spectively, and  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  ihe  file-closers. 
The  junior  major,  if  there  be  one,  twelve  paces  be- 
hind the  centre  of  the  battalion.  In  column,  he  is 
six  paces  from  the  guides,  abreast  of  the  centre  com- 
pany or  division. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  oppo- 
site the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively, 
and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  the 
lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the  ma- 
noeuvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all 
the  field  officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will 
command  the  battalion  ;  but  if  either  be  present,  he 
will  not  Call  the  senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer, 
except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff 
officers,  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and 
three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  quarter-master  sergeant,  on  a  line  with  the 
front  rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  the 
right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks, 
and  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers,  the 
left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  company. 
The  senior  principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  in 
front  of  the  field  music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in 
the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be 


Formation  of  the  Battalion.  17 

drawn  up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  num- 
bers, and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music, 
having  one  of  the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

36.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  com- 
posed of  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the 
right  centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time 
being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant, 
to  be  selected  by  the  colonel,  who  will  be  called,  for 
the  time,  color-hearer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals, 
respectively,  on  his  right  and  left ;  the  rear  rank  will 
be  composed  of  the  three  corporals  next  in  rank  ;  and 
the  three  remaining  corporals  will  be  posted  in  their 
rear,  and  on  the  line  of  tile-closers.  The  left  guide  of 
the  color  company,  when  these  three  last  named  cor- 
porals are  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  will  be  immedi- 
ately on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  pre- 
sent, theie  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  display  of 
colors,  except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  selected 
from  those  most  distinguished  for  regularity  and  pre- 
cision, as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms,  as  in 
their  marching.  The  latter  advantage,  and  a  just 
carriage  of  the  person,  are  to  be  more  particularly 
sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color-bearer. 

General  Guides. 

40.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  batta- 
lion, selected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among 
the  sergeants  (other  than  first  sergeants)  the  most  dis- 
tinguished for  carriage  under  arms,  and  accuracy  in 
marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denomina- 
ted, in  the  manoeuvres,  right  general  guidcy  and  left 


18  Instruction  of  the  Battalion. 

f/eneral  guide,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  file-closers; 
the  first  in  rear  of  the  ri<^ht,  and  the  second  in  rear  of 
the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 

Article  Second. 
Instruction  of  the  Battalion. 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for  the 
instruction  of  his  command.  lie  will  assemble  the 
officers  together  for  theoretical  and  practical  instruc- 
tion as  often  as  he  may  judge  necessary,  and  when 
unable  to  attend  to  this  duty  in  person,  it  will  be  dis- 
charged by  the  officer  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  in- 
struction of  their  non-commissioned  officers,  and  the  ad- 
jutant for  the  instruction  of  the  non-commissioned  staff. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers 
will  be  the  instructors  of  squads ;  but  if  there  be  not 
a  sufficient  number  of  company  officers  present,  intel- 
ligent sergeants  may  be  substituted. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  and  the  major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be 
the  principal  instructors,  substituting  frequently  the 
captain  of  the  company,  and  sometimes  one  of  the 
lieutenants. 

49.  Instructors  wnll  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and 
precise  words,  the  movement  to  be  executed ;  and 
not  to  overburden  the  memory  of  the  men,  they  will 
always  use  the  same  terms  to  explain  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

51.  The  sabre  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when 
required  to  be  used,  either  for  attack  or  defence  ;  the 
exercises  and  manoeuvres  will  be  executed  without  the 
bayonet. 

Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include 
the   School  of  the   Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Com- 


Instruction  of  the  Battalion.  19 

pany,_  and  the  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  Tliey  should 
likewise  know  all  the  details  of  service,  and  the  regu- 
lations prescribing  their  duties  in  garrison  and  in 
campaign. 

Instruction  of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe 
their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

G2.  The  command  o^  caution,  which  is  attention. 

63.  The  preparatorr/  command,  which  indicates  the 
movement  which  is  to  be  executed. 

64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or  halt, 
or,  in  the  manual  of  arms,  the  part  of  command  which 
causes  an  execution. 

_  65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  dis- 
tinct, and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of 
men  under  instruction. 

66.  The  commnrvd.  at teyition  is  pronounced  at  the  top 
of  the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 
^    67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced 
in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory 
commands  are  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of 
execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their 
length,  are  difiicult  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be 
divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  Avith  an  ascending 
progression  in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  iu 
such  a  manner  that  the  tone  of  execution  may  be 
more  energetic  and  elevated ;  the  divisions  are  indicated 
by  a  hyphen.  The  parts  of  commands  which  are  placed 
in  a  parenthesis,  are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE   SECOND. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

General  Rules  and  division  of  the  School  of  the 
Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  individual 
and  progressive  instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  in- 
structor never  requires  a  movement  to  be  executed 
until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation  of  it ;  and  he 
executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he  commands, 
so  as  to  join  example  to  precept.  lie  accustoms  the 
recruit  to  take,  by  himself,  the  position  which  is  ex- 
plained— teaches  him  to  rectify  it  only  M'hen  required 
by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that  all  the 
movements  are  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before 
passing  to  another.  After  they  have  been  properly 
executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the 
instructor  no  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order  ;  on 
the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may  judge 
of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the  end 
of  each  part  of  the  lessons,  and  oftener,  if  he  thinks 
proper,  especially  at  the  commencement ;  for  this  pur- 
pose he  commands  Rest. 

73.  At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer 
required  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his 
place.  If  the  instructor  wishes  merely  to  relieve  the 
attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place — Rest; 
the  soldier  is  then  not  required  to  preserve  his  immo- 
bility, but  he  always  keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its  place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vart  I.  21 

instruction,  he  commands — Attention  ;  at  this  com- 
mand, the  soldier  takes  his  position,  remains  motion- 
less, and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  the  Soldiei^  will  be  divided  into 
three  parts  :  the  first,  comprehendino;  what  ought  to  be 
taught  to  recruits  without  arms ;  the  second,  the  manual 
of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings  ;  the  third,  the  prin- 
ciples of  alignment,  the  march  by  the  front,  the  differ- 
ent steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the  principles  of 
wheeling,  and  those  of  change  of  direction  ;  also,  long 
marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 


PART  FIRST. 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  re- 
cruit at  a  time  ;  but  three  or  four  may  be  united,  when 
the  number  be  great,  compared  with  that  of  the  in- 
structors. In  this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed  in 
a  single  rank,  at  one  pace  from  each  other.  In  this 
part,  the  recruits  will  be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 
Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each 
other  something  less  than  a  right  angle  ; 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness  ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  for- 
ward ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally  ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally; 

The  elbows  near  the  body  ; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front, 
the  little  finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons ; 


22  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  I. 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  con- 
straint; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking  the 
ground  about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the  po- 
sition of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach 
him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.  He  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Eyes — Right.     2.  Front. 

81.  At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  head 
gently,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye 
in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes  fixed  on 
the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in, 
the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume 
the  direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  be  executed 
by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  movement  of 
the  head  does  not  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoul- 
ders, which  will  happen  if  the  movement  of  the  former 
be  too  sudden. 

Lesson  II. 

Facings. 

88.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  in 
one  time,  or  pause.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,     2.  Right  (or  Ze/i{)--FACE. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot 
slightly,  turn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little, 
and  then  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left, 
and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  be  exe- 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vd^vi  I.  23 

cuted  in  two  times,  or  pauses,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Squad.     2.  About — Face. 

91.  {First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit  will 
turn  on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front, 
carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  opposite  to, 
and  full  three  inches  from,  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square 
to  each  other. 

92.  {Second  time.)  At  the  word yacc,  the  recruit  will 
turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  extend  the 
hams,  face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the  same  time,  the 
right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

93.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  these  motions 
do  not  derange  the  position  of  the  body. 

Balance  Step.* 

87.  Before  commencing  the  march  the  soldier  should 
always  be  instructed  in  the  balance  step,  the  object  of 
which  is  to  teach  him  the  free  movement  of  his  limbs, 
while  he  at  the  same  time  preserves  perfect  squareness 
of  the  shoulders,  with  the  greatest  steadiness  of  the 
body;  no  labor  should  be  spared  to  attain  this  object, 
which  lies  at  the  very  foundation  of  good  marching. 

The  squad  being  at  attention,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Left  foot — Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  soldier  will  throw  his  left  foot 
gently  forward,  about  twenty-four  inches,  balancing 
his  body  well  on  the  right  foot,  without  changing  the 
position  of  the  shoulders,  and  without  the  body  losing 
its  erect  position.  The  toe  should  be  turned  out  as 
in  the  position  of  the   soldier,  the  foot   about  three 

*The  numbers  of  these  paragraphs  are  retained   with   them, 
from  Gilham's  Manual. 


24  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  I. 

inches  from  the  ground  and  very  nearly  parallel  to  it, 
the  toe  being  very  slightly  depressed. 
At  the  command : 

Left  foot—  Rear. 

The  left  foot  is  brought  gently  back,  the  ball  of  the 
left  foot  close  to  the  right  heel,  the  leg  straight,  toe 
raised,  and  heel  depressed. 

As  soon  as  the  soldier  becomes  steady  in  the  new 
position,  the  instructor  repeats  the  command,  left  foot 
forward,  then  left  foot  rear,  for  several  times,  and  then 
commands: 

Halt. 

At  which  the  left  foot,  either  advanced  or  to  the 
rear,  is  brought  to  the  right,  as  in  the  position  of  the 
soldier. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  soldier  to  balance  on 
the  left  foot,  by  advancing  and  retiring  the  right,  as 
has  been  directed  for  the  left. 

The  Direct  Step. 

88.  After  the  soldier  is  sufficiently  instructed  in  the 
balance  step  to  execute  it  on  either  foot  without  losing 
his  balance,  the  instructor  will  proceed  to  instruct 
him  in  the  mechanism  of  the  direct  step.  For  this 
purpose  he  will  command  ; 

1.  Bp  the  numbers — Forward.     2,  One. 

At  the  command  one,  the  soldier  will  throw  forward 
the  left  foot,  as  in  the  position  of  left  foot  fortvard;  the 
instructor  then  commands : 

Two. 

At  this  command  the  weight  of  the  body  is  thrown 
forward,  the  left  foot  striking  the  ground  without 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vtixi  I.  25 

shock,  at  the  distance  of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the 
right;  the  body  assumes  the  perpendiciihir  position, 
and  the  right  foot  is  brought  up  to  the  position  of 
right  foot  rear.  The  right  foot  is  then  brought  for- 
ward at  the  command  one,  and  the  step  completed  at 
the  command  iwo ;  thus  the  squad  is  made  to  advance 
step  by  step.  The  halt  is  executed  as  in  the  balance 
step. 

Lesson  III. 
Principles  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in  com- 
mon time,  will  bo  twenty-eight  inches,  reckoning  from 
heel  to  heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the  rate  of  ninety  in 
a  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmM  in 
his  position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principles  and 
mechanism  of  this  step— placing  himself  six  or  seven 
paces  from,  and  facing  to,  the  recruit.  lie  will  him- 
self execute  slowly  the  step  in  the  way  of  illustration, 
and  then  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.      2.   Common  time.      3.  March.* 

9G.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the 
w^eight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg,  without  bending 
the  left  knee. 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but 
without  a  jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near  the 
ground,  the  Lam  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed, 
and  as  also  the  knee  slightly  turned  out;  he  will,  at  the 
same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward,  and 
plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  the 
distance  where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right  when  the 
weight  of  the  body  is  brought  forward,  the  whole  of 

*The2<;l  and  3d  of  these  commands  will  be  given  whenever  in 
the  manoeuvre-s,  it  is  desirable  to  move  at  the  ordinary  step.        ' 
o 


26  JSchool  of  the  Soldier — Part  I. 

which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot.  The  recruit 
will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  ri^ht  foot  and 
plant  it  as  above,  the  heel  twenty-eig;ht  inches  from 
the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march 
without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  the  one  against 
the  other,  without  turning  the  shoulders,  and  preserv- 
ing always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

98.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
inarch,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  foot  in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up,  and  planted 
by  the  side  of  the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  time, 
to  the  recruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  giving  the 
command  one  at  the  instant  of  raising  a  foot,  and  two 
at  the  instant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing  the 
cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  minute.  This  method 
will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the  mind  the 
two  motions  into  which  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are 
the  same  as  for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at 
the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in 
quick  time,  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 

Lesson  IV. 
Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty- 
three  inches,  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hun- 
dred and  sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vurt  I.  27 

the  principles  and  mechanism  of  the   double  quick 
step,  will  command : 

1.  Double  quick  ttep.     2.  March. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  raise  his 
hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed,  the 
nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command  he  will  raise  to  the 
front  his  left  leg  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the  knee  the 
greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between  the 
knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed  ;  he 
will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former  position  ;  with 
the  right  leg  he  will  execute  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  movement  of  the 
legs  will  be  continued  until  the  command : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt, 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring 
the  foot  which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and 
dropping  at  the  same  time  his  hands  by  his  side,  will 
resume  the  position  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight 
paces  from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the 
cadence  by  the  commands,  one  and  two,  given  alter- 
nately at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be  brought  to 
the  ground,  which  at  first  will  be  in  common  time,  but 
its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  suflSciently  established  in  the 
principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  forward.       2.  Double  quick.       3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw 
the  weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his  arms 
as  indicated  No.  106. 

113.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward 


28  Sclwol  of  the  Soldier— Fsivt  11. 

the  left  foot,  the  \og  slightly  bent,  the  knee  somewhat 
raised — will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe  first,  thirty- 
three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right  foot 
will  then  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  left.  This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will 
take  place  by  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the 
foot  that  is  planted,  and  by  allowing  a  natural,  oscil- 
latory motion  to  the  arms. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with 
different  degrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circum- 
stances the  cadence  of  this  step  may  be  increased  to 
one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute.  At  this  rate  a 
distance  of  four  thousand  yards  would  be  passed  over 
in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

115.  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double 
quick  step,  the  only  difference  consisting  in  a  greater 
degree  of  swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double  quick 
time,  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much 
as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth  closed. 
Experience  has  proved  that,  by  conforming  to  this 
principle,  a  man  can  pass  over  a  much  longer  distance 
and  with  less  fatigue. 

PART  SECOND. 

GENERAL    RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this 
second  part  until  they  shall  be  well  established  in  the 
position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  manner  of  marching 
at  the  different  steps. 

119.  lie  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will 
place  in  the  same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  in- 
struct them  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms,  as 
follows : 


School  of  the  Soldier— T art  II.  29 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS  FOR  THE  RIFLE. 

Lesson  I. 

Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the 
first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause 
him  to  bend  therio;ht  arm  slightly,  and  place  the  piece 
in  it,  in  the  following  manner: 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand — the  barrel  nearly 
vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — 
the  guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its 
full  length  near  the  body ;  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers  closed  to- 
gether, and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under 
the  cock,  which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

Lesson  II. 
Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four 
men,  placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and 
afterwards  in  twf>  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time 
(or  pause),  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions, 
the  better  to  make  known  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  the 
manual  of  arms,  with  the  exceptions  herein  indicated, 
is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute  ;  but,  in 
order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor  will, 
at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the 
motions,  without  requiring  a  nice  observance  of  the 
cadence,  to  which  he  will  bring  the  recruits  progres- 
sively, and  after  they  shall  have  become  a  little  famil- 
iarized with  the  handling  of  the  piece. 

3* 


30  School  of  the  Soldier— VdiXt  II. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the 
rammer,  and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet, 
cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed,  nor  even 
with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be  subjected  to 
that  cadence.  The  instructor  will,  however,  labor  to 
cause  these  motions  to  be  executed  with  promptness, 
and,  above  all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide 
the  brisk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or 
pause).  The  commands  two,  three,  and  four,  will  de- 
cide the  brisk  execution  of  the  other  motions.  As 
soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  comprehend  the  posi- 
tions of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  be 
taught  to  execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its  dif- 
ferent motions;  the  mechanism  of  the  time  will  never- 
theless be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a  perfect  use  of  the 
piece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slurring  over, 
either  of  the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  fol- 
lowing progression.     The  instructor  will  command: 

Support — Aems. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

133.  [First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the 
right  hand,  perpendicularly  to  the  front  and  between 
the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear ;  seize  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  raise  this  hand  as  high 
us  the  chin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand  four  inches  below  the  cock. 

134.  [Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front;  carry  the  piece  to 
the  left  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm  extended  on 
the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock ;  sup- 
port the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm,  the  left  hand 
resting  on  the  right  breast. 

135.  [Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the 
side. 


School  of  the  Soldier— V&rt  II.  31 

136.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command: 

Rest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up 
smartly  the  right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  piece 
(small  of  the  stock),  when  they  will  not  be  required  to 
preserve  silence,  or  steadiness  of  position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to 
pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadi- 
ness, he  will  command: 

1.    Attention.     2.  Squad. 

139.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  support  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

140.  {First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand  under  and  against  the  left  fore-arm ;  seize 
it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  ex- 
tended ;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from  the  shoulder, 
the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

141.  [Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertically 
to  the  right  shoulder  with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to 
the  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as 
to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger, 
slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 

142.  [Third  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Present — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

143.  [First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring  the 
piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer 


32  School  of  the  Soldier— TslH  II. 

to  the  front ;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  half-way  between  the  guide  sight  and  lower 
band,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  against 
the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizontal  and  resting  against 
the  body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

144.  [Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  {First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  change  the  position  of  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of 
the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the 
right  arm  nearly  straight. 

146.  {Second  motio7i.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Order — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

147.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with 
the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand;  loosen 
the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece  with  the 
left,  re-seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  above  the 
lower  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the 
butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right 
hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

148.  {Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through 
the  right  hand  to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly  the 
fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  Order  Arms. 

149.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  extended  along  the  stock;   the  other 


School  of  the  Soldier— V2iXi  IL  33 

finp;ers  extended  and  joined  ;  the  muzzle  about  two 
inches  from  the  rio;ht  shoulder;  the  rammer  in 
front;  the  toe  (pr  boak)  of  the  butt,  against,  and  in 
aline  with  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  per- 
pendicular. 

150.  When  the  instructor  may  •wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command: 

Rest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to 
pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadi- 
ness, he  will  command: 

1.   Attention.     2.    Squad. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms  . 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

154.  [First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  vertically 
with  the  right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast, 
and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the  body; 
seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and 
drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at 
the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
embracing  the  guard;  press  the  piece  against  the 
shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 

155.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 


34  School  of  tlie  Soldier—VdiXi  II. 

Load  in  nine  times. 

1.  Load.* 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

156.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  as  hio;h  as 
the  right  elbow,  and  bring  it  vertically  opposite  the 
middle  of  the  body,  shift  the  right  hand  to  the  upper 
band,  place  the  butt  between  the  feet,  the  barrel  to  the 
front;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  muzzle,  which 
should  be  three  inches  from  the  body;  carry  the  right 
hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next 
two  fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  car- 
tridge upright  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers, 
near  the  top ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of 
and  near  the  muzzle — the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

4.   Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel;  disengage 
the  ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  hand   and  the 


*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the 
instructor  will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the 
front. 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  35 

thumb  and  first  two  finojers  of  the  left;  insert  it  into 
the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it  down 
with  the  right  thumb;  seize  the  head  of  the  rammer 
with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  of  the  right  hand,  the 
other  fingers  closed,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Draw — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

160.  {First  motion.)  Half  draw  the  rammer  by 
extending  the  right  arm  ;  steady  it  in  this  position 
with  the  left  thumb;  grasp  the  rammer  near  the  muz- 
zle with  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost, 
the  nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
rammer. 

161.  {Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the 
pipes  by  again  extending  the  arm  ;  the  rammer  in  the 
prolongation  of  the  pipes. 

162.  [Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little 
end  of  the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder  ; 
place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the  ball,  the  back  of 
the  hand  to  the  front. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and 
steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left 
hand  ;  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small  end  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of 
the  hand  to  the  front;  press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows 
near  the  body. 

7.  Return — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

164.  {First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  half-way 
out,  and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb; 


36  Sclwol  of  the  Soldier— Tsxvt  II. 

grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  the  little 
iinger  uppermost,  the  uails  to  the  front,  the  thumb 
along  the  rammer  ;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore  by 
extending  the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer 
in  the  prolongation  of  the  bore. 

165.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head 
of  the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  and 
insert  it  in  the  pipes  until  the  right  hand  reaches  the 
muzzle,  the  nails  to  the  front. 

166.  [Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  by 
placing  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head 
of  the  rammer ;  pass  the  left  hand  down  the  barrel  to 
the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Prime.* 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

167.  {First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise  the 
piece  till  the  hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand  ;  half  face  to 
the  right ;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot 
behind  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left ;  the  hol- 
low of  the  right  foot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the 
left  hand  down  to  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  along 
the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ;  bring  the 
piece  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore- 
arm— the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the 
muzzle  on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

168.  [Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb 
of  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  supported  against  the 


*  If  Maynard's  primer  be  used,  the  command  will  be,  load  in 
eight  times,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be,  shoulder  arms, 
and  executed  from  return  rammer,  in  one  time  and  two  motions,  as 
follows : 

(First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

{Second  motion.)    Drop  tlie  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  37 

guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock— remove  the  old  cap 
with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap 
from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it 
dovyn  with  the  thumb ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand. 

9  Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  viotions. 

169.  [First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder  and  support  it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face 
to  the  front ;  bring  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  and  on 
a  line  with  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

1/0.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side.  *' 

Ready. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

171.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
the  right  hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the 
left  heel ;  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  and  place  it 
at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite 
to  and  against  the  left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the 
lett  hand  at  the  lower  baud  and  detach  it  slight^  from 
the  shoulder.  °     *' 

172  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  left  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore- 
arm, the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as 
the  eye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side;  place  at  the 
same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock 
the  other  fingers  under  and  against  the  guard 

173.  (Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at 
the  small  of  the  stock  without  deranging  the  position 
ot  the  butt.  ^ 

4 


38  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 


Aim. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support 
the  butt  against  the  right  shoulder;  the  left  elbow 
down,  the  right  as  high  as  the  shoulder  ;  incline  the 
head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may  perceive 
quickly  the  notch  of  the  hausse,  the  front  sight,  and 
the  object  aimed  at ;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right 
thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  fore-finger  on  the 
trigger. 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to  exe- 
cute the  firings,  the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a  little 
less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to  facilitate  the  aim  of 
the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry 
the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  to- 
wards the  left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right, 
inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 

Fire. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire, 
without  lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in 
this  position. 

Load. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the 
game  time  face  to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of 
load  as  indicated  No.  156.  Each  rear  rank  man  will 
bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  loading  to  be  continued  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  No.  156  and  following. 


School  of  the  Soldier— T&ri  II.  39 

181.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish 
the  recruits  to  re-load,  he  will  command ; 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand 
and  resume  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  at  the  same 
time  face  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and 
bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  com- 
mand Jire,  the  instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  posi- 
tion of  aim,  will  command  : 

Recover — Aems. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw 
the  finger  from  tho  trigger  ;  at  the  command  arms, 
retake  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  of  ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring 
them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command : 

Shoulder — Arm  s  . 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb 
upon  the  cock,  the  fore-finger  On  the  trigger,  half- 
cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the  piece 
briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  shall  com- 
mand: 


40  School  of  the  Soldier— Vd.vi  II. 

Fix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

188.  [First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand. 

189.  [Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  lower  it  with  the  left  hand,  opposite  the  middle 
of  the  body,  and  place  the  butt  between  the  feet  with- 
out shock  ;  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  vertical, 
the  muzzle  three  inches  from  the  body  ;  seize  it  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band,  and  carry  the  left 
hand  reversed  to  the  handle  of  the  sabre-bayonet. 

190.  [Third  jnotion.)  Draw  the  sabre-bayonet  from 
the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of  the  barrel; 
seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm  extended, 
the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

191.  [First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  ram- 
mer to  the  front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  timo 
•with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right 
arm  nearly  extended. 

192.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand 
by  the  side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

193.  [First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
the  right  hand  and  make  a  half  fiice  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  oppo- 
site to,  and  three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet 
square  ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  left 
hand  a  little  above  the  lower  band. 


School  of  the  Soldier— V^vi  11.  41 

194.  [Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  body  ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the 
same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  sup- 
ported against  the  hip;  the  point  of  the  sabre-bayonet 
as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — Aems.         • 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  [Fii'st  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly 
with  the  left  hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  ft 
against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front ; 
turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  ;  slide 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right 
hand  nearly  extended. 

196.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly 
by  the  side. 

Trail — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

197.  [First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  order  arms. 

198.  [Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly 
to  the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches 
from  the  ground.  The  right  hand  supported  at  the 
hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men  may 
not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front 
rank. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

199.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  per- 
pendicularly in  the  right  hand,  the  little-finger  in  rear 
of  the  barrel ;  at  the  command  ai^ns,  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  shoxdder  from  the  position  of 
order  arms. 

4* 


42  School  of  the  JSoIdier^Tavt  II. 

Unjix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

200.  {First  and  second  motions.)  The  same  as  the 
first  and  second  motion  of  jf?x  bayonet,  except  that,  at 
the  end  of  the  second  command,  the  thumb  of  the 
right  hand  will  be  placed  on  the  spring  of  the  sabre- 
bayonet,  and  tlie  left  hand  will  embrace  the  handle  of 
the  sabre-bayonet  and  the  barrel,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  blade. 

201.  {Third  motion.)  Press  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand  on  the  spring,  .wrest  off  the  sabre-bayonet,  turn 
it  to  the  right,  the  edge  to  the  front,  lower  the  guard 
until  it  touches  the  right  hand,  which  will  seize  the 
back  and  the  edge  of  the  blade  between  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers,  the  other  fingers  holding  the 
piece;  change  the  position  of  the  hand  without  quit- 
ting tbe  handle,  return  the  sabre-bayonet  to  the  scab- 
bard, and  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm 
extended. 

Shoulder — Arm  s . 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

202.  {First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
from  /laj  bayonet,  No.  191. 

203.  {Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  mo- 
tion from^x  bayonet,  No.  192. 

Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  {First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  support  arms,  No.  133,  except  with  the  right  hand 
seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  bring  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  hand  at 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  43 

the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and 
extended  on  the  rammer  ;  the  piece  erect  and  detached 
from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  against  the  piece. 

206.  [Third  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it 
under  the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it 
from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the 
hip,  the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  by  the, 
eide. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

207.  {First  motion,)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of 
the  stock.  The  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the 
shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arm 
along  the  piece.  '  ' 

208.  [Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  mo- 
tion of  shoulder  arms  from  a  siqjport. 

209.  [Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  motion 
of  shoidder  arms  from  a  siipvort. 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

210.  [First  motion.)  Detach  the  piece  perpendicu- 
larly from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize, 
it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide- 
sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder,  and  four  inches  from  it ;  place,  at  the 
same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  be- 
tween the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two  fingers  under 
the  butt  plate. 

211.  [Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  raise  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards;  let  fall 
at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


44  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 

Shoulder — Arms, 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

212.  [First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicu- 
larly by  extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the 
rammer  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide 
eight. 

213.  [Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right 
hand,  which  will  immediately  embrace  the  guard, 
lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  slide 
lip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the 
lingers  extended  and  closed.  Drop  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor 
will  sometimes  cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right 
fihoulder.     To  this  effect,  he  will  command: 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  [First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  below  and  near  the  left  fore-arm,  place  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the 
first  two  fingers. 

216.  [Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards,  carry  it  to  the  right 
shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the 
muzzle  elevated ;  hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and 
place  the  right  hand  upon  the  butt  as  is  prescribed 
No.  210,  and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

217.  [First  motion.)  Tho  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  shoulder  arms,  No.  212. 

218.  [Second  rnoiion.)    Turn  the   piece  with  both 


ScJiool  of  the  Soldier— Fart  II.  45 

hands,  tho  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock,  place  the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast  as 
is  prescribed  No.  134,  and  let  fall  the  ri^ht  hand  by 
the  side. 

Ar7ns — At  will. 
Ohe  time  and  one  motion, 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure 
on  either  shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the 
muzzle  elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

Inspection  of  Arms. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  hav- 
ing the  sabre-bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instruc-' 
tor  wishes  to  cause  an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will 
command: 

Inspection — Arm  s  . 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

227.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  below  and  near  the  upper  band,  carry  it  with 
both  hands  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  the  butt 
between  the  feet,  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel 
vertical,  the  muzzle  about  three  inches  from  the  body; 
carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  sabre-bayonet, 
draw  it  from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel; 
grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  and  near  the 
upper  band,  seize  the  rammer  with  the  thumb  and 


46  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 

fore-finger  of  the  right  hand  bent,  the  other  fingers 
closed. 

228.  {Second  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  as  has 
been  explained  in  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  bore,  replace  the  piece  with  the  loft  hand 
opposite  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position 
of  ordered  arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession 
the  piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of 
the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches  him,  will 
raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it 
with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight, 
the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the 
chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye;  the  instructor 
will  take  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and, 
after  inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the  recruit,  who 
will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace 
it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

230.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him, 
each  recruit  will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the 
command  inspection  arms,  return  the  rammer,  and 
jesume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  oj  aj^ms,  the  instructor 
should  merely  wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he 
will  command: 

Fix — Bayonet. 

232.  Take  the  position  indicated  No.  227,  fix  bayo- 
nets as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately  resume 
the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing, 
to  ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged, 
he  will  command : 

>S^nn^— Rammers. 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been 
explained  above,  and  immediately  retake  the  position 
of  ordered  arms. 


School  of  the  Soldier— P&ri  II.  47 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take 
the  rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the 
barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to  make  it  ring  in  the 
barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him, 
will  return  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

To  mark  time. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  the 
iustructor  will  command : 

1.  Mark  time.        2.  March. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  a  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  re- 
cruits will  make  a  semblance  of  marching,  by  bring- 
ing the  heels  by  the  side  of  each  other,  and  observing 
the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  raising  each  foot  alter- 
nately without  advancing. 

242.  The  instructor,  wishing  the  direct  step  to  be 
resumed,  will  command : 

1.  Forimrd.        2.  Maech. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  givea 
as  prescribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.   Change  step.        2.  March. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that 
which  is  in  front,  and  step  off  again  with  the  foot 
which  was  in  front. 


48  School  of  the  Soldier— Tsivt  II. 

To  march  hacTcwards. 

246.  The  instructor,  wishing  the  squad  to  march 
"backwards,  will  command : 

1.  Squad  backward.        2.  March. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step 
off  smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the 
rear,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on  with  the 
feet  in  succession  till  the  command  halt,  which  will 
always  be  preceded  by  the  caution  squad.  The  men 
will  halt  at  this  command,  and  bring  back  the  foot  in 
front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

248.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  re- 
cruits march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect 
position  of  the  body  and  the  piece  be  not  deranged. 

Lesson  III. 
To  load  in  four  times. 

251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of 
the  command;  the  three  others  at  the  commands,  two^ 
three  and  four. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.  2.  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

253.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 

Three. 

254.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime. 


School  of  the  Soldier— Turi  II.  49 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  time  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will, 
which  will  be  executed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but 
continued,  and  without  resting  on  either  of  the  times. 
He  will  command : 

1.  Load  at  will.  2.  Load. 

257.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by 
degrees,  to  load  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude, 
each  without  regulating  himself  by  his  neighbor,  and, 
above  all,  without  waiting  for  him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed,  No.  129,  is  not  appli- 
cable to  loading  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 

Lesson  IV. 

Firings. 

259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,^  and  will  be 
executed  as  follows : 

The  direct  fire. 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  com- 
mands: 

1.  Fire  by  squad.     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Aim. 
5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

261.  These  several  eommands  will  be  executed  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the 
third  command,  the  men  will  come  to  the  position  of 
ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the  fourth,  thev 
will  aim  according  to  the  rank  in  which  each  may  find 
himself  placed,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining  forward  a 

5 


60  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 

little  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that  their 
pieces  may  reach  as  much  beyond  the  front  rank  as 
possible. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their 
pieces,  and  return  immediately  to  the  position  of 
ready. 

263.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  commands : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

264.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease, 
he  will  command: 

Cease  firing. 

265.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing, 
but  will  load  their  pieces,  if  unloaded,  and  afterwards 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 

Oblique  firings. 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the 
right  and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the 
direct  fire,  with  this  single  difi"erence — the  command 
aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or 
left  oblique. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the  right. 

267.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  exe- 
cute what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command  right  oblique,  the 
two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  rank  man  will 
aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  the  feet;  each  rear 
rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  eight  inches 
toward*  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of 
his  fii-e  leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining  the  upper 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  51 

part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  left 
knee. 

Positions  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command  lejt  ohlique,  the 
two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  left  shoulder,  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take 
aim  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet ;  each  man 
in  the  rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  next  man 
on  the  right  of  his  tile  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bend- 
ing a  little  the  right  knee. 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men 
of  each  rank  will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  direct  fire;  the  rear  rank  men  bringing 
back  the  foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  the 
side  of  the  other.  Each  man  will  continue  to  load  as 
if  isolated. 

To  Jire  hy  file* 

273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  the  two 
ranks,  the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  and 
without  regulating  on  each  other,  except  for  the  first 
fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  file.     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Commence 

FIRING. 

275.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take 
the  position  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right 
will  aim  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will 
take  the  position  indicated,  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces 


52  Schaol  of  the  Soldier— Vurt  II. 

briskly  and  fire  a  second  time  ;  re-load  and  fire  again, 
and  80  on  in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim  at  the  instant  the  first 
brings  down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  will  conform,  in  all 
respects,  to  that  which  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men 
will  not  be  required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the 
position  of  ready  and  continue  the  fire. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease, 
he  will  command : 

Cease — Firing. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing. 
If  they  have  fired,  they  will  load  their  pieces  and 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder  ;  if  at  the  position  of  ready, 
they  will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms  ;  if  in  the  posi- 
tion of  aim,  they  will  bring  down  their  pieces,  half- 
cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  Jlre  hy  rank. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed- by  each 
entire  rank,  alternately. 

284.  The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.      2.  Squad.      3.  Ready.      4.  Rear  rank. 
5.  Aim.     6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will 
take  the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire. 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will, 
execute  that  which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire,  and  afterwards  take  the  position  of  ready. 

287.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of 


ScTiool  of  the  Soldier— 'P2iri  II.  53 

the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Front  rank.      2.  Aim.       3.  Fire.       4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  rear 
rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  re-commence  the  firing  by 
the  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from 
rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to  cease, 
when  he  will  command,  cease  firing,  which  will  be 
executed  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 
To  Jire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  supposed 
loaded  and  drawn  up  in  one  rank.  The  instruction 
will  be  given  to  each  man  individually,  without  times 
or  motions,  and  in  the  following  manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Fire  and  Load  kneeling. 

> 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ;  then 
carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the  right  of  the 
left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient  for  placing  the 
right  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bending  the  left  leg  ; 
place  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  ;  lower  the 
piece,  the  left  fore-arm  supported  upon  the  thigh  on 
the  same  side,  the  right  hand  on  the  small  oif  the 
stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right  thigh,  the  left 
hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the  lower  baud. 

293.  lie  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  left 
around  the  knee  supported  on  the  ground,  until  this 
leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  left 

6* 


54  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 

foot,  and  thus  seat  himself  comfortably  on  the  right 
heel. 

294.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  ri^ht  hand  and  sup- 
port it  with  the  left,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band, 
the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near  the  knee; 
seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb,  the  forefinger  under 
the  guard,  cock  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the 
stock  ;  bring  the  piece  to  the  shoulder,  aim  and  ^Ve. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and 
support  it  with  the  left  hand,  the  butt  resting  against 
the  right  thigh  ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  rising  on 
the  knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  the  butt  resting  on 
the  ground;  in  this  position  support  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  draw  cartridge  witli  the 
right  and  load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  neces- 
sary, with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded,  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with 
the  left  hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper  band  ;  seize 
it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small 
of  the  stock  ;  turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost  and 
nearly  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left 
thigh  ;  half-cock,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  rise, 
and  return  to  the  ranks. 

297.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through 
the  remainder  of  the  squad. 

To  fire  o.nd  load  lying. 

298.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank 
and  loaded;  the  instruction  will  be  given  individually 
and  without  times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command: 

Fire  and  load  lying. 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  he  will 
then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on  both  knees, 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  65 

and  place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his  belly.  In 
this  position  he  will  support  the  piece  nearly  hori- 
zontal with  the  left  hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower 
band,  the  butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow  rest- 
ing on  the  ground,  the  barrel  uppermost;  cock  the 
piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  carry  this  hand  to  the 
small  of  the  stock;  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands, 
press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on 
both  elbows,  aim  and  Jire. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down 
and  turn  upon  his  left  side,  still  resting  on  his  left 
elbow;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite 
his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on  the  ground;  take 
out  a  cartridge  with  the  right  hand;  seize  the  small  of 
the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with 
the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers;  he  will  then  throw 
himself  on  his  back,  still  holding  the  piece  with  both 
hands;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place  the  butt  be- 
tween the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle  elevated. 
In  this  position,  charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer,  ram 
cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn 
again  upon  his  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime, 
then  raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn  about,  and 
resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  throughout  the 
squad. 

Lesson  VI. 

Bayonet  Exercise. 

304.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  con- 
fined to  two  movements,  the  guard  against  infantry, 
and  the  guard  against  cavalry.  The  men  will  be 
placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  paces  interval,  and  being 
at  shoulder  arms,  the  instructor  will  command: 


56  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 

1.   Guard  against  Infantry.     2.  Guaed. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

305.  {First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other; 
at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly,  and  seize  it 
with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

306.  [Second  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty 
inches  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  oa 
the  prolongation  of  the  left,  the  knees  slightly  bent, 
the  weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on  bcth  legs; 
lower  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost, 
the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ;  seize  the  piece  at  the 
same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the 
stock,  the  arms  falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  slightly  elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

307.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left  and  face  to 
the  front. 

1.   Guard  against   Cavalry.     2.  Guard. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

308.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  guard  against 
infantry,  except  that  the  right  hand  will  be  supported 
against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  height  of 
the  eye,  as  in  charge  bayonet. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  face  to 
the  front. 


School  of  the  Soldier— Tart  II.  57 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS  FOR  THE  MUSKET.* 
Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

94.  Each  soldier  being  in  the  position  of  the  soldier, 
the  instructor  will  cause  him  to  turn  up  the  left  hand 
without  bending  the  wrist,  the  left  fore-arm  only  act- 
ing. The  instructor  will  raise  the  piece  perpendicu- 
larly, and  place  it  as  follows: 

The  piece  in  the  left  hand,  the  arm  very  slightly 
bent,  the  elbow  back  near  the  body,  the  palm  of  the 
hand  pressing  on  the  outer  flat  of  the  butt:  the  outer 
edge  of  the  latter  on  the  upper  joints  of  the  fingers,  the 
heel  of  the  butt  between  the  middle  and  fore-fingers, 
the  thumb  on  the  front  screw  of  the  butt  plate,  the  re- 
maining fingers  under  the  butt,  the  butt  more  or  less 
kept  back  according  to  the  conformation  of  the  man, 
so  that  the  piece,  seen  from  the  front,  shall  appear 
perpendicular,  and  also,  that  the  movement  of  the 
thigh,  in  marching,  may  not  raise  it  or  cause  it  to 
waver;  the  stock  below  the  tail  band,  resting  against 
the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  just  within  the  joint,  the 
right  arm  hanging  naturally  as  prescribed  in  the 
position  of  the  soldier. 

The  manual  of  the  ransket  will  be  taught  in  the  fol- 
lowing order.     The  instructor  commands : 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

95.  {First  motion.)  "With  the  right  hand  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  briskly,  4  inches  below  the  lock, 
raising  the  piece  a  little,  but  not  turning  it. 

{Second  motion.)  Take  the  left  hand  from  the  butt; 
extend  the  left  forearm  upward  across  the  body,  and 

*The  numbers  of  these  paragraphs  are  retained  with  them, 
from  Gilham's  Manual. 


58  Scliool  of  the   Soldier— Tart  II. 

under  the  hammer,  the  left  hand  flat  on  the  right 
hreast. 

[Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  arm  smartly  to  its 
position.  The  squad  being  at  support  arms,  the  in- 
structor commands: 

Carry — Akms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

96.  First  motion.  Carry  quickly  the  right  hand  to 
the  small  of  the  stock. 

Second  motion.  Place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt, 
as  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

Third  motion.  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand  to  ita 
position,  and  drop  with  the  left,  at  the  same  time,  the 
piece  into  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

Present — Aems. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

97.  First  7notion.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
the  lock  out,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the 
same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  the  piece  perpendic- 
ular and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  hand 
remaining  under  the  butt. 

[Second  motion.)  Complete  the  turning  inwards  of 
the  piece,  so  as  to  bring  it  erect  before  the  centre  of 
the  body,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  the  right  hand 
under  and  against  the  guard  ;  seize  it  smartly  at  the 
same  time  with  the  left  hand  just  above  the  lock,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  on  the  stock,  the 
left  fore-arm  resting  on  the  body  without  constraint, 
and  the  hand  at  the  height  of  the  elbow. 

Shoulder — Arms, 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

98.  [First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  raise  and  support  it 
against  the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  drop  the 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vart  II.  59 

left  under  the  butt,  the  right  hand  resting  on,  without 
grasping,  the  small  of  the  stock. 

{Second  motion.)  Drop  quickly  the  right  hand  into 
its  position. 

Order — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

99.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  smartly  by  ex- 
tending the  left  arm,  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand,  above  and  near  the  tail-band  ;  quit  the 
hold  of  the  left  hand,  and  carry  the  piece  opposite  to 
the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  the  little 
finger  behind  the  barrel,  the  right  hand  supported 
against  the  hip,  the  butt  three  inches  from  the  ground, 
the  piece  erect,  the  left  hand  hanging  by  the  side. 

{Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the 
right  hand  to  the  ground  without  shock,  and  take  the 
position  about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  Order  Arms. 

100.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  extended  along  the  stock;  the  other 
fingers  extended  and  joined ;  the  muzzle  about  two 
inches  from  the  right  shoulder  ;  the  rammer  in  front ; 
the  toe  of  the  butt  against,  and  in  line  with,  the  toe 
of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

101.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  give  repose  in 
this  position,  he  commands  : 

Rest. 

102.  At  this  command  the  soldier  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness.  They,  how- 
ever,will  not  quit  their  rank  without  special  permission. 
When  the  instructor  wishes  the  men  to  pass  from  this 
position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 


60  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II. 

At  the  second  word  the  men  will  resume  the  posi- 
tion of  order  arras,  and  remain  firm  and  silent. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

103.  [First  motion.)  Raise  smartly  the  piece  "with 
the  right  hand,  carry  it  against  the  left  shoulder,  turn- 
ing it  so  as  to  bring  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  at  the 
same  time  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt  and  slip 
the  right  hand  down  to  the  lock. 

[Second  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  fall  briskly  to 
its  position. 

Charge — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

104.  [First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right 
on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  directly  to  the  front, 
at  the  same  time  place  the  right  foot  behind,  and  at 
right  angles  with  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot 
opposite  to,  and  about  three  inches  from  the  left  heel ; 
turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  outwards, 
and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand,  the  musket  perpendicular,  and  de- 
tached from  the  shoulder,  the  left  hand  under  the 
butt. 

[Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  letting  it  fall  firmly  into  the  left,  the  latter 
seizing  it  a  little  in  advance  of  the  tail  band,  the  bar- 
rel up,  the  left  elbow  near  the  body,  the  right  hand 
against  the  hip,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as  high  as 
the  eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

105.  [First  motion.)  Face  to  the  front  by  turning  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  up  the  right  by  the  side  of  the  left 


Scliool  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  61 

heel;  at  the  same  time  briuj;  up  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left  hand 
under  the  butt. 

[Second  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  fall  promptly 
into  its  position. 

Load  in  ten  times. 

1.  Load. 

One  tims  and  tioo  motions. 

106.  [First  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  by  a  smart  ex- 
tension of  the  left  arm,  seize  it  with  the  rif]jht  hand 
above  and  near  the  lower  band;  at  the  same  time 
carry  the  rij^ht  foot  forward,  the  heel  against  the  hol- 
low of  the  left  foot. 

[Second  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
along  the  left  thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above 
the  right,  and  with  the  left  hand  let  it  descend  to  the 
ground,  without  shock,  the  piece  touching  the  left 
thigh,  and  the  muzzle  opposite  the  centre  of  the  body  ; 
carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  cartridge  box  and 
open  it. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

107.  Seize  a  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  the  next 
two  fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion, 

108.  Tear  the  paper  down  to  the  powder,  hold  the 
cartridge  upright  between  the  thumb  and  two  next 
fingers,  near  the  top  ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front 
of  and  near  the  muzzle,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

7 


62  School  of  the  Soldier— Tari  II. 

4.   Charge — Cartridge. 

109.  Fix  the  eye  on  the  muzzle,  turn  quickly  the 
back  of  the  right  hand  towards  the  body,  in  order  to 
discharge  the  powder  into  the  barrel,  raise  the  elbow 
to  the  height  of  the  wrist,  shake  the  cartridge,  force 
it  into  the  muzzle  and  leave  the  hand  reversed,  the 
fingers  closed,  but  not  clenched. 

5.  Draw — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

110.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  right  elbow  smartly, 
and  seize  the  rammer  between  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger bent,  the  other  fingers  shut ;  draw  it  smartly, 
extending  the  arm,  seize  the  rammer  again  at  the  mid- 
dle, between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  hand  re- 
versed, the  palm  to  the  front,  the  nails  up,  the  eyes 
following  the  movement  of  the  hand,  clear  the  ram- 
mer from  the  pipes  by  again  extending  the  arm. 

[Second  motion.)  Turn  rapidly  the  rammer  between 
the  bayonet  and  the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  ram- 
mers of  the  rear  rank  grazing  the  right  shoulders  of 
the  men  of  the  same  file  in  front,  the  rammer  parallel 
to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  butt  of  the  ram- 
mer opposite  to  the  muzzle,  but  not  yet  inserted,  the 
eyes  fixed  on  the  muzzle. 

[Third  motion.)  Insert  the  butt  of  the  rammer,  and 
force  it  down  as  low  as  the  hand. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

111.  Extend  the  arm  to  its  full  length  to  seize  the 
rammer  between  the  right  thumb  extended  and  the 
fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers  closed  ;  with  force 
ram  home  twice  and  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small 
end  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  bent,  the  other 
fingers  closed,  the  right  elbow  touching  the  body. 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  63 

7.  Return — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

112.  {First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  briskly,  re- 
seize  it  at  the  middle  between  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, the  hand  reversed,  the  palm  to  the  front,  the 
nails  up,  the  eyes  following  the  hand,  clear  the  ram- 
mer from  the  barrel  by  extending  the  arm. 

[Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer  rapidly  between 
the  bayonet  and  the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  ram- 
mers of  the  rear  rink  grazing  the  right  shoulders  of 
the  men  of  the  same  file  in  front,  the  rammer  parallel 
to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  little  end  of  the 
rammer  opposite  to  the  first  pipe,  but  not  yet  inserted, 
the  eyes  fixed  on  that  pipe. 

{Third  motion.)  Insert  the  small  end,  and  with  the 
thumb,  which  will  follow  the  movement,  force  it  as 
low  as  the  middle  band  ;  raise  the  hand  quickly,  a 
little  bent,  place  the  little-finger  on  the  butt  of  the 
rammer,  and  force  it  down;  lower  the  left  hand  on  the 
barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  depressing 
the  shoulder. 

8.   Cast — About. 
One  time  and  tivo  motions. 

113.  [First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  bring  up 
the  piece  vertically  against  the  left  shoulder,  seize  it 
smartly  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock, 
and  slide  the  left  hand  down  as  low  as  the  chin. 

[Second  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  place 
the  right  foot  at  the  same  time  close  behind  and  at 
right  angles  with  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot 
against  the  left  heel  ;  carry  the  piece  opposite  to  the 
right  shoulder  ;  bring  down  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  into  the  left,  which  will  seize  it  at  the  tail-band, 
the  thumb  extended  on  the  stock,  the  butt  under  the 


64  School  of  the  Soldier — Part  11. 

right  fore-arm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body, 
and  about  two  inches  under  the  right  breast,  the  muz- 
zle at  the  height  of  the  eye,  the  left  elbow  supported 
against  the  side,  the  right  hand  grasping  the  small  of 
the  stock. 

9.  Prime. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

114.  Place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  ham- 
mer (the  fingers  remaining  under  and  against  the 
guard)  and  half-cock  the  piece  ;  brush  off  the  old  cap, 
and  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  right 
hand  take  the  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  firmly  on 
the  cone  by  pushing  it  down  with  the  thumb,  and 
seize  the  piece  by  the  small  of  the  stock. 

10.    Shoulder — Aems. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

115.  [First  ^notion.)  Face  to  the  front  by  turning 
on  the  left  heel ;  at  the  same  time  bring  the  piece 
briskly  with  the  right  hand  to  the  left  shoulder,  and 
place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

( Second  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  into 
its  position  at  shoulder  arms. 

Ready — (From  the  position  of  prime.) 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

116.  Place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the 
hammer  (the  fingers  remaining  under  and  against  the 
guard),  cock  the  piece,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Ready — (From  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.) 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

117.  [First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  the  lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  at  the  small  of  the 


i 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  65 

stock  -with  the  right  hand  ;  at  the  same  time  make  a 
half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel,  bringing  the 
left  toe  to  the  front,  and  placing  the  right  foot  behind, 
and  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  foot 
against  the  left  heel. 

{Second  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  -with  the  right 
hand  to  the  middle  of  the  body,  place  the  left  hand 
just  above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
stock  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  counter  (or  S)  plate 
turned  towards  the  body,  the  rammer  obliquely  to  tho 
left  and  front. 

[Third  motion.)  Place  the  thumb  on  the  hammer, 
the  fore-finger  under  and  on  the  guard,  the  other  three 
fingers  joined  to  the  first,  the  elbow  at  the  height  of 
the  hand. 

[Fourth  motion.)  Close  the  right  elbow  smartly  to 
the  body  in  cockingy  without  bending  the  wrist,  seize 
the  piece  by  the  small  of  the  stock,  let  it  descend  along 
the  body  in  the  left  hand  to  the  tail-band,  which  will 
remain  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder. 

Aim. 

118.  (As  in  the  manual  for  the  Rifle.) 

FiBE. 

119.  (As  in  the  manual  for  the  Rifle.) 

Load — (From  the  Fire.) 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

120.  [First  motion.)  Bring  back  the  piece  quickly 
with  both  hands,  depress  the  butt  strongly  by  extend- 
ing the  right  arm,  and  carry  it  with  the  arm  thus 
extended,  to  the  left  side,  the  barrel  to  the  front  and 
opposite  to  the  left  shoulder,  the  left  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  chin,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front,  the  left 

6* 


GG  t^chool  of  the   Soldier— V-^ri  II. 

fore-arm  toncliinp;  the  stock  :  at  the  same  time  face  to 
the  front  and  carry  the  rip;ht  foot  forward,  the  heel 
against  the  hollow  of  the  left  foot. 

[Srcond  inofion.)  Let  go  the  handle  with  the  rip;ht 
liand,  let  the  ])iece  descend  throu;;h  the  left  to  the 
ground,  without  shock,  aud  take  the  position  of  the 
second  motion  of  load. 

Shoulder — Arms.  (From  the  fire.) 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

121.  [First  motion.)  Bring  back  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  face  to  the  front,  carry  the  piece  against  the 
left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

[Second  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  iall  smartly 
to  its  position.  The  squad  being  in  position  of  aim, 
the  instructor,  to  habituate  the  soldiers  to  wait  for  the 
word  fire,  sometimes  commands: 

Recover — Arms. 

122.  (As  in  manual  for  Rifle.)  The  men  being  in 
the  position  of  the  fourth  motion  of  ready,  if  the 
instructor  wishes  them  to  come  to  a  shoulder,  he  com- 
mands : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

123.  At  the  word  shoulder,  the  squad  will  face  to 
the  front,  and  bring  tlicir  pieces  to  the  middle  of  the 
body  again  ;  the  loft  thumb  at  the  height  of  the  chin^ 
the  little  finger  just  above  the  lock;  next  place  the 
right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  hammer,  su|)pt)rt  the 
fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  sustain  the  hammer  carefully 
in  its  descent  at  the  same  time,  to  the  position  of  half- 
cock,  then  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  At  the  word  arms,  carry  the  piece  to  the 
shoulder  smartly,  and  take  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms. 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  67 

To  load  in  /our  times — (or  pauses,') 

124.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.     2.  Load. 

Execute  the  first  time  of  loading,  handle  cartridge, 
tear  cartridge,  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

125.  Draw  rammer,  enter  it  as  far  as  the  hand  and 
ram  twice. 

Three. 

126.  Return  rammer,  cast  about,  and  prime. 

Four. 

127.  Execute  the  tenth  time  of  loading. 

128.  The  soldiers  being  at  a  shoulder,  when  the 
instruetor  may  wish  to  return  bayonets,  he  commands  : 

Unfix — Bayonets. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

{Fi7'st  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  by  a  smart  extension 
of  the  left  arm,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  above  and 
near  the  tail-band. 

[Second  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
along  the  left  thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  abov© 
the  right,  lengthen  out  the  left  arm,  rest  the  butt  on 
the  ground,  without  shock,  and  carry  the  right  hand 
at  the  same  time  to  the  bayonet,  with  the  thumb  lower 
the  clasp  against  the  stop,  and  then  seize  the  bayonet 
at  the  socket  and  shank. 

[Third  motion.)  "Wrest  off  the  bayonet,  return  it  to 
the  scabbard,  place  the  little  finger  on  the  butt  of  the 
rammer,  lower  the  left  hand  along  the  barrel  in  extend- 
ing the  arm,  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 


68  School  of  the  Sohlicr—VaH  II. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

129.  {First  mntion.)  Raise  the  piece  witli  the  left 
hfind  ftlunj;  the  loft  hide,  the  hand  at  the  height  of  the 
chin,  the  fore-arm  touching  the  piece,  tljo  harrel  to  the 
fn)nt  ;  dmp  at  tlie  name  time  tlie  riglit  liand  to  seize 
the  piece  a  little  above  the  handle,  the  f(ire-finger 
touching  the  cock,  and  the  thumb  on  the  counter-plate. 

(Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  drop  the  left,  and  place  it  under  the  butt,  ])ring 
back  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  the  left,  anil  on  the 
panic  line;  support  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
against  the  shoulder,  in  the  position  prescribed  for 
shoulder  arms,  the  right  hand  resting  on,  without 
grasping  the  piece. 

(  Tliird  motion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand  into 
its  position  by  the  side  of  the  thigh. 

Fix — Bayonet. 

130.  {Fir.st  and  second  vwlionn.)  As  the  first  and 
second  niittions  of  unfix  bayonet,  except  that  at  the 
end  of  the  second  motion,  the  right  hand  will  go  to 
seize  bayunct  by  the  s(K'ket  and  shank,  so  that  the 
lower  (now  upper)  end  of  the  socket  shall  extend  about 
an  inch  above  the  heel  of  the  palm. 

[Third  motion.)  Draw  the  Itayonet  from  the  scab- 
bard, carry  and  fix  it  on  the  muzzle,  turning  the  clasp 
towjirds  the  body  with  the  right  thumb;  phtoe  the 
little  finger  on  the  head  of  the  rammer,  lower  the  left 
hand  along  the  barrel,  in  extending  the  arm. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
The  same  as  from  the  unfix  bayonet. 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  II.  G9 

Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

131.  [First  motion.)  Seize  quickly  the  piece  with 
the  rio[;ht  hand,  the  thumb  on  the  counter  plate,  and 
the  fore-finger  against  the  cock  ;  detach  the  piece  from 
the  shoulder  at  the  same  instant,  the  barrel  to  the 
front,  seize  it  at  the  tail-band  with  the  left  hand,  the 
thumb  extended  on  the  rammer,  the  piece  erect,  oppo- 
site to  the  shoulder,  the  left  elbow  on  the  piece. 

[Second  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  p<is8  it  under 
the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  tail-band, 
the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it  from  sliding 
out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the  hip,  and  the 
right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  into  its  position. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions.  ' 

132.  [First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  but  not  too  suddenly,  lest  the  rammer  should  fly 
out;  seize  the  handle  with  the  right  hand  to  support  it 
against  the  shoulder,  quit  the  hold  of  the  left  hand, 
and  place  quickly  this  hand  under  the  butt. 

[Second  motion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand 
into  its  position ;  drop  at  the  same  time  the  piece  into 
the  position  of  shouldered  arms. 

Trail — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

133.  [First  motion.)  As  the  first  motion  of  order 
arms. 

[Second  motion.)  Incline  a  little  the  muzzle  to  the 
front,  the  butt  to  the  rear,  and  about  three  inches  from 
the  ground  ;  the  right  hand  supported  at  the  hip,  will 
sustain  the  piece  so  that  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  may 
not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  front  of 
them. 


70  Sclwol  of  the  Soldier— VMi  II. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

134.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  per- 
pendicularly in  the  right  hand;  at  the  command  arms, 
execute  \Yhat  has  been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder  from 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

To  right  shoulder,  shift — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

135.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  to 
the  front,  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand 
at  the  handle,  place  it  on  the  right  shoulder,  the  left 
hand  not  quitting  the  butt,  the  lock  plate  upwards,  the 
muzzle  up;  sustain  the  piece  in  this  position  by  plac- 
ing the  right  hand  on  the  flat  of  the  butt;  let  fall  the 
left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

13G.  Raise  the  piece  by  extending  the  right  arm, 
seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  lock,  carry  it 
against  the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  barrel  to  the 
froiit,  the  right  hand  being  at  the  handle,  place  the 
left  hand  under  the  butt,  and  let  the  right  fall  into  its 
position. 

Arms — At  will.  ' 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

137.  Carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  shoulder, 
or  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  always  up. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

138.  Retake  smartly  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vhrt  11.  71 

Inspection  of  Arms. 

139.  The  squad  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  having 
the  bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes 
to  cause  an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  command: 

Inspection  of — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

{First  motion.)  Face  to  the  right  once  and  a  half 
on  the  left  heel,  carrying  the  right  foot  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  rear  of  the  alignment,  about  six  inches 
from,  and  at  right  angles  with,  the  left  foot,  seize 
promptly  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  a  little  above  the 
the  middle  band,  incline  the  muzzle  to  the  rear  with- 
out displacing  the  heel  of  the  butt,  the  rammer  turned 
towards  the  body  ;  carry  at  the  same  time  the  right 
hand  to  the  bayonet,  and  seize  it  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed, No.  130. 

[Second  motion.)  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scab- 
bard, carry  and  tix  it  on  the  muzzle;  seize  next  the 
rammer,  draw  it  as  has  been  explained  in  loading  ia 
ten  times,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

[Third  motion.)  Face  promptly  to  the  front,  seize 
the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  retake  the  position 
of  ordered  arms. 

The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the 
piece  of  each  man,  in  passing  along  the  front  of  the 
rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches  him,  will  raise 
smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it  with  the 
left  between  the  tail-band  and  the  feather-spring  [or 
guide  sight],  the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye. 
The  instructor  will  take  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
handle,  and  after  inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the 
soldier,  who  will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  hand 
and  replace  it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 


72  School  of  the  Soldier— V^ri  II. 

"When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each 
soldier  will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the  com- 
mand inspection  of  arms,  and  return  the  rammer; 
after  which  he  will  face  to  the  front. 

140.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  it  be  the  vrish 
of  the  instructor  only  to  cause  bayonet  to  be  fixed,  he 
•will  command: 

Fix — Bayonet. 

Take  the  position  indicated,  No.  130,  (first  motion), 
fix  bayonets  as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately 
face  to  the  front. 

Bayonets  fixed,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor, 
after  firinf^.  to  ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been 
discharged,  he  will  command  : 

Spring — Rammers. 

As  in  manual  for  the  rifle. 

The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the 
rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel, 
or  cause  each  man  to  make  the  rammer  ring  in  the 
barrel. 

Each  man,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  -will  re- 
turn rammer,  and  face  to  the  front. 

Arms — Port. 

^  One  time  and  one  motion. 

141.  Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body, 
the  lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  in- 
stant with  both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left 
at  the  tail-band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the 
muzzle,  the  barrel  sloping  upwards  and  crossing  oppo- 
site to  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  propor- 
tionally lowered.  The  palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be 
above,  and  that  of  the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails  of 
of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to  which  the  eibowa 
will  be  closed. 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vart  III.  73 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

(First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  left 
shoulder,  placing  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

{Second  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  smartly  by 
the  side. 


PART  THIRD. 

310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established  in  the 
principles  and  mechanism  of  the  step^  the  jjosition  of 
the  body,  and  manual  of  arms ,  the  instructor  will  unite 
eight  men,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order 
to  teach  them  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  princi- 
ples of  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the  front, 
the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  wheeling 
from  a  halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change  of 
direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  place  the 
squad  in  one  rank  elbow  to  elbow,  and  number  the 
men  from  right  to  left. 

Lesson  I. 
Alignments. 

311.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to 
make  them  comprehend  the  principles  of  alignment; 
to  this  end,  he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  right 
flank  to  march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and  having 
aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of  the 
squad  to  move  up,  as  they  may  be  successively  called, 
each  by  his  number,  and  align  themselves  successively 
on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number, 
will  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed 

7 


74  School  of  the  Soldier— V^xi  III. 

in  the  firat  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and  will  march  in 
quick  time  two  paces  forward,  shortening;  the  last,  so 
as  to  find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the  new 
alignment,  which  he  ought  never  to  pass:  he  will 
next  move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches, 
the  hams  extended,  to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to 
him  on  the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the 
head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  shoulders,  he 
may  find  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor, 
whose  elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening  his 
own. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  aligned, 
will  command  : 

Front. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
and  remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without 
groping  or  jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire 
rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by  the  command  : 

Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed 
in  advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in 
quick  time,  and  place  themselves  on  the  new  line,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front, 
and  facing  the  rank,  will  carefully  observe  that  the 
principles  are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that 
has  served  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

310.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  number  of 
the  rank  aligned,  will  command  : 

Front. 

320.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  tMs  or 


School  of  the  Soldier— Tart  III.  75 

that  ^\e  forward  or  hack,  designating  each  by  its  num- 
ber. The  file  or  files  designated,  only,  will  slightly 
turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to  judge  how  much 
they  ought  to  move  up  or  back,  steadily  place  them- 
selves on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
without  a  particular  command  to  that  eff'ect. 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on 
the  same  principles,  the  recruits  stepping  back  a 
little  beyond  the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312,  the  instructor 
commanding : 

Hiffht  (or  left)  backward — Dress. 

322.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  ex- 
amine the  position  of  the  men,  and  cause  the  rank  to 
come  to  ordered  arms,  to  prevent  too  much  fatigue, 
and  also  the  danger  of  negligence  at  shoiddered  arms. 

Lesson  II. 

323.  The  men  having  learned,  in  the  first  and  second 
parts,  to  march  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and 
to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness,  will  be 
exercised  in  the  third  part  only  in  quick  time,  double 
quick  time,  and  the  run;  the  instructor  will  cause 
them  to  execute  successively,  at  these  different  gaits, 
the  march  to  the  front,  the  facing  about  in  marching, 
the  march  by  the  flank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in 
marching,  and  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that 
at  the  command  march,  they  will  always  move  off  in 
quick  time,  unless  this  command  should  be  preceded 
by  that  of  double  quick. 

To  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front, 


76  School  of  the  SoIdier^TsiTt  III. 

he  will  place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  ri^ht  or  the 
left,  accordinp;  to  the  pide  on  which  he  may  wish  the 
guide  to  be,  and  command  : 

t 

1.   Squad  forward.     2.    Guide  Tight  [or  left). 
3.  March. 

?>1C\.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off 
Rmarlly  with  the  left  loot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to 
march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders 
always  in  a  square  with  that  line. 

.''27.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  to  the 
front,  that  the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  side  of  the  guide  ;  that  they  do  not  open  out  the 
left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm  ;  that  they  yieUl  to  pres- 
sure coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that 
coming  from  the  opposite  side  ;  that  they  recover  by 
insensible  degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if 
lost;  that  they  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front, 
no  matter  on  which  side  the  guide  may  be  ;  and  if 
found  before  or  behind  the  alignment,  that  the  man  in 
fault  corrects  himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening 
the  step,  by  degrees,  almost  insensible. 

3'{(l.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  principles 
of  the  direct  march,  the  instructor  will  exercise  them 
in  marching  obliquely.  The  rank  being  in  march,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  the  right  or  left  and  will  then  march 
straight  forward  in  the  new  direction.  As  the  men 
no  longer  touch  elbows,  they  will  glance  ah)ng  the 
shoulders  of  the  nearest  liles,  towards  the  side  to 
which  they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate  their  steps 
BO  that  the  shoulders  shall  always  be  behind  that  of 
their  next  neighbor  on  that  side,  and  that  his  head 
shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other  men  in  the  rank. 


School  of  the  Soldier—  Part  III.  77 

Besides  this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same  length 
of  pace,  and  the  same  decree  of  obliquity. 

332.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primitive 
direction,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  all  will  then 
march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  princi- 
ples of  the  direct  march. 

To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

334.  "When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  ex- 
plained, have  become  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and  they 
shall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the  body, 
the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism,  length  and 
swiftness  of  the  step,  the  instructor  will  pass  them 
from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the  reverse,  observ- 
ing not  to  make  them  march  obliquely  in  double  quick 
time,  till  they  are  well  established  in  the  cadence  of 
this  step. 

335.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the 
instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  step  off  in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will 
endeavor  to  follow  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  first 
part  of  this  book,  and  to  preserve  the  alignment. 

337.  AVhen  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  resume 
the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

338.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
■when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  retake  the  step  in  quick  time. 

7* 


78  School  of  the  SoUier—ruTt  III. 

339.  The  squad  bcinj;  in  march,  the  instructor  will 
halt  it  hj  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  Nos. 
Oh  and  00.  The  command  h<ilt  will  be  given  an  instant 
before  the  foot  \»  ready  to  be  phiced  on  the  ground. 

.'U<l.  The  P(juad  being  in  march  in  doul)le  quick 
time,  the  instructor  will  occasinnally  cause  it  to  mark 
time  by  the  comtnands  prcHcribed  No.  240.  The  men 
will  then  mark  double  quick  time,  without  altering 
the  cadence  of  the  step.  lie  will  aho  cause  them  to 
pasM  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  step,  and  recifiro- 
cally.  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  330, 
and  f(dl(»wing. 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  by  preceding 
the  command  march,  by  double  quick. 

34'J.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  well 
the  cadence  of  this  step. 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

343.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double 
quick  time,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  it 
in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  right  about.     2.  March. 

344.  At  the  command  //?a/r/t,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the 
recruit  will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  and  turning 
on  it  will  face  to  the  rear  ;  he  will  then  place  the  right 
foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 


To  march  backicanh. 

34r),  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


School  of  the  Soldier— Tart  111.  79 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right.)    3.  March. 

346.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful 
that  the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should 
only  be  executed  at  shouldered  arms,  the  instructor 
in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much,  and  also  to 
prevent  negligence  in  gait  and  position,  will  halt  the 
equad  from  time  to  time,  and  cause  arms  to  be  ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will 
always  carry  their  pieces  on  the  right  shoulder,  or  at  a 
trail.     This  rule  is  general. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried 
at  a  trail,  he  will  give  the  command  trail  arms,  before 
the  command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  contrary,  this 
command  be  not  given,  the  men  will  shift  their  pieces 
to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick.  In 
either  case,  at  the  command  halt,  the  men  will  bring 
their  pieces  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.  This  rule 
is  general. 


Lesson  III. 
The  march  hy  the  JianJc. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  right — Face.     2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

352.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  rank 
will  face  to  the  right;  the  even  numbered  men,  after 
facing  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to  the  right  side 
of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter  standing  fast,  so 
that  when  the  movement  is  executed,  the  men  will  be 
formed  into  files  of  two  men  abreast. 


80  School  of  the  Soldiei — Part  III. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  files  keeping  aligned, 
and  preserving  their  intervals. 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  word  left,  for 
right, 'Andi  by  inverse  means;  in  this  case,  the  even 
numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will  stand  fast 
and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  themselves  on  their 
left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well  instructed 
soldier  by  the  side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  the  head  of 
the  rank,  to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  conduct  him  ; 
and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit  to  march  always 
elbow  to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  marching 
by  the  flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

359.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt, 
and  afterwards  no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may  have 
lost  his  distance.  This  prohibition  is  necessary,  to 
habituate  the  men  to  a  constant  preservation  of  their 
distances. 

360.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by 
facing  to  the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and 
by  a  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the  left  flank. 
The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the  same  time  move  quickly 
into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad  again  into 
one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed  to 
marching  by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  them 
to  change  direction  by  file ;  for  this  purpose,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  file  left  (or  right).     2.  March. 

362.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change 


School  of  the  Soldier— TslH  III.  81 

direction  to  the  left  [or  right]  in  describing  a  small 
arc  of  a  circle,  and  will  then  march  straight  forward  ; 
the  two  men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up  the 
touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which 
the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four 
pteps.  Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on 
the  same  spot  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 
363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  face 
by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for  this 
purpose  will  command: 

1.  Squad  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.  March. 

3G4.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  a 
little  before  either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  recruits 
will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is  raised  in  the 
new  direction,  and  step  oflT  with  the  other  foot  without 
altering  the  cadence  of  the  step  ;  the  men  will  double 
or  undouble  rapidly. 

305.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank,  the 
squad  should  fjice  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into 
one  rank,  agreeably  to  the  principles  indicated  No. 
360.  It  is  to  be  remarked  it  is  the  men  who  are  in 
rear  who  always  move  up  to  form  into  single  rank,  and 
in  such  manner  as  never  to  invert  the  order  of  the 
numbers  in  the  rank. 

360.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  instructor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank, 
it  is  the  even  numbers  who  will  double  by  moving  to 
the  left  of  the  odd  numbers  ;  but  if  by  the  right  flank, 
it  is  the  odd  numbers  who  will  double  to  the  right  of 
the  even  numbers. 

367.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be 
practiced  with  pieces  at  a  shoulder  ;  but  the  instructor 
may,  to  give  relief  by  change,  occasionally  order  siq)- 
port  arms,  and  he  will  require  of  the  recruits  marching 
in  this  position,  as  much  regularity  as  in  the  former. 


82  ScJwol  of  the  Soldier— FsiTt  III. 

The  march  hy  the  jianlc  in  double  quick  time. 

368.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in 
double  quick  time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick  time.  The 
instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No.  351, 
taking  care  always  to  give  the  command  double  quick 
before  that  of  march. 

360.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  cadence 
of  the  step. 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direc- 
tion, and  the  march  by  the  flank,  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  by  the  same  commands,  and  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles,  as  in  quick  time. 

371.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  car- 
ried either  on  the  rlglit  shoidder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad 
by  the  flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same  as 
in  two  ranks,  and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  351,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the 
squad  not  to  double  files. 

375.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men 
do  not  bend  their  knees  unequally,  which  would  cause 
them  to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and 
also  to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step  and  their  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be 
executed  in  single  rank.  In  the  changes  of  direction, 
the  leading  man  will  change  direction  without  altering 
the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step.  The  instructor 
will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  that  in  facing 
by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  they  will  not 
double,  but  march  in  one  rank. 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vd^xi  III.  83 

Lesson  IV. 

WHEELINGS. 

General  principles  of  wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds:  from  halts,  or  on 
fixed  pivots,  and  in  march,  or  on  moveable  pivots.. 

378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  pass- 
ing a  corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in 
column,  or  from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  place  in  changes  of 
direction  in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  ia  exe- 
cuted to  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only  turns 
in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes 
steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad 
is  marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to 
clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is  necessary,  in  order 
that  the  subdivisions  of  a  column  may  change  direc- 
tion without  losing  their  distances,  as  will  be  explained 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the 
full  step  of  twenty  eight  inches,  or  thirty-three  inches, 
according  to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  Jialt,  or  on  a  fxcd  pivot. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will 
place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to 
conduct  it,  and  then  command  : 

1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  oflf 
with  the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  head  a 
little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes 


84  School  of  the  Soldier— Fart  III. 

of  the  men  to  their  left ;  the  pivot-man  -will  merely 
mark  time  in  gradually  turning  his  body,  in  order  to 
conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching 
flank;  the  man  who  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps 
of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  from  the  first  step  advance 
a  little  the  left  shoulder,  cast  his  eyes  from  time  to 
time  along  the  rank,  and  feel  constantly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

3S5.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  com- 
ing from  the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  conform 
himself  to  the  marching  flank — shortening  his  step 
according  to  his  approximation  to  the  pivot. 

386.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round 
the  circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  order  to 
cause  the  principles  to  be  the  better  understood,  and 
he  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does  not  break. 

387.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
wheel,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

389.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt, 
and  no  man  stir.  The  instructor,  going  to  the  flank 
opposite  the  pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  of 
that  flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the 
rank,  without,  however,  displacing  the  pivot,  who  will 
conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction. 
The  instructor  will  take  care  to  have  between  these 
two  men,  and  the  pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to 
contain  the  other  men.     He  will  then  command  : 

Left  (or  riffht) — Dress. 

390.  At  this  tjie  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  two  men  established  as  the  basisj,  in  con- 
formity with  the  principles  prescribed. 


School  of  the  Soldier — Part  III.  85 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  command  Front 
■which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  314.  ' 

Wheeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  moveable  pivot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to  exe- 
cute well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  taueht  to 
wheel  in  marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  reverse  flank,  (to  the  side  opposite  to  the 
guide  or  .pivot  flank,)  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

^    395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank 
18  yet  Jour  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

390.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be  ex- 
ecuted in  the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that 
the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain  towards  the  march- 
ing flank  ((.r  side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  the  side  of 
the  actual  pivot ;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  merely 
turning  in  his  place,  will  conform  himself  to  the  move- 
nient  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus 
gain  ground  forward  in  describing  a  small  curve  so  as 
to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel.  The  middle  of  the  rank 
will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as  the  move- 
ment shall  commence,  the  man  who  conducts  the 
marching  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  on  the  ground  over 
which  he  will  have  to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel   being   ended,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.   March. 

398.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when 
four  paces  are  yet  required  to  complete  the  chang^e  of 

8 


86  School  of  the  Soldier— Part  III. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  completing  the  wheel,  the  man  who 
conducts  the  marching  flank  will  direct  himself  straight 
forward ;  the  pivot  man  and  all  the  rank  will  retake 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head 
direct  to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
in  marching,  will  be  executed  as  follows :  The  in- 
structor will  command : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.     2.  March. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank 
is  yet  four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at 
the  instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face 
to  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and  move  forward  in 
the  new  direction  without  slackening  or  quickening 
the  cadence,  and  without  shortening  or  lengthening  the 
step.  The  whole  rank  will  promptly  conform  itself  to 
the  new  direction  :  to  effect  which,  each  man  "will  ad- 
vance the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  take  the  dou- 
ble quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in  the  new  direction, 
turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side,  in  placing 
himself  on  the  alignment  of  the  guide,  from  whom  he 
will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume  the  direct  position 
of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus  arrive  successively 
on  the  alignment. 

Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  in  double  quick  time. 

403.  When  the  recruits  comprehend  and  execute 
well,  in  quick  time,  the  wheels  at  a  halt,  and  in 


School  of  the  Soldier— Part  Til.  87 

marching,  and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide,  the  instructor  -will  cause  the  same  move- 
ments to  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples as  in  quick  time,  except  that  the  command  double 
quick  will  precede  that  of  march.  In  wheeling  while 
marching,  the  pivot  man  will  take  steps  of  eleven 
inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side 
of  the  guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide 
must  increase  the  gait  in  order  to  bring  themselves 
into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the 
recruits,  and  not  to  divide  their  attention,  will  cause 
them  to  execute  the  several  movements  of  which  this 
lesson  is  composed,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after 
the  mechanism  be  well  comprehended,  with  arms. 

Lesson  V. 
To  stacJc  arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

Stack — Arms.  '  • 

410.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
even  numbered  file  will  pass  his  piece  before  him, 
seizing  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band  ;  will 
place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of  his  left  toe,  the 
barrel  turned  towards  the  body,  and  draw  the  rammer 
slightly  from  its  place  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
odd  numbered  file  will  also  draw  the  rammer  slightly, 
and  pass  his  piece  to  the  man  next  on  his  left,  who 
will  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  near  the  upper  band, 
and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of  the  right  toe 
of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel  turned  to  the 


88  School  of  the  Soldier— Vart  III. 

front ;  he  will  then  cross  the  rammers  of  the  two 
pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd  numbered 
man  being  inside  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  even 
file  will  also  draw  his  rammer,  lean  his  piece  forward, 
the  lock-plate  downwards,  advance  the  right  foot  about 
six  inches,  and  insert  the  rammer  between  the  rammer 
and  barrel  of  the  piece  of  his  front  rank  man  ;  with 
his  left  hand  he  will  place  the  butt  of  his  piece  on  the 
ground,  thirty-two  inches  in  rear  of,  and  perpendicu- 
lar to,  the  front  rank,  bringing  back  his  right  foot  by 
the  side  of  the  left ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even 
file  will  at  the  same  time  lean  the  stack  to  the  rear, 
quit  it  with  his  right  hand  and  force  all  the  rammers 
down.  The  stack  being  thus  formed,  the  rear  rank 
man  of  every  odd  file  will  pass  his  piece  into  his  left 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front  and  inclining  it  forward, 
will  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

411.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  posi- 
tion of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Break  ranks.     2.  March. 

To  resume  arms. 

412.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their 
stacks,  the  instructor  will  command: 

Take — Arms. 

413.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every 
odd  numbered  file  will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the 
stack  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  seize 
his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  that  of  the  man 
on  his  right  with  his  right  hand,  both  above  the  lower 
band  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file  will  seize 
his  piece  with  the  right  hand  below  the  lower  band  ; 
these  two  men  will  raise  up  the  stack  to  loosen  the 
rammers ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  od*d  file  will 


School  of  the  Soldier— Vavi  III.  89 

facilitate  the  disenfj^agement  of  the  rammers,  if  neces- 
sary, by  drawing  them  out  slightly  with  the  left  hand, 
and  will  receive  his  piece  from  the  hand  of  the  man 
next  on  his  left ;  the  four  men  will  retake  the  position 
of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 


END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


6* 


TITLE    THIRD. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the 
Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede  that 
by  battalion,  and  the  object  being  to  prepare  the  sol- 
diers for  the  higher  school,  the  exercises  of  detail  by 
company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as  well  in  respect 
to  principles,  as  the  order  of  progression  herein  pre- 
scribed. 

2.  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing 
elementary  instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  ser- 
geant, and  a  certain  number  of  file-closers,  the  whole 
posted  in  the  manner  indicated.  Title  First,  and,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  Title,  the  officer  charged  with  the 
exercise  of  such  company  will  herein  be  denominated 
the  instructor. 

Manner  of  forming  the  company.^ 

216.  The  whole  company  being  assembled  on  its 
parade  ground,  or  in  the  rendezvous,  the  first,  or  or- 
derly sergeant,  will  command : 

Fall  in — Company. 

At  this  command,  the  corporals  and  privates  will 
form  in  one  rank,  faced  to  the  right,  and  in  the  order 

*  Gilham. 


School  of  the  Company.  91 

of  height  from  right  to  left,  the  tallest  man  on  the 
right  (now  head  of  the  company),  the  next  tallest  man 
immediately  covering  the  first,  and  so  on  to  the  left  or 
rear  of  the  rank,  in  which  position  will  be  placed  the 
shortest  man.  The  other  sergeants  will  take  post  in 
the  rank  of  file-closers,  two  paces  to  the  right  of  the 
company,  and  assist  the  first  sergeant  in  forming  the 
company. 

When  the  men  have  their  places,  the  first  sergeant 
•will  command  : 

Front. 

The  second  sergeant,  who  is  the  left  guide  of  the 
company,  will  now  place  himself  on  tho  left  of  the 
company,  and  the  orderly  sergeant  will  promptly  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Left — Face. 
3.  March. 

At  the  command  left  face,  the  whole  company  will 
face  to  the  left,  except  the  guide  and  man  on  the  left, 
who  stand  fast. 

At  the  command  march,  the  whole  of  the  men  who 
faced  to  the  left  will  step  off  together  ;  the  second 
man,  counting  from  the  left,  will  place  himself  in  the 
rear  rank,  behind  the  man  next  to  the  guide,  and  face 
to  the  front ;  the  two  following  men  will,  in  like  man- 
ner, in  closing  up,  form  the  next  file,  the  third  man  in 
the  front,  and  the  fourth  in  the  rear  rank  behind  him, 
and  all  the  other  men  will  come  successively  to  form 
files,  two  deep,  to  the  right  of  those  already  formed.* 

The  officers  will  now  take  their  posts  as  prescribed 
in  No.  12 ;  if  the  captain  has  to  discharge  the  duties 
of  instructor,  the  first  lieutenant  will  take  his  place 

*When  the  company  is  in  good  discipline,  the  files  may  be 
formed  in  two  ranks  at  once,  each  man  having  his  proper  number 
in  the  company  depending  upon  his  height,  and  being  able  to  take 
his  appropriate  place  without  creating  confusion. 


92         School  of  the  Company — Lesson  I. 

on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  the  second  lieutenant 
replacing  the  first  behind  the  centre  of  the  fourth 
section. 

4.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be 
numbered,  and  fur  this  purpose  will  command : 

In  each  rank — Count  twos.  h 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  count  in  each 
rank,  from  right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and 
distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without  hurry  and 
without  turning  the  head,  one,  two,  according  to  the 
place  which  each  one  occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the 
company  to  be  divided  into  platoons  and  sections, 
taking  care  that  the  first  platoon  is  always  composed 
of  an  even  number  of  files. 


LESSON    FIRST. 

Article  First. 
To  ojpen  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks 
and  file-closers  well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  he  will  direct 
the  left  guide  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  which  being  executed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Company.     8.  Shoulder — Arms. 
4.   To  the  rear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant, 
and  the  left  guide  will  step  ojff  smartly  to  the  rear, 
four  paces  from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this 
distance  by  the  eye,  without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same 
time  on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe  if  these 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  I.         93 

two  non-commissioned  officers  are  on  a  line  parallel  to 
the  front  rank,  and,  if  necessary,  to  correct  their  po- 
sitions, which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

5.  March. 

11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand 
fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear  without 
counting  the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the 
alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  conforming  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank 
on  the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 

14.  The  file-closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the 
same  time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned, 
will  command : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of 
the  rear  rank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file-closer. 

Article  Second. 
Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in 
the  first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the 
better  to  inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on 
the  right  or  left  of  each  rank  to  march  two  or  three 
paces  forward,  and,  after  having  aligned  them,  com- 
mand: 

By  file  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

20.  At  this  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  suc- 
cessively on  the  alignment,  each  man  being  preceded 


94  Sclwol  of  the  Company — Lesson  I. 

by  his  neighlx»r  in  the  8nme  rank,  towards  the  basifl, 
by  two  pacc«.  and  huvinj;  correctly  aligned  himself, 
will  cant  his  eve.s  to  the  front. 

21.  SuccosHive  ali/^nmcnts  having  habituated  the 
8(»Kli<T'<  t')  (IrrsH  correctly,  the  instructor  ■will  cause 
the  ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  forward  and 
backward,  soinctinics  in  a  direction  parallel,  and  some- 
times in  one  oblique,  to  the  original  direction,  giving, 
in  each  case,  two,  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of 
alignment  to  each  rank.  To  effect  which,  he  will  com- 
uiund  : 

1.  liiffht  (or  l^/i)—Dv.F.39.     2.  Front. 

or 

1.  Right  {or  left)  backward — Dress.     2.  Front. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the 
men  of  the  rear  rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their  tile- 
leaders,  as  the  sole  ohject  of  the  exercise  is  to  teach 
tliem  to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective 
ranks,  in  the  different  directions. 

2.i.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  su- 
perintend the  front  rank  and  the  covering  sergeant  the 
rear  rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  side  by  "Aliich  the  ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the 
line  of  their  shoulders  to  tlio  new  direction  of  their 
ranks,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No. 
317,  or  No.  321,  according  as  the  now  direction 
shall  be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 

Article  Fourth. 
To  close  ranJcs. 
28.  Tho  instructor  will  command: 

1.   Close  order.     2.  March. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  I.  95 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close 
up  in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  his 
file  leader. 

Article  Fifth. 
Alignments  J  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks, 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause 
to  be  executed  parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the 
right  and  left,  forward  and  backward,  observing  to 
place  always  two  or  four  files  to  serve  as  a  basis  of 
alignment.  He  will  give  the  commands  prescribed, 
No.  21.  ^ 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  themselves  to 
judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and 
shoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the 
front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater 
number  of  the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will  command 
Front,  and  rectify,  afterwards,  if  necessary,  the  align- 
ment of  the  other  men  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier.  No.  320.  The  rear  rank  will 
conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superin- 
tended by  the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  on  the  dank,  to  verify  their  alignment. 
lie  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers  accu- 
rately his  file-leader. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file-closers  will  preserve 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

41.  The  instructor  may  also,  when  he  shall  judge 
proper,  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 


96        School  oj  the  .Company — Lesson  11. 


LESSON  SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second 
lesson,  Avill  cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks 
have  been  formed,  and  command : 

1.  Attention,     2.   Company.     3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and 
firings  to  be  executed  in  the  following  order: 

Article  First. 
To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded  and 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No  251,  and  following.  The  instructor  will  cause  this 
exercise  to  be  often  repeated,  in  succession,  before 
passing  to  loading  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  execu- 
cuted  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
256.  In  priming,  when  loading  in  four  times,  and 
also  at  will,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will 
half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the 
front  when  the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  brings 
his  piece  to  the  shoulder. 

Article   Second. 
To  fire  hy  company. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  com- 
pany to  be  executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.    Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly 
place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  II.        97 

four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file-closers;  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place  him- 
self opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general,  for 
both  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  differ- 
ent firings, 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add: 
1.   Company;  2.  Ready;  3.  Aim;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load. 

5L  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their 
pieces,  and  then  take  the  position  of  ready,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the 
firing,  by  the  commands  : 

1.   Company.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

53.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  sig- 
nal to  cease  firing  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  simply  observing  to  pro- 
nounce right  (ur  left)  oblique,  before  the  command 
aim. 

Article  Third. 
The  fire  hy  file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  file 
to  be  executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.    Company.     3.  Ready. 
4.    Commence  firing. 

56.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  execu- 
ted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  275 
and  following. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of 
the  company  ;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  in- 
stant the  first  brings  down  pieces  to-reload,  and  so  on 
to  the  left ;  but  this  progression  will  only  be  observed 
in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man  will  re- 

9 


98         Scliool  of  the  Company — Lesson  II. 

load  and  fire  without  regulating;  himself  by  others, 
conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 

Article  Fourth. 

The  fire  hy  ranlc. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be 
executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.     2.   Company.     3.  Ready. 
4.  Rear  rank — Aim.     5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

69.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed 
as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285 
and  following. 

GO.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in 
the  rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate 
ranks,  until  the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  54. 

6.3.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease, 
whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding 
the  signal  to  cease  firing,  and  at  the  instant  this  sound 
commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
282. 

64.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  followed 
by  a  bugle  note,  or  tap  of  the  drum;  at  which  sound, 
the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  promptly  resume 
their  places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the 
alignment  of  the  ranks.  •  j 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  fre-j 
quently  used  against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  important 


School  of  ilie  Compani/— Lesson  II.        99 

that  it  be  rendered  perfectly. familiar  to  the  troops. 
The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive 
preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim  vrith 
care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  particular  object. 
As  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  men  should 
aim  with  precision  in  battle,  this  principle  will  be 
rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  for  purposes  of  in- 
struction. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  Jire  hy  the  rear  ranJc, 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be 
executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To 
effect  this,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank,    2.   Company.    3.  About — Face. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out 
and  place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of 
his  company ;  the  covering  sergeant,  and  file  closers, 
will  pass  quickly  through  the  captain's  interval,  and 
place  themselves  faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  ser- 
geant a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers 
two  paces  from  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places 
in  line,  each  passing  behind  the  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through 
the  interval,  the  company  will  face  about ;  the  captain 
•will  place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank, 
now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will 
cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  com- 
pany, both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  by  tile,  and  the 
fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
in  the  three  preceding  articles ;  the  captain,  covering 


100       School  of  the   Company — Lesson  III. 

sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like 
manner,  to  what  is  therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  tile  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the 
company,  now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank, 
the  firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank,  now 
become  the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.    2.  Company.    3.  About — Face. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  ser- 
geant and  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
Nos.  G9  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having 
faced  about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will 
resume  their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the 
men  the  importance  of  aiming  always  at  some  partic- 
ular object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  178. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to 
make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands  aim  and 

fire,  to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 


LESSON    THIRD. 

Article  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  cor- 
rectly aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
exercise  it  in  marching  by  the  front,  he  will  assure 
himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  are  perfectly  in  the  direction  of  their  respec- 
tive ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the 
captain ;  the  instructor  will  then  place  himself  twenty- 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  III.     101 

five  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  them,  face  to  the  rear, 
and  place  himself  exactly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing 
file,  will  command:  ° 

1.    Company,  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  \^ill 
move  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  :  the  instruc- 
tor, from  the  position  prescribed,  will  correctly  align 
this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation  of  the  directing  fife. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant  who  is  to  be  charged 
with  the  direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is 
assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight 
line  which  would  pass  between  his  own  and  the  heels 
of  the  instructor. 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  step  aside,  and  command  : 

2.  March. 

80.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  ofi"  with  life. 
The  directing  sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  march- 
ing on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  ;  he  will  take  in 
succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the 
point  nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  advance,  exiictly  in 
the  same  line  with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  same  distance 
of  some  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
captain  will  march  steadily  in  the  trace  of  the  direct- 
ing sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him  ;  the 
men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front, 
feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of 
direction,  and  conform  himself  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, school  of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by  the 
front.  "^ 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain,  will  take  special 
care  not  to  pass  him ;  to  this  end  he  will  keep  the  line 
9* 


102     ScJiool  of  the   Company — Lesson  III. 

of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the  same 
direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  dis- 
tance of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will 
command: 

To  <Ae— Step. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards 
the  directing  sergeant,  retake  the  step  from  him,  and 
again  direct  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  cover- 
ing sergeant  to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and 
sometimes  on  the  left  of  the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the 
greatest  influence  on  the  march  of  the  company,  he 
will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his  step,  his  habit 
of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given 
lino  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line  without 
variation. 

Article  Second. 

To  halt  the  compani/,  marching  in  line  of  hattUy 
and  to  align  it. 

99.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company, 
will  command : 

1.    Company.     2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  directing  sergeant  will  remain  in  advance, 
unless  ordered  to  return  to  the  line  of  file-closers. 
The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  ad- 
vance the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direc- 
tion, and  align  the  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may 
confine  himself  to  causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectified. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  III.      103 

In  this  last  case,  he  will  command  :  Captain,  rectify 
the  alignment.  The  captain  will  direct  the  covering 
sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  when  each,  glanc- 
ing his  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly  rectify  it, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  320. 

Article  Third. 

Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Riffkt  (or  left)  obliqu3.     2.  March. 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take 
the  oblique  step.  The  ruen  will  accurately  observe 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  331.  The  rear  rank  men  will  preserve  their  dis- 
tances, and  march  in  rear  of  the  man  next  on  the  right 
(or  left)  of  their  habitual  file-leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march 
to  be  resumed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

104.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  re- 
sume the  direct  march.  The  instructor  will  move 
briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and  facing 
the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in  the  pro- 
longation of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant ;  and 
then,  by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant  on 
the  same  line,  if  he  be  not  already  on  it;  the  latter 
will  immediately  take  two  points  on  the  ground  be- 
tween himself  and  the  instructor,  and  as  he  advances, 
will  take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  explained 
No.  89. 


104      ScJiool  of  the  Company — Lesson  III. 

105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the 
touch  of  elbows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the 
side  towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  without  any 
indication  to  that  effect  being  given  ;  and  when  the 
direct  march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally 
without  indication,  on  the  side  where  it  was  previous 
to  the  oblique. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  douhle  quick  time,  and 
the  hack  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and  in 
quick  time,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time, 
will  command : 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  marcb,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Douhle  quick.     2.  March. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at 
the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
may  cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  step ;  to  this  effect, 
he  will  command : 

1.    Company  backward.     2.  March. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  III.     105 

116.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier 
No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor 
will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be 
taken  in  succession,  and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  com- 
pany in  marching  in  double  quick  time  till  the  men 
are  well  established  in  the  length  and  swiftness  of  the 
pace  in  quick  time:  he  will  then  endeavor  to  render 
the  march  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the 
minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and  also  cause  them 
to  observe  the  same  erectness  of  body  and  composure 
of  mind,  as  if  marching  in  quick  time. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in 
retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.    Company.     2.  About — Face. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the 
instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing 
file,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  84. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file,  will  command : 

3.   Company^  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  "Nos.  8G  and  87,  with 
this  difference — he  will  place  himself  six  paces  in  front 
of  the  line  of  file  closers,  now  leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of 
file  closers,  opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  captain 


106      School  of  the  Company — Lesson  III. 

will  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the 
front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the 
instructor  will  command: 

4.  March. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain, 
and  the  men,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
Bcril)ed  No.  89,  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  march- 
ing in  retreat,  all  that  is  prescribed  for  marching  in 
advance;  the  commands  and  the  means  of  execution 
will  be  the  same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company, 
will,  when  he  may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front 
by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  119.  The  captain, 
the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  directing  sergeant,  will 
resume  their  habitual  places  in  line,  the  moment  they 
shall  have  faced  about. 

128.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank, 
if  the  instructor  should  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he 
will  cause  the  right  about  to  be  executed  while  march- 
ing, and  to  this  effect  will  command: 

1.    Company.     2.  Rightabout.     3.  March.     /"""' 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will 
promptly  face  about,  and  re-commence  the  march  by 
the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  Sergeant  will  face  about  with  the 
company,  and  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front  of 
the  tile  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  guide. 
The  instructor  will  place  him  in  the  proper  direction 
by  the  means  prescribed  No.  104.  The  captain,  the 
covering  sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  conform  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to 
march  by  the  front  rank,  he  will  give  the  same  com- 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  IV.      107 

mands,  and  will  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march 
by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  he  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in 
the  3d,  4th,  5th  and  6th  lessons  of  this  school,  with  the 
exception  of  the  march  backwards,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted only  in  quick  time.  lie  will  give  the  same 
commands,  observing  to  add  double  quick  before  the 
command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right 
shoulder,  in  quick  time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks 
will  be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  therefore,  the  in- 
structor brings  the  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this 
position,  the  rear  rank  must  shorten  a  little  the  first 
steps  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,  and 
will  lengthen  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order 
to  close  up  when  the  pieces  are  again  brought  to  a 
shoulder.  In  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the 
distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches, 
and  the  pieces  will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  right 
shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  com- 
mand hall.  The  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  dis- 
tance.    These  rules  are  general. 


LESSON  FOURTH. 

Article  First. 

To  march  hy  the  flanlc. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a 
halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  command: 


108      ScJiooI  of  the  Compant/ — Lesson  IV. 

1.   Company,  right — Face.     2.  Forward.    3.  March. 

13G.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  -vrill  face  to 
tho  riojht,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  at 
the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having:  stepped 
out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left;  the  front  rank 
will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  352;  the  rear  rank  -will,  at  the  same  time,  side 
step  to  the  right  one  pace,  and  double  in  the  same 
manner;  so  that  when  the  movement  is  completed,  the 
files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned,  and  elbow  to 
elbow.     The  intervals  will  be  preserved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to 
the  right,  so  that  when  the  ranks  are  formed,  they 
will  be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
move  ofi"  briskly  in  quick  time;  the  covering  sergeant 
at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on  his 
left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The  men  of  each 
file  will  march  abreast  of  their  respective  front  rank 
men,  heads  direct  to  the  front;  the  file  closers  will 
march  opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left 
flank  to  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  substi- 
tuting left  for  right;  the  ranks  will  double  as  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  school  for  the  soldier,  No.  354;  the 
rear  rank  will  side-step  to  the  left  one  pace  before 
doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left, 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank ;  the  captain  wmII  pass  rapidly  to  the  left, 
and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this  guide;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front 
rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  IV.      109 

Article  Second. 
To  change  direction  hy  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and 
either  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  By  file,  left,  (or  right.)     2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will 
wheel;  if  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the  latter 
will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  describe  a 
short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little  the  first  five  or 
sis  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of 
this  file  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement.  If  the 
wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank 
man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and 
the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement 
by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  as  has  been  ex- 
plained. Each  file  wall  come  to  a  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  these  principles,  in  order  that  the 
distance  between  the  files  may  always  be  preserved, 
and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the  wheel- 
ing point.  ■ 

Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  company  marching  hy  the  fianJc,  and 
to  face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  eflTect  these  objects  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 
10 


110      School  of  the   Company — Lesson  IV. 

14G.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  proscribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 
359  and  3t)0.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubled,  the 
rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The  cap- 
tain and  cdverinf!;  sergeant,  as  -well  as  the  left  guide, 
if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return  to  their 
habitual  places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  company 
faces  to  the  front, 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company  by 
GDC  of  the  means  prescribed,  No.  100. 

Article  Fourth. 

The  company  heing  in  march  hy  the  Jlank,  to  form 
it  on  the  right  (or  left)  hy  file  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  fl^ank, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  On  ike  rights  by  file  into  line.     2.  March. 

140.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men 
doubled  will  mark  time  ;  the  captain  and  the  covering 
ser;;eant  will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straight  forward, 
and  be  halted  by  the  instructor  when  they  shall  have- 
passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file 
closers  ;  the  captain  will  place  himself  correctly  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and  will  direct  the  alignment  as  the 
men  of  the  front  rank  successively  arrive  ;  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  place  himself  behind  the  captain  at 
the  distance  of  the  rear  rank  ;  the  two  men  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to  march, 
and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  cap- 
tain, will  turn  to  the  right;  after  turning,  they  will 
continue  to  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  them- 
Bclves  towards  the  line  of  battle,  but  when  they  shall 
arrive  at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number 
will  shorten  the  step  so  that  the  odd  number  may  pre- 


School  of  the   Company — Lesson  lY.      Ill 

cede  him  on  the  line,  the  odd  number  placing  himself 
by  the  side  and  on  the  left  of  the  captain  ;  the  eren 
number  will  afterwards  oblique  to  the  left,  and  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd  number;  the  next  two 
men  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the  same 
manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the  right, 
and  place  themselves,  according  to  the  means  just 
explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of,  the  two  men 
already  established  on  the  line ;  the  remaining  files  of 
this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be  formed  to 
the  left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank  doubled 
•will  execute  the  movement  in  the  manner  already 
explained  for  the  front  rank,  taking  care  not  to  com- 
mence the  movement  until  four  men  of  the  front  rank 
are  established  on  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  rear  rank 
men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accurately 
their  file  leaders. 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  form  by  file  on  the  left 
into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indica- 
tion left  for  right.  In  this  case,  the  odd  numbers  will 
shorten  the  step,  so  that  the  even  numbers  may  pre- 
cede them  on  the  line.  The  captain,  placed  on  the 
left  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return 
to  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  in- 
structor, after  the  company  shall  be  formed  and 
aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend 
the  mechanism  of  this  movement,  the  instructor  will 
at  first  cause  it  to  be  executed  separately  by  each  rank 
doubled,  and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks  united  and 
doubled. 


112      ScJwol  of  the   Covipani/— Lesson  IV. 

Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank ^  to  form 
it  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  to 
came  it  to  face  to  the  riyht  and  left  in  marching. 

153  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right 
flank  the  instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form  it 
into  line  ;  the  captain  will  immediately  command  :  1. 
Jhl  company,  into  line  :  2.  March. 

■l')4.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant 
will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the  men  will 
advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  double  quick  step, 
and  move  into  line,  by  the  shortest  route,  taking  c^are 
to  undouble  the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one  after 

the  other.  ,  .       . 

155  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in 
line  with  the  covering  sergeant,  they  will  take  from 
him  the  stco,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to  the  tront. 

15G  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the 
movements  of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  without 
cndeavorin  g  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same  time  with  the 

latter.  ,      .        ,, 

157  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  cap- 
tain will  face  to  his  company  in  order  to  follow  up  the 
execution  ;  and.  as  soon  as  the  company  is  formed,  he 
will  command,  guide  left,  place  himself  two  paces 
before  the  centre,  face  to  the  front,  and  take  the  step 
of  the  company.  ^     ,  .  . 

158  At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant 
will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the 
left  to  serve  as  guide,  and  the  covering  sergeant  who 
is  on  the  opposite  flank  will  remain  there 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  lett  nanK, 
this  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands, 
and  according  to  the  same  principles ;  the  company 
bein<r  formed,  the  captain  will  command  guide  rig/it, 
and  place  himself  in  front  of  his  company  as  above ; 


School  of  the   Company — Lesson  IV.      113 

the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  right  of  the  front 
ranlc  will  serve  as  guide,  and  the  second  sergeant 
placed  on  the  left  flank  will  remain  there. 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  ia 
front,  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant 
of  each  company  will  always  be  placed  on  the  right 
and  left,  respectively,  of  the  front  rank;  they  will  be 
denominated  right  guide  and  left  guide,  and  the  one  or 

'the  other  charged  with  the  direction. 

161.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if 
it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  nau^e  it  to  form 
platoons,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon 
according  to  the  above  principles.  The  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
the  first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the  second, 
passing  through  the  opening  made  in  the  centre  of  the 
company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and  around 
the  left  of  his  platoon,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left :  in 
this  last  case,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around  the  left 
of  the  second  platoon  in  order  to  place  himself  in  front 
of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieutenant,  without 
waiting  for  each  other,  will  command  guide  left  (or 
right)  at  the  instant  their  respective  platoons  are  formed. 

163.  At  the  command  guide  left  [or  right),  the  guide 
of  each  platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  .the  indicated  flank 
of  the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve, 
in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 

165.  Thus,  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be 
but  one  guide  to  each  platoon  ;  he  will  always  be 
placed  on  its  left  flank,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  and 
on  the  right  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

10* 


114        School  of  the  Company — Lesson  V. 

166.  In  these  movements,  the  file-closers  will  follow 
the  plat<»on8  to  which  they  are  attached. 

107.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  company,  march- 
in^];  by  the  flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by  platoon, 
into  line,  by  his  own  direct  commands,  using  those 
prescribed  for  the  captain.  No.  153  or  161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in 
passin;^,  without  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front, 
to  the  march  by  the  flank,  and  reciprocally.  In  either 
case,  lie  will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  363,  substituting  company 
for  squad.  The  company  will  face  to  the  right  or  left, 
in  marching,  and  the  captain,  the  guides  and  file- 
closers  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  ])rescribed 
for  each  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  or  in  the  march 
by  the  front  of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a  subdivi- 
sion of  a  column. 

109.  If,  after  facing  to  Ihe  right  or  left,  in  march- 
ing, the  company  find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  captain  will  place  himself  two  paces  behind  the 
centre  of  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  the  guides 
will  pass  to  the  rear  rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file- 
closers  will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the 
men,  and  to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent,  in  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms,  will  sometimes  order  sup- 
port arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and  arms  on  the 
right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 

LESSON  FIFTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  into  column  hy  platoon,  either  at  a  halt 
or  in  march. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle, 


JScJiool  of  the  Company — Lesson  V.       115 

the  instructor,  wishing  to  break  into  column,  by  pla- 
toon to  the  right,  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon y  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  rapidly  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  cen- 
tres of  their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant  passing 
around  the  left  of  the  company.  They  need  not  oc- 
cupy themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the  other. 
The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the 
front  rank. 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  standing  fast ;  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond 
the  point  at  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when 
the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  face  to  the  late  rear, 
and  place  himself  so  that  the  line  which  he  forms 
with  the  man  on  the  right  (who  had  faced)  shall  be 
perpendicular  to  that  occupied  by  the  company  in 
line  of  battle  ;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixod 
pivot,  and  when  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching 
flank  shall  approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its 
chief  will  command: 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

174.  At  the  command  lialt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank 
shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpendicu- 
lar, the  platoon  will  halt ;  the  covering  sergeant  will 
move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is 
at  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  second  sergeant 
will  place  himself  in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the 
second  platoon.  Each  will  take  care  to  leave  between 
himself  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  his  platoon  a 
space  equal  to  its  front ;  the  captain  and  first  lieuten- 
ant will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align  the 


116        School  of  the  Company — Lesson  V. 

sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon 
■vvho  luid  faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  estab- 
lished on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place  him- 
self two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  facing  towards 
him,  will  command  : 

3.  Left — Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  teing  ended,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  command.  Front,  and  place  himself  two 
paces  before  its  centre. 

177.  The  tile-closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the 
movement  of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving 
always  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the  left, 
according  to  the  same  principles.  The  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  By  platoon,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

170.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the 
same  manner  as  if  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  pla- 
toons will  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  chiefs 
of  platoon  will  conform  to  the  principles  indicated 
Nos.  173  and  174. 

18i.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of 
each  platoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  second  ser- 
geant near  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  will  each 
move  to  the  points  where  the  right  of  his  platoon  is  to 
rest.  The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be  careful  to 
align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of 
the  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  left,  and  will  then 
command : 

Etght — Dress. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  Y.        117 

182.  The  platoons  beinp;  aligned,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  oppo- 
site its  centre. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company 
by  platoon  to  the  right,  and  to  move  the  column  for- 
ward after  the  wheel  is  completed,  will  caution  the  com- 
pany to  that  effect,  and  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  ivheel.     2.  March. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective  platoons, 
conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  172,  and 
will  remain  in  this  position  during  the  continuance  of 
the  wheel.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to  the  principles  herein 
prescribed ;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  cot  face  to  the 
right,  but  will  mark  time,  conforming  himself  to  the 
movement  of  the  marching  flank;  and  when  the  man 
who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive  near  the 
perpendicular,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  platoons  will 
move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men  taking  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches.  The  covering  sergeant  and 
the  second  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  of 
their  respective  platoons,  the  former  passing  before 
the  front  rank.  The  leading  guide  will  immediately 
take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may 
be  indicated  to  him  by  the  instructor. 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose 
his  distance,  or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will  conform 
to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  Nos.  202  and  203. 


118        StJux>l  of  the  Company — Lesson  Y. 

If^O.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the 
front,  the  inntructor  will  caune  it  to  break  by  phitoon 
to  the  ri^ht  by  the  Kume  coiinnandH.  At  the  command 
march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the  manner  already 
ezphiined  ;  the  man  du  the  pivot  will  take  care  to  mark 
time  in  his  phice,  without  advancing  or  receding;  the 
iuHtruotor,  tlic  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will 
conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  184  and 
following. 

r.X).  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means  the  instructor  giving  the  commands  prescribed 
Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting  left  for  rijht,  and  recip- 
rocally. 

Article  Second. 
To  march  in  column. 

105.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right 
(or  left)  in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the 
column  to  march,  will  throw  himself  twenty-five  or 
thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  himself 
correctly,  on  their  direction,  and  caution  the  leading 
guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

I'JO.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide 
of  the  leading  platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between  his  own 
and  the  lieels  of  the  instructor. 

1D7.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
"will  step  aside,  and  command  : 

1.  Column,  forward.     2.  Guide  Uft  (or  right).     8.  March. 

108.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will 
lead  oft',  by  a  decided  step,  their  respective  phitoons, 
in  order  that  tlie  whole  may  move  smartly,  and  at  the 
same  moment. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  V.        119 

109.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his 
neighbor  towards  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in 
marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  327.  The  man  next  to  the  guide, 
in  each  platoon,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and 
also  to  march  always  about  six  inches  to  the  right 
(or  left)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the 
direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  great- 
est precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and 
maintain  the  direction  of  his  march  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the 
trace  of  the  leading  one,  preserving  between  the  latter 
and  himself  a  distance  precisely  equal  to  the  front  of 
his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the  same  step  with  the 
leading  guide. 

Article  Third. 

To  change  direction, 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while 
marching,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  wheeling  on  the  march.  Whenever, 
therefore,  a  column  is  to  change  direction,  the  in- 
structor will  change  the  guide,  if  not  already  there, 
to  the  flank  opposite  the  side  to  which  the  change  is  to 
be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it 
be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  direction  to  the 
right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a  marker 
to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be 
made  ;  the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place  himself  on 
the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast 
to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on  that 
person,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze 


120         School  of  the  Company — Lesson  Y. 

his  breast.  When  the  leading  guide  shall  have  ap- 
proached near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  platoon 
will  command  : 

1.  RigJit  wheel.     2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  pla- 
toon is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the  marker. 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived 
opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  39G. 

210.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  will  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  exe- 
cuted as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 
398  and  399.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take 
points  on  the  ground  in  the  new  direction,  in  order 
the  better  to  regulate  the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  re-take  the  direct  march  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  same  means  which  governed 
the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the 
left,  ho  will  command,  gvide  right.  At  this  command, 
the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their 
respective  platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  subdi- 
Tision ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
right;  the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed  No.  212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the 
change  of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 


School  of  the  Comjyani/ — Lesson  V.        121 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the 
instructor  will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left 
in  front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time, 
the  platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  forma- 
tions in  line,  which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning 
to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  sometimes 
cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide.  In  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon 
will  command:  Left  (or  right)  turn,  instead  of  left 
(or  right)  ivheel.  The  subdivisions  will  each  turn,  in 
succession,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier.  No.  402.  The  leading  guide,  as 
soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground, 
the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march.. 

Article  Fourth. 
To  halt  the  column. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  ia- 
structor  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  w^ill  command : 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt ;  the  guides 
also  will  stand  fast,  although  they  may  have  lost  both 
distance  and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt,  be  not  repeated  with  the 
greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant, 
distances  will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to 
recover  it  after  that  command,  he  will  oaly  throve 

11 


122         School  of  the  Company — Lesson  V. 

his  fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if  he  have 
marched  well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his  proper  dis- 
tance ;  and  if  the  latter  regain  what  he  has  thus 
lost,  the  movement  will  be  propagated  to  the  rear  of 
the  column. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  hy  platoon,  to  form,  to  the  right  or 
hfl  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the 
march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column,  right 
is  front,  and  wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  will 
place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading 
guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  posi- 
tion of  the  guide  beyond ;  which  being  executed,  he 
will  command: 

Left — Dress. 

236.  At  thifl  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them. will  place  him- 
self briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct 
the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the 
direction  of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will 
command  Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in 
column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  command-: 

1.  Left  into  lint,  vhteL     2.  March. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
^theehiefs  wf  platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of 
each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast 
lightly  agaiimt  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who 
btandti  £kst;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  Y.        123 

principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in  conformity  to 
•what  is  prescribed  No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn  to 
his  platoon  to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the 
marchin;j;  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

240.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the 
marching  flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle. 

241.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted 
it,  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing 
around  the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon, 
•will  move  rapidly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of 
the  company  will  rei*t  in  line  of  battle,  and  command: 

Right — Dress. 

243.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
lip  on  the  alignment;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right 
of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  opposite  the 
instructor  established  on  the  direction  of  the  guides, 
will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of 
this  officer.  The  captain  will  direct  the  alignment 
from  the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the 
company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command: 

Feont. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of 
battle,  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

24G.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will 
cover  the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file  closer. 


124       School  of  the  Company — Lesson  V. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instruc- 
tor should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  rif];ht  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, he  will  [ilaee  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front 
of  the  leadinjj;  ^uide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  neces- 
Fary,  the  position  of  the  p;uide  beyond;  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  into  line  wheel.     2.  Mabch. 

248.  At  the  command  marcl),  the  front  rank  man  on 
the  ri^ht  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  tlie  right  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the 
guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast:  each  platoon  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief, 
when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line 
of  battj^,  for  this  purpose,  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
will  comTfeand: 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the 
marching  flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank 
of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon, 
will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the 
company  will  rest,  and  command: 

Left — Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second 
platoon,  opposite  the  instructor,  will  place  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  oflicer,  and  the 
captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  left  on  the 
man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command: 

Front. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  Y .       125 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the 
right  of  his  company,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a 
file  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or 
riijkt  dress,  previous  to  commanding  left  or  right  into 
line,  ivheel,  unless,  after  rectifying  the  position  of  the 
guides,  it  should  become  necessary  to  dress  the  pla- 
toons, or  one  of  them,  laterallj'  to  the  right  or  left. 

25G.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left  (or 
right)  into  line,  wheel,  will  assure  himself  that  the 
rearmost  platoon  is  at  its  exact  wheeling  distance  from 
the  one  in  front.  This  attention  is  important,  in 
order  to  detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides  in  this 
essential  point. 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  238,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance 
in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt  short, 
the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  pla- 
toons, will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  239,  and 
following. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this 
formation  will  be  made  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  inverse  means. 

2G0.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without 
halting  the  column,  and  to  march  the  company  in  line 
to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  platoons  left  wheel.     2.  March. 
11* 


126       School  of  the  Cowjmni/— Lesson  Y. 

201.  At  the  ooniniJind  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  phitoon,  the  left  guides  will  hnlt:  the  man 
next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  time: 
the  pl'itoona  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  AVhen  the 
right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near  the  line  ot 
battle,  the  instructor  will  command: 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right  (or  left.) 

202.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  w'^heel  is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company 
will  move  off  together  with  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide,  will  take 
their  positions  as  in  line  of  battle. 

203  At  the  tifth  command,  which  will  be  given  im- 
me^diately  after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  move  briskly  to  the 
side  on  which  the  guide  is  designated.  The  non-com- 
missioned officer  charged  with  the  direction  will  move 
rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide,  and  will  be  assured  in 
his  line  of  march  by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribed 
No.  104.  That  non-commissioned  officer  will  imme- 
diatelv  take  points  on  the  ground  as  indicated  in  the 
same  number.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows 
to  the  side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line. 

204.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column 
left  in  front. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  YI.      127 


LESSON  SIXTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons^  and  to  re-form 
the  company. 

To  hreaJc  the  cmnpany  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step, 
and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  by 
platoon,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  command:  1.  Break  into  platoons,  and  imme- 
diately place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first 
platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  hreak  into  platoons,  the  first 
lieutenant  will  pass  quickly  around  the  left  to  the 
centre  of  his  platoon,  and  give  the  caution :  Mark 
time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command  :    2.  March. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passing  by  the 
front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaged. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time  ;  and 
its  chief  will  immediately  add:  1.  Right  oblique ;  2. 
March.  The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that  this 
platoon  may  commence  obliquing  the  instant  the  rear 
rank  of  the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The  men 
will  shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the 
command  Jonvard  march  is  given,  the  platoon  may 
have  its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near 
the  direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the 
second,  will  command  Forward,  and  add  March,  the 


128      School  of  the   Company — Lesson  VI. 

instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the 
guide  of  tlie  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company -will 
break  into  platoons  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the 
first  platoon  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second, 
and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  Avill 
shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the 
covering  sergeant  will  remair^on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  reform  the  cortipany. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right 
in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  command:  Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will 
immediately  add  :    1.  First  jylaioon ;  2.  Jllghi  oblique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it 
to  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

27G.  The  captain  will  then  command  :  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
second,  the  first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in 
order  to  unmask  the  second  ;  the  covering  sergeant,  on 
the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right  of 
the  company,  passing  by  the  front  rank. 

278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  un- 
masked the  second,  the  captain  will  command  :  1. 
Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall  be 
complete,  he  will  add:  2.  March.  The  first  platoon 
will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will  have 
continued  to  march  straightforward,  and  when  it  shall 
be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain  will  command 
Foncard,  and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons  shall 
unite,  add  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to 
mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column  left  in  front,  the  same  jnovement 


School  of  the   Company/ — Lesson  VI.     129 

will  be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the 
second  platoon  giving  the  command  Forward,  and  the 
captain  adding  the  command  March,  when  the  pla- 
toons are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right, 
will  pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoon  begins 
to  oblique ;  the  guide  of  the  first,  on  its  right,  remain- 
ing on  that  flank  of  the  phxtoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the 
company  to  break  and  re-form,  by  platoon,  by  his  own 
direct  commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give  the  gen- 
eral commands  prescribed  for  the  captain  above  :  1. 
Break  into  platoons;  2.  March;  and  1.  Form  com- 
pamj ;  2.  March. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the 
subdivision  that  breaks  off  should  mark  time  too  long, 
it  might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions,  arrest  the 
march  of  the  following  one,  which  would  cause  a 
lengthening  of  the  column,  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

Article  Second, 

Being  in  calumny  to  break  files  to  the  rear^  and  to 
cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  right  (or  left)  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  files  to 
break  off  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  immediately  turn  to  his  company,  and  command  : 

1.  Two  files  from  left  (or  riff  hi)  to  rear.     2.  March. 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the 
left  (or  right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  the 
others  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the 
two  rear  rank  men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  the  rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  move   to  the 


130     School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI. 

right  by  advancing  the  outer  shoulder ;  the  odd  num- 
ber will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file  from  that 
flank,  the  even  number  behind  the  fourth,  passing  for 
this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number ;  the  two  front 
rank  men  will,  in  like  manner,  move  to  the  right  when 
the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  the  odd 
number  will  place  himself  behind  the  first  file,  the 
even  number  behind  the  second  file,  passing  for  this 
purpose  behind  the  odd  number.  If  the  files  are 
broken  from  the  right,  the  men  will  move  to  the  left, 
advancing  the  outer  shoulder,  the  even  number  of  the 
rear  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the 
odd  number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth ;  the 
even  number  of  the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file, 
the  odd  number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  second, 
the  odd  numbers  for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the 
even  numbers.  The  men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose 
their  distances  and  to  keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break  two 
files  from  the  same  side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  proceed  as  above  directed. 

202.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  files  already  broken,  advancing  a  little  the  outer 
shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  to  the  right, 
if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if 
the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  shortening,  at 
the  same  time,  the  step,  in  order  to  make  room  between 
themselves  and  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the 
files  last  ordered  to  the  rear ;  the  latter  will  break  by 
the  same  commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
first.  The  men  who  double  should  increase  the  length 
of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent  distances  from  being 
lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of 
a  company  by  breaking  off  successive  groups  of  two 
files,  but  the  new  files  must  always  be  broken  from  the 
same  side. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broken 


School  of  the   Company — Lesson  YI.     131 

off  to  return  into  line,  will  give  the  order  to  the  cap- 
tain, who  will  immediately  command  : 

1.  Two  files  into  line.     2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of 
those  marching  by  the  flank  will  return  briskly  into 
line,  and  the  others  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  by 
advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards  the  flank  to 
which  they  belong. 

290.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch 
the  observance  of  the  principles  which  have  just  been 
prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two 
files  to  break  one  after  another,  and  to  return  again 
into  line,  will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three  groups  to 
break  together,  and  for  this  purpose,  will  command  : 
Four  or  six  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear ;  March. 
The  files  designated  will  mark  time;  each  rank  will 
advance  a  little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  "rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  it,  will  oblique  at 
once,  and  each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four 
neighboring  files,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  the 
movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group,  taking 
care  that  the  distances  are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to 
cause  two  or  three  groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at 
once,  who  turning  to  the  company,  will  command: 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  designated 
will  advance  the  inner  shoulder,  move  up  and  form  on 
the  flank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  the  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear, 
the  guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the 
nearest  front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he  will 
also  Dpen  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

301.  The  tiles  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed 


132     School  of  the   Compani/ — Lesson  VI. 

in  the  followinp;  order  :  the  left  files  as  if  the  company 
^vaa  marching  by  the  rij2;ht  flank,  and  the  right  files  as 
if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  left  flank.  Con- 
sequently, whenever  there  is  on  the  ri|!;ht  or  left  of  a 
subdivision,  a  file  which  does  not  belong  to  a  group,  it 
will  be  broken  singly. 

30'2.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances 
in  column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the 
schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movements  of  this 
article  with  precision. 

303.  If  the  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to 
the  left  or  right  in  obliquing;  if,  when  files  are  ordered 
into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and 
precision,  in  either  case  the  following  files  will  be 
arrested  in  their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the  column 
to  be  lengthened  out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank 
from  which  the  files  are  brv)ken,  to  assure  himself  of 
the  exact  observance  of  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of 
direction,  in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily 
pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 

Article  Third. 

To  march  the  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incidental  thereto. 

306.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one  hun- 
dred and  ten  steps  in  a  minute  ;  this  swiftness  will  be 
habitually  maintained  in  column  in  route,  when  the 
roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

i)07.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  instruc- 
tor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  the  route  step, 
he  will  command: 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (of  right). 
3.  Route  step.     4.  March. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI.      133 

308.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  cap- 
tain, the  two  ranks  -will  step  off  together;  the  rear 
rank  will  take,  in  marching,  by  shortening  a  few  steps, 
a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches)  from  the 
rank  preceding,  which  distance  will  be  computed  from 
the  breasts  of  the  men  in  the  rear  rank,  to  the  knap- 
sacks of  the  men  in  the  front  rank.  The  men,  with- 
out further  command,  will  immediately  carry  their 
arms  at  will,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  210.  They  will  no  longer  be  required  to  march 
in  the  cadenced  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  to  re- 
main silent.  The  files  will  march  at  ease  ;  but  care 
will  be  taken  to  prevent  the  ranks  from  intermix- 
ing, the  front  rank  from  getting  in  advance  of  the 
guides,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to  too  great  a 
distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the 
instructor  will  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will 
be  executed  without  formal  commands,  on  a  simple 
caution  from  the  captain  ;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up 
to  change  direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front 
rank.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself,  although  in  the 
route  step,  to  the  principles  which  have  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  change  in  closed  ranks,  with  this 
difference  only :  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  taking 
steps  of  nine,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in 
order  to  clear  the  wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to 
cause  it  to  pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor  will 
first  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder, 
and  then  command : 

1.   Quick  time,     2.  March. 

311.  At  the  command  marchy  the  men  will  resume 
the  cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  dis- 
tance of  sixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace, 


134       School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI. 

the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  step,  will 
command  : 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

313.  At  the  commMid  march,  the  front  rank  will 
continue  the  step  of  t\v?nty-eight  inches,  the  rear  rank 
will  take,  hy  gradually  shortening  the  step,  the  dis- 
tance (tf  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  front  rank  ;  th« 
men  will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step, 
and  the  instructor  should  suppose  the  necessity  of 
marching  by  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

1.    Company  bij  the  right   (or  left)  flank.     2.  By  file  left 
(or  right).     3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right  (or  left)  in  marching,  the  captain  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts 
the  leading  flank  ;  this  guide  will  wheel  immediately 
to  the  left  or  right ;  all  the  files  will  come  in  succes- 
sion to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as  the  guide  ;  if  there 
be  files  broken  off  to  the  rear,  they  will  by  wheeling, 
regain  their  respective  places,  and  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  company. 

31G.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to 
be  again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing 
and  diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted hy  the  eame  commands,  and  the  same  means, 
as  if  the  company  were  marching  in  the  cadenced 
step.  When  the  company  breaks  into  platoons,  the 
chief  of  each  will  move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  - 
and  will  take  tlie  place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step 
back  into  the  rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon, 
and  supposed  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor 
can  cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and  increased,  by 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI.      135 

section,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or 
more. 

318.  The  movement  of  diminishing  and  increasing 
front,  by  section,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  indicated  for  the  same  movements  by  pla- 
toon. The  right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  commanded 
by  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant,  respectively ;  the 
left  sections,  by  the  two  next  subalterns  in  rank,  or,  in 
their  absence,  by  sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section^,^ 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  commanoT 

1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  March, 

320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each 
chief  of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing 
flank  in  the  front  rank,  the  guides  who  will  be  thus 
displaced,  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank  ;  the  file- 
closers  will  close  up  to  within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in 
the  column  in  route,  the  movement  will  never  be  exe- 
cuted in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the  fronfe 
of  the  company. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  pla- 
toons, he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command : 

1.  Form  platoon.     2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section 
will  place  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides 
will  pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  command  7na?x'A, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed 
for  forming  company.  The  moment  the  platoons  are 
formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sections  will  return  to 
their  places  as  file-closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  be  executed 
the  diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  files,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  preceding  article,  and  in  the  same  man- 


136       ScJiooI  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI. 

ner  as  if  marcliinj^  in  the  cadenccd  step.  When  the 
Cfunpan}*  i><  broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions  must 
not  be  roduoed  to  front  of  less  than  six  files,  not 
counting  the  chief  of  the  section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by 
section,  the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the 
route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, by  the  commands  and  the  means  indicated,  Nos. 
314  and  .'U5.  The  moment  the  subdivisions  shall  face 
to  the  ri^ht  (or  left,)  the  first  file  of  each  will  wheel 
to  the  left  (or  right,)  in  marching,  to  prolong  the  di- 
rection, and  to  unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  subdi- 
vision immediately  preceding.  The  file-closers  will 
take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank, 
before  the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

320.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  undouble  the  files, 
which  might  sometimes  be  found  necessary,  he  will 
inform  the  captain,  who,  after  causing  ^the  cadenced 
step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  to  be  shouKlered  or  sup- 
ported, will  command  : 

1.  //I  two  ranks,  undouble  files.     2.  March. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers 
will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left  will 
place  themselves  promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers  ; 
the  rear  rank  will  gain  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  re- 
take the  touch  of  elbows  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

328.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
it  will  be  the  even  numbers  who  will  continue  to 
march  forward,  and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  un- 
double. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the 
files,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  double  files.     2.  Marcii. 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI.      137 

330.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  ■will  double 
in  the  manner  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces 
by  the  ria;ht  or  the  left  flank.  The  instructor  will 
afterwards  cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331.  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  les- 
son may  be  executed  in  double  quick  time.  The  men 
"will  be  brought  by  degrees  to  pass  over  at  this  gait 
about  eleven  hundred  yards  in  seven  minutes. 

332.  AYhen  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step 
shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command 
halt,  and  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be 
permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  they 
shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention  only  to 
holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 


Article  Fourth. 
Countermarch. 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Countermarch.     2.   Company,  right — Face.     3.  By  file 
left.     4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about ;  the 
captain  will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause 
two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

33G.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will  stand 
fast;  the  company  will  step  ofi"  smartly  ;  the  first  tile, 
conducted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel  around  the  right 
guide,  and  direct  its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as 
to  arrive  behind,  and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide  ; 
12* 


138     School  of  the  Company — Lesson  YI. 

each  file  will  come  in  succeission  fo  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  around  the  right  guide  ;  the  leading  file  having 
arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

1.    Company.     2.  Halt.  3.  Front.     4.  Right — Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  aXfoiw  paces 
from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the 
right ;  the  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside  of  the 
left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the  alignment, 
so  that  the  front  rank  may  be  enclosed  between  the 
two  guides;  the  company  being  aligned,  he  will  com- 
mand Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of 
the  company  as  if  in  column  ;  the  guides,  passing 
along  the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places, 
on  the  right  and  left  of  that  rank. 

341.  In  a  column  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to 
the  same  principles ;  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will 
face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  the  file  on  the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means,  but 
according  to  the  same  principles.  Thus,  the  move- 
ment will  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions, 
if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the 
left  be  in  front ;  in  both  cases  the  subdivisions  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 


JSchool  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI.     139 


Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column   hy  'platoon^  to  form  on  the  right 
(or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in 
march,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right 
into  line  of  battle,  will  command : 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right. 

844.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each 
platoon  will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank,  and  the 
men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  column  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second  com- 
mand, will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  company  ought  to  rest  in  line,  and  place 
himself  facing  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  which 
he  will  choose. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that 
the  guide  of  each  platoon,  after  having  turned  to  the 
right,  may  have,  at  least,  ten  paces  to  take  before 
arriving  upon  that  line. 

347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite 
to  the  instructor,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will 
command;  1.  Right  turn ;  and  when  exactly  opposite 
to  that  point,  he  will  add : 

2.  March. 

348.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  will 
turn  to  the  right,  in  conformity  with  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  Its 
guide  will  so  direct  his  march  as  to  bring  the  front 
rank  man,  next  on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor ; 
the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  march  before  its  centre ; 


140      School  of  the   Comjpany — Lesson  VI. 

and  when  its  f;uide  shall  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  he 
■will  command  ; 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

349.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  right  of  the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the 
distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the 
platoon  -svill  halt;  the  files  not  yet  in  line,  will  come 
up  promptly.  The  guide  will  throw  himself  on  the 
line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of 
his  platoon  ;  he  will  face  to  the  instructor,  who  will 
align  him  on  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left.  The 
chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the  same  time,  gone  to  the 
point  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will, 
as  soon  as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in  line, 
command : 

Right — Dhess. 

350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself;  the 
front  rank  man,  who  finds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide, 
will  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of 
this  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from  the  right, 
will  direct  the  alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first;  it  will  then  turn  to  the 
right  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and  march  towards 
the  line  of  battle,  its  guide  directing  himself  on  the 
left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

352.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will 
be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at  the  instant  it 
halts,  its  guide  Avill  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon,  and 
will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its 
files  in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on  the  direction, 
will  command : 

Right — Dress. 


School  of  the   Company — Lesson  VI.     141 

354.  Ilavino;  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to 
his  place  as  a  tile  closer,  passing  around  the  left ;  the 
second  platoon  will  dress  up  on  the  alij2;nment  of  the 
first,  and  when  established,  the  captain  will  command : 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

356.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return 
to  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form 
on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and,  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the 
second  platoon  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first,  and 
reciprocally.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
aligned  it,  from  the  point  of  appui,  (the  left,)  will 
retire  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain  hav- 
ing halted  the  first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the  line 
of  battle,  Ayll  go  to  the  same  point  to  align  this  pla- 
toon, and  then  command  :  Front.  At  the  command, 
guides — posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the  captain  will 
shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take  their 
places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be 
exercised,  at  the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  company, 
the  colonel  will  indicate  the  lesson  or  lessons  they  are 
severally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  commence  by  a 
bugle  signal,  and  terminate  in  like  manner. 

Formation   of  a  company  from    tioo   ranks   into 
single  rankj  and  reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in 
the  manner  indicated  No.  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and 
supposed  to  make  part   of  a  column,  right  or  left  in 


142     School  of  the   Company — Lesson  VI. 

front,  whon  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
single  rank,  he  will  command: 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.     2.  March. 

300.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face 
to  the  right. 

301.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  "will 
step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank. 

302.  The  fir.«'t  file  "will  otep  off  at  the  same  time  with 
the  guide ;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right 
at  the  first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  fol- 
lowed by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  come 
to  turn  on  the  same  spot  where  he  had  turned.  The 
second  file,  and  successively  all  the  other  files,  will 
step  off  as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  the  front 
rank  man  of  each  file  following  immediately  the  rear 
rank  man  of  the  file  next  on  his  right.  The  captain 
■will  superintend  the  movement,  and  when  the  last  man 
shall  have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt  the  company,  and 
face  it  to  the  front. 

303.  The  file  closers,  will  take  their  places  in  line 
of  battle,  two  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  rank. 

304.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.    2.  Company,  right — Face. 
3.  March. 

305.  At  the  second  command  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right :  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  the  right 
will  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

300.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have 
faced  to  the  right,  will  step  off,  and  form  files  in  the 
following  manner:  the  second  man  in  the  rank  will 
place  himself  behind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file ; 
the  third  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  first  in 


School  of  the  Company — Lesson  YI.     143 

the  front  rank  ;  the  fourth  behind  the  third  in  the 
rear  rank.  All  the  others  will,  in  like  manner,  place 
themselves,  alternately  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and 
will  thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on  the  left  of  those 
already  formed. 

3G7.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitu- 
ally executed  by  the  right  of  companies  ;  but  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  them  executed  by  the 
left,  he  will  face  the  company  about,  and  post  the 
guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

368.  The  formation  nill  then  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  by  the  front  rank  :  the  movement  commenc- 
ing with  the  left  file,  now  become  the  right,  and  in 
each  file  by  the  rear  rank  man,  now  become  the  front; 
the  left  guide  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  right. 

3G9.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face 
the  company  to  its  proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either 
of  the  formations  above  described,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies,  and  will  then  give  the  commands  just  pre- 
scribed for  the  instructor.  Each  company  will  execute 
the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four j 
and  reciprocally^  at  a  halt,  and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a 
halt,  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  right  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
four  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.    2.  Company,  left — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the 


144       School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI. 

left :  the  rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  one  pace 
from  tlie  front  rank  bv  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear, 
and  the  nion  will  form  into  four  ranks  as  prescribed 
in  the  8ch(tol  of  the  soldier. 

37.'].  A.t  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  will  reface  to  the  front  without  uudoublinor. 
All  the  other  files  of  four  will  step  off,  and  closing 
Buccessivcly  to  about  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file, 
will  halt,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front,  the  men 
remaining  doubled. 

374.  Tiie  file-closers  will  take  their  new  places  in 
line  of  battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 
37G.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the 

instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.    2.  Company^  right — Face. 
3.  Marcu  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will 
stand  fast,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off  at 
the  same  time,  the  other  files  standing  fast ;  the  second 
file  will  step  off  when  there  shall  be  between  it  and 
the  first  space  sufiicient  to  form  into  two  ranks.  The 
follovi-ing  files  will  execute  sucjjessively  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  second.  As  t^oon  as  the  last  file  shall 
nave  its  distance,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

379.  At  the  command  front,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  front,  and  the  tiles  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and 


ScJiool  of  (he  Compant/ — Lesson  VI.      145 

marching  to  the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  left,  double 
files.     3.  M.A.^cn  {ov  double  quick — March). 

381.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight 
to  the  front:  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to  the 
left,  the  odd  numbers  placing  themselves  behind  the 
even  numbers.  The  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank 
will  shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit  the  odd  num- 
bers of  the  front  rank  to  get  between  them  and  the 
even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The  files  thus  formed  of 
fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to  march  ob- 
liquely, lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as  to  keep 
constantly  abreast  of  the  guide  ;  each  file  will  close 
successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left,  and  when  at 
the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face  to  the  front 
by  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  left. 

382.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in 
four"  ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  right,  undouble 
files.     3.  M-Kv^cn  {^Qv  double  quick — March). 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and 
the  left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march 
straight  to  the  front ;  the  company  will  make  a 
half  face  to  the  right  and  march  obliquely,  length- 
ening the  step  a  little,  in  order  to  keep,  as  near  as 
possible,  abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  second 
file  from  the  left  shall  have  gained  to  the  right  the 
interval  necessary  for  the  left  file  to  form  into  two 
ranks,  the  second  file  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half 
face  to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward ;  the 
left  file  will  immediately  form  into  two  ranks,  and 

13 


146       School  of  the  Company — Lesson  VI. 

take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file  will 
execute  Bucccssively,  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  file  next  to  the  left,  and  each  file  will  form  into 
two  ranks  when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has  obliqued 
the  required  distance  and  faced  to  the  front. 

,'^H4,  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  a 
column,  left  in  fr()nt,  these  difi'erent  movements  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right. 


END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


Sword  Manual,  etc.  147 


MANUAL  OF   THE    SWORD   OR   SABRE,   FOR 
OFFICERS. 

POSITION  OF    THE    SWORD    OR    SABRE,    UNDER    ARMS. 

The  carry.  The  ^ripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which 
■will  be  supported  against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of 
the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

TO    SALUTE    WITH    THE    SWORD    OR    SABRE. 

Three  times  (or  pauses). 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person 
to  be  saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly, 
the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the  right 
eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  elbow 
supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by 
extending  the  arm,  so  that  the.  right  hand  may  be 
brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain 
in  that  position  until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute 
is  rendered  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six 
paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place 
the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 


148  Color- SahUe^  etc. 


COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or 
in  march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance 
supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  generally 
placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to 
hold  it  steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors, 
the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows  : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand 
along  the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye  ;  lower  the 
lance  by  straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent, 
the  heel  of  the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and 
bring  back  the  lance  to  the  habitual  position  when 
the  person  saluted  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have 
passed,  six  paces.  * 


MANUAL 

FOR   RELIEVING    SENTINELS. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lock 
to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with 
both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at  the 
lower  band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the 
muzzle,  the  barrel  sloping  upwards  and  crossing  oppo- 
site the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  propor- 
tionally lowered.  The  palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be 
above,  and  that  of  the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails 


Relieving  Sentinels.  149 

of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to  -which  the  elbows 
will  be  closed. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

[First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  4he  fingers  extended. 

[Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the 
side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished 
to  give  the  men  rest,  the  command  will  be  : 

Parade — Rest. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of 
the  butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  body  ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with 
the  left  hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at  the 
upper  band ;  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to  the 
rear,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent. 


13* 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE   FOURTH. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  Battalion, 

1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  his  batta- 
lion to  form  line  of  battle,  by  night  as  well  as  by  day, 
with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  generally  be  designated 
as  the  directing  company.  That,  as  soon  as  formed, 
will  be  placed  on  the  direction  the  colonel  may  have 
determined  for  the  line  of  battle.  The  other  compa- 
nies will  form  on  it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the 
principles  of  successive  formations  which  will  be 
herein  prescribed. 

3.  The  color-bearer  may  have  received  the  color 
from  the  hands  of  the  colonel ;  but  if  there  be  day- 
light, and  time,  the  color  will  be  produced  with  due 
solemnity. 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort. 

4.  When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms,  and 
the  color  is  wanted,  a  company,  other  than  that  of  the 
color,  will  be  put  in  march  to  receive  and  escort  it. 

5.  The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in 
quick  time,  and  without  music :  the  field  music,  fol- 
lowed by  the  band ;  the  escort  in  column  by  platoon, 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  I.         151 

right  in  front,  with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  and 
the  cohir-bearer  between  the  platoons. 

6.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the 
colonel,  the  escort  will  form  line,  the  field  music  and 
band  on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be  brought  to  a 
shoulder. 

7.  The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color-bearer 
preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by  a 
sergeant  of  the  escort,  will  go  to  receive  the  color. 

8.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed 
by  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the 
entrance  ;  the  escort  will  present  arms,  and  the  field 
music  will  sound  to  the  color. 

9.  After  some  twenty  seconds,  the  captain  will  cause 
the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shouldered,  and  then 
break  by  platoon  into  column  ;  the  color-bearer  will 
place  himself  between  the  platoons,  and  the  lieutenant 
and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to 
the  sound  of  music  in  quick  time,  and  in  the  same 
order  as  above,  the  guide  on  the  right.  The  march 
will  be  so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of 
the  battalion,  the  direction  of  the  march  will  be  par- 
allel to  its  front,  and  when  the  color  arrives  nearly 
opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  column  will  change 
direction  to  the  left,  and  the  right  guide  will  direct 
himself  on  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

Honors  paid  to  the  color. 

11.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from 
the  battalion,  the  escort  \^411  halt,  and  the  music  cease  ; 
the  colonel  will  place  himself  six  paces  before  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  the  coloi-bearer  will  approach 
the  colonel,  by  the  front,  in  quick  time  ;  when  at  the 
distance  of  ten  paces,  he  will  halt ;  the  colonel  will 
cause  arms  to  be  presented,  and  to  the  color  to  be 


152         School  of  the  Battalion — Part  I. 

sounded,  which  hcing  executed,  the  color-bearer  will 
take  his  place  in  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard, 
and  the  battalion,  by  command,  shoulder  arms. 

12.  Tiie  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  return  in 
quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle, 
marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's 
tent  or  quarters  in  the  above  order. 

PART  FIRST. 

Ojoening  and  closing  ranks,  and  the  execution  of 
the  different  fires. 

Article  First. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

22.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be  opened, 
will  command: 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranks. 

23.  At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel  and 
major  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  batta- 
lion, the  first  on  the  flank  of  the  file-closers,  and 
the  second  four  paces  from  the  front  rank  of  the 
battalion. 

24.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

2.  To  the  rear,  open  order.     3.  Marcu. 

25.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  sergeants, 
and  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion,  will  place 
themselves  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and 
opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  in  order  to  mark 
the  new  alignment  of  the  rear  rank  ;  they  will  be 
aligned  by  the  major  on  the  left  sergeant  of  the  batta- 
lion, who  will  be  careful  to  place  himself  exactly  fo.ur 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  I.  153 

paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to  hold  his  piece 
between  the  eyes,  erect  and  inverted,  the  better  to  in- 
dicate to  the  major  the  direction  to  be  given  to  the 
covering  sergeants. 

26.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  the 
file-closers  will  step  to  the  rear  without  counting  steps  ; 
the  men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line  traced 
for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forwjird  on  the  covering 
sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly  the  men  of  their 
respective  companies. 

27.  The  file-closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the 
distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing 
eyes  to  the  right ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will,  from  the 
right,  align  them  on  the  file-closer  of  the  left,  who, 
having  placed  himself  accurately  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it  up  erect 
between  his  eyes,  the  better  to  be  seen  by  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel. 

28.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  com- 
mand: 

4.  Front. 

At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  and 
the  left  sergeant,  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of 
battle. 

29.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed  by 
the  commands  prescribed  for  the  instructor  in  the 
the  school  of  the  company,  No.  28. 

Article  Third. 
The  firings. 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fire 
by  company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion, 
the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands 
to  be  herein  indicated. 

33.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  w^ill 
always  be  direct ;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by 


154  School  of  the  Battalion— Fart  I. 

wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  either  be  direct  or 
oblique. 

34.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel 
will  give,  at  every  round,  the  caution  right  (or  left) 
ohh''jue,  between  the  commands  ready  and  aim. 

36.  The  lire  by  company  will  be  executed  alter- 
nately by  the  right  and  left  companies  of  each  divi- 
sion, as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The  right  company 
will  fire  first ;  the  captain  of  the  left  will  not  give  his 
first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces  at  a 
ready  in  the  right  company  ;  the  captain  of  the  latter, 
after  the  first  discharge,  will  observe  the  same  rule 
in  respect  to  the  left  company  ;  and  the  fire  will  thus 
be  continued  alternately. 

3G.  The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the 
firing  by  wing. 

37.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  compa- 
nies at  once,  and  will  be  executed  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  55,  and 
following.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each 
rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in  school  of 
the  company,  No.  58,  and  following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself 
for  the  defence  of  the  color. 

The  f  re  hy  company. 

39.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  by  company  to  be 
executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  company.     2.   Commence  firing. 

40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  covering 
sergeants  will  take  the  positions  indicated  in  the  school 
of  the  company.  No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at  the 
same  time,  so  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  of  the  guard 
in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  This 
rule  is  general  for  all  the  different  Jirimjs. 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  I.         155 

42.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbered  com- 
panies will  commence  to  fire  ;  their  captains  will  each 
give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company,  No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  command 
company  by  that  oi  Jirst,  third,  Jifth^  or  seventh,  ac- 
cording to  the  number  of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  companies 
will  give,  in  their  turn,  the  same  commands,  observing 
to  precede  them  by  the  number  of  their  respective 
companies. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd  numbered  companies  may 
not  all  fire  at  once,  their  captains  will  observe,  but  only 
for  the  first  discharge,  to  give  the  command  five  one 
after  another  ;  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third  company 
will  not  give  the  command  j^Ve  until  he  has  heard  the 
fire  of  the  first  company  ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will 
observe  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  third,  and 
the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same  rule  with  respect 
to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the 
sound  to  cease  Jiring ;  at  this  sound  the  men  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company, 
No.  63  ;  at  the  sound  for  officers  to  take  their  places 
after  tiring,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color- 
guard,  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line  of 
battle.     This  rule  is  general  for  all  the  firings. 

The  fire  hy  wing. 

46.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  wing.     2.  Right  wing.     3.  Ready.      4.  Aim. 
6.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

47.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alter- 
nately, and  he  will  recommence  the  fire  by  the  com- 
mands, 1.  Right  icing;  2.  Aim;  3.  Fire;  4.  Load. 
1.  Left  wing ;  2.  Aim  ;  3.  Fire  ;  4.  Load  ;  in  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  35, 


156  School  of  the  BaftaUon— Tart  I. 

The  Jire  hy  hattalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed 
by  the  commands  last  prescribed,  substituting  for  the 
first  two,  1.  Fire  hy  battalion ;  2.  Battalion. 

The  fire  hy  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  file.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready. 
4.   Commence  firing, 

50.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  commence 
on  the  rif^ht  of  each  company,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company,  No.  57.  The  colonel  may,  if 
he  thinks  proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence  on  the 
right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  hy  rank. 

51.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.    Fire   by  rank.      2.    Battalion.      3.  Ready.      4.  Rear 
rank.     5.  Aim.     6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

52.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  explained 
in  the  school  of  the  company.  No.  59,  in  following  the 
progression  prescribed  for  the  two  ranks  which  should 
fire  alternately. 

To  fire  hy  the  rear  rank. 

53.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion  to  fire 
to  the  rear,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  About — Face. 

54.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering  ser- 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  I.         157 

geants  and  file-closers,  vrill  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  ;  the  color- 
bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and  for  this  pur- 
pose, the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  before  the 
corporal  next  on  his  right  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass, 
and  will  then  take  his  place  in  the  front  rank ;  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  adjutant,  major,  sergeant  major, 
and  the  music  will  place  themselves  before  the  front 
rank,  and  face  to  the  rear,  each  opposite  his  place  in 
the  line  of  battle — the  first  two  passing  around  the 
right,  and  the  others  around  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

55.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about ;  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  observing 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No. 
70. 

56,  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  difierent  fires 
by  the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the 
front  rank. 

61.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing  to 
face  the  battalion  to  its  proper  front,  will  command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.    2.  Battalion.    Z.  About — Face. 

62.  At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  return 
to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  prescribed,  Nos.  54 
and  55. 

63.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  most  used  in  war,  the 
colonel  will  give  it  the  preference  in  the  preparatory 
exercises,  in  order  that  the  battalion  may  be  brought 
to  execute  it  with  the  greatest  possible  regularity. 


14 


158         School  of  the  Battalion— Tart  II. 


PART  SECOND. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  hattle 
to  (he  order  in  column. 

Article  First. 

To  IreaJc  to  the  right  or  the  left  into  column. 

08.  Lines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into  column 
by  company  ;  they  may  also  break  by  division  or  by 
platocm. 

GO.  It  is  here  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to 
break  by  company  to  the  right,  he  will!  command  : 

1.  By  company,  right  wheel.     2.  "M. KB.cn  [or  double  quick-^ 
March.) 

70.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himfielf  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the  right ;  each  cov- 
ering sergeant  will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front 
rank. 

71.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will 
break  to  the  right,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  173;  each 
captain  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  for 
the  chiefs  of  platoon  ;  the  left  guide,  as  soon  as  ho 
can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  to  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  when  he  shall 
have  approached  near  to  the  perpendicular,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  :   1.  Such  company:  2.  Halt, 

72.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  left  guide  shall  be  at  the  distance 
of  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the  company 
will  halt ;  the  guide  will  advance  and  place  his  left 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  II.        159 

arm  lightly  against  the  breast  of  the  captain,  who  will 
establish  him  on  the  alignment  of  the  man  who  has 
faced  to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place 
himself  correctly  on  the  alignment  on  the  right  of 
that  man ;  which  being  executed,  the  captain  will 
align  his  company  by  the  left,  command  Front,  and 
place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

73.  The  captains  having  commanded  Front,  the 
guides,  although  some  of  them  may  not  be  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  preceding  guides,  will  stand  fast,  in 
order  that  the  error  of  a  company  that  has  wheeled 
too  much  or  too  little  may  not  be  propagated ;  the 
guides  not  in  the  direction  will  readily  come  into  it 
when  the  column  is  put  in  march. 

74.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into 
column  by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

*  80.  AVhen  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the 
column  forward  without  halting  it,  he  will  caution  the 
battalion  to  that  effect,  and  when  the  wheel  is  nearly 
completed,  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.      5.   Guide  left. 

84.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the  right  or  left, 
by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  ;  but  he 
should  previously  caution  the  battalion  that  it  is  to 
continue  the  march. 

86.  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in  column 
towards  the  right  or  left,  or  has  to  direct  its  march  in 
column  perpendicularly  or  diagonally  in  front,  or  in 
rear  of  either  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break 
by  company  to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed ;  hut  when  the  line  breaks  to  the  right,  in 
order  to  march  towards  the  left,  or  reverse,  the  colonel 
will  command:  Break  to  the  right  to  march  to  the  left, 

*In  this  case  the  captains  will  remain  in  front  of  their  companies 


160        School  of  the  Batfalion— 'Part  II. 

or  break  fo  the  hft  to  march  to  the  right,  before  i^iving 
the  commiind.  ////  company,  rijht  (or  /^/V)  wheel.  As 
80on  as  the  battalion  is  broken,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  place  a  marker  abreast  with  the  ri;z;ht  guide  of 
the  leading  company.  The  instant  the  column  ia  put 
in  motion,  this  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or 
right)  march  ten  paces  to  the  front  without  changing 
the  guide,  and  wheel  again  to  the  left  (or  right.)  Tho 
second  wheel  being  completed,  the  captain  will  imme- 
diately command  guide  left  (or  right.)  The  guide  of 
this  company  will  march  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the 
guides  of  the  column.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be 
careful  to  place  a  second  marker  at  the  point  where 
the  first  company  is  to  change  direction  the  second 
time. 

Article  Second. 

To  hrcah  to  the  rear,  hy  the  right  or  left,  into 
column,  and  advance  or  retire  hy  the  right  or 
left  of  companies. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  bat- 
talion to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  column 
by  company,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column.  2. 
Batfalion  right — Face.  3.  Marcu  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

88.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution 
it  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeants  will  step 
into  the  front  rank. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right ;  each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of 
his  company,  and  break  two  files  to  tho  rear;  the  first 
file  will  break  the  whole  depth  of  the  two  ranks ;  the 


Scliool  of  the  Battalion — Part  11.        161 

second  file  leas  ;  which  being  executed,  the  captain 
will  place  himself  so  that  his  breast  may  touch  lightly 
the  left  arm  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  last  file  in 
the  compay  next  on  the  right  of  his  own.  The  captain 
of  the  right  company  will  place  himself  as  if  there 
were  a  ct)mpany  on  his  right,  and  will  align  himself 
on  the  other  captains.  The  covering  sergeant  of  each 
company  will  break  to  the  rear  with  the  right  files, 
and  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  of  the  first 
file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each 
company  will  wheel  to  the  right;  the  covering  ser- 
geant, placed  before  this  file,  will  conduct  it  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear.  The  other  files  will  come 
successively  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot.  The  captains 
will  stand  fast,  see  their  companies  file  past,  and  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled,  each  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Left — 
Dress. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front, 
its  left  guide  will  place  himself  so  that  his  left  arm 
may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

92.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align 
itself  on  its  left  guide,  the  captain  so  directing  it,  that 
the  new  alignment  may  be  perpendicular  to  that  which 
the  company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle,  and,  the 
better  to  judge  this,  he  will  step  back  two  paces,  from 
the  flank. 

93.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command:  Front,  and  take  his  place  before  its  centre. 

94.  The  battalion  marching  in  the  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  tj  break  into  column  by 
company,  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column.  2. 
Battalion,  by  the  right  Jlank.  3.  March,  (or  double 
quick — March.) 

14* 


162        School  of  the  BattaUon—Vart  II. 

95.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  to  lace  bij  the  right  flank. 

96.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right ;  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  his  company  and  cause  it  to  break  to  the  right; 
the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  right, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  placed  in  front  of  this  file 
will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear;  the  other 
files  will  wheel  successively  at  the  same  place  as  the 
first.  The  captains  will  see  their  companies  file  past 
them  ;  when  the  last  files  have  wheeled,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  Battalion^    by   the   left  Jlank — March.     4.    Guide  left. 

07.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  face 
to  the  left,  and  march  in  column  in  the  new  direction. 
The  captains  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the 
centres  of  their  respective  compani'es. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel  will 
give  the  same  commands  as  in  the  case  of  breaking  to 
the  rear  by  the  right,  substituting  the  indication  left 
for  that  of  right. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to  the 
rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in  like  manner. 

105.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the 
right  of  companies,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear).  2.  Bat' 
talion  right — Face.  3,  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March).     4.    Guide  right,  {left)  or  [centre). 

106.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
rapidly  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany, and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right;  the  covering 
sergeants  will  replace  the  captains  in  the  front  rank. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  each  captain  moving  quickly  to  the 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  II.        163 

right  of  his  company  will  cause  files  to  break  to  the 
front,  according  to  the  principles  indicated  No.  89. 

108.  At  the  command  march,  each  captain  placing 
himself  on  the  left  of  his  leading  guide  will  conduct 
his  company  perpendicularly  to  the  original  line.  At 
the  fourth  command,  the  guide  of  each  company  will 
dress  to  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  according  to  the  indi- 
cation given,  taking  care  to  preserve  accurately  his 
distance. 

109.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  to  the  front, 
or  rear,  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will 
be  executed  by  the  same  means  and  the  same  com- 
mands, substituting  left  for  right. 

110.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  com- 
panies, he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear).  2.  Bat- 
talion, by  the  right  flank.  3.  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March.     4.    Guide  right  (left)  or  [centre). 

111.  Which  will  be  executed  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples and  means  prescribed  Nos.  95  and  following, 
and  106  and  following.  At  the  first  command,  the 
color  and  general  guides  will  take  their  places  as  in 
column. 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire 
by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  means  and  the  same  commands, 
substituting  left  for  right. 

113.  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form 
line  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  companies  into  line.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March).     3.   Guide  centre. 

114.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each  company  will  be  formed  into  line, 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  |^o.  154. 


164        Scliool  of  the  Battalion — Part  II. 

115.  At  the  third  command,  the  color  and  general 
guides  ■svill  move  rapidly  to  their  places  iu  line,  as 
•will  be  hereinafter  prescribed,  No.  405. 

116.  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right  or  left 
of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  line 
facing  the  enemy,  he  will  first  cause  the  companies  to 
face  about  while  marching,  and  immediately  form  in 
line  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  Nos.  113 
and  following. 


Article  Third. 

To  "ploy  the  hattalion  into  close  column. 

117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company 
or  by  division,  on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  or  on 
any  other  subdivision,  right  or  left  in  front. 

119.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  by 
division  in  rear  of  the  first,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Close  colurtm,  by  division.  2.  On  the  first  division,  right 
in  front.  3.  Battalion,  right — Face.  4.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

120.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefs  of  divi- 
sion will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their 
divisions  ;  the  chief  of  the  first  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  others  will  remind  them 
that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right,  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  of  the  right  company  of  each  division  will 
replace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank,  as  soon  as  the 
latter  steps  out. 

121.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divisions 
will  face  to  the  right;  the  chief  of  each  division  will 
hasten  to  its  right,  and  cause  files  to  be  broken  to  the 
rear,  as  indicated.  No.  89  ;  the  right  guide  will  break 
at  the  same  time,  and  place  himself  before  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  II.        165 

chief  of  division  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  this 
guide. 

122.  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the  right, 
the  junior  captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who 
will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank.  This  rule  is 
general  for  all  the  ployments  bi/  division. 

123.  At  tlic  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  add,  guide  left;  at  this,  its  left  guide  will 
place  himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as  the  movement  of 
the  second  division  may  permit,  and  the  file-closers 
will  advance  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

124.  AH  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its 
chief,  will  step  off  together,  to  take  their  places  in  the 
column  ;  the  second  will  gain,  in  wheeling  by  file  to 
the  rear,  the  space  of  six  paces,  which  ought  to  sepa- 
rate its  guide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  division,  and 
so  direct  its  march  as  to  enter  the  column  on  a  line 
parallel  to  this  division;  the  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  direct  themselves  diagonally  towards,  but  a  little 
in  rear  of,  the  points  at  which  they  ought  respectively 
to  enter  the  column;  at  six  paces  from  the  left  flank 
of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these  divisions  will 
incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  the  column 
as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  taking  care 
also  to  leave  the  distance  of  six  paces  between  its 
guide  and  the  guide  of  the  preceding  division.  At  the 
moment  the  divisions  put  themselves  in  march  to  enter 
the  column,  the  file  closers  of  each  will  incline  to  the 
left,  so  as  to  bring  themselves  to  the  distance  of  a  pace 
from  the  rear  rank. 

125.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct 
his  division  till  he  shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of  the 
directing  one ;  the  chief  will  then  himself  halt,  see  his 
division  file  past,  and  halt  it  the  instant  the  last  file 
shall  have  passed,  commanding:  1.  Such  division; 
2.  Halt  ;  3.  Front  ;  4.  Left— Dress. 

126.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt; 


166        School  of  the  Battalion — Part  II. 

the  left  guide  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  di- 
rection, six  paces  from  the  guide  which  precedes  him, 
in  order  that,  the  column  being  formed,  the  divisions 
may  ])e  separated  the  distance  of  four  paces. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  face 
to  tlie  front ;  at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  aligned  by  its 
chief,  who  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his 
guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  so  that  his  division 
may  be  parallel  to  that  which  precedes — which  being 
done,  he  will  command  Front,  and  place  himself 
before  the  centre  of  his  division. 

130.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  in  sue-, 
cession  in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  them  on 
the  direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then  move  to  his 
place  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division.  In  assuring 
the  guides  on  the  direction,  he  will  be  a  mere  observer, 
unless  one  or  more  should  fail  to  cover  exactly  the 
guide  or  guides  already  established.  This  rule  is 
general. 

131.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division,  and  afterwards 
take  his  position  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column, 
six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  this  division. 

132.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  front  of  the  first  divi- 
sion, the  colonel  will  give  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  left  for  that  of  right  in  front. 

133.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the  chiefs 
of  division  and  the  junior  captains  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  120,  121,  122;  but 
the  chiefs  of  the  last  three  divisions,  instead  of  caus- 
ing the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  will  cause 
them  to  break  to  the  front. 

134.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  add.  Guide  right. 

135.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  ofi"  together 
to  take  their  places  in  the  column  in  front  of  the  di- 
recting division  ;  each  will  direct  itself  as  prescribed, 


School  of  tlie  Battalion — Part  II.        167 

No.  124,  and  will  enter  in  such  manner  that,  when 
halted,  its  guide  may  find  himself  six  paces  from  the 
guide  of  the  division  next  previously  established  in 
the  column. 

136.  Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  his 
division,  till  his  right  guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with 
the  guide  of  the  directing  one ;  he  will  then  halt  his 
division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front ;  at  the  in- 
stant it  halts,  its  right  guide  will  face  to  the  rear, 
place  himself  six  paces  from  the  preceding  guide,  and 
cover  him  exactly — which  being  done,  the  chief  will 
align  his  division  by  the  right. 

137.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the 
right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  guides 
on  the  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  and  then 
move  outside  of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  to  a 
point  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  fourth 
division,  now  in  front. 

138.  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed. No.  131,  and  then  move  outside  of  the  right 
flank  of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with, 
the  first  division,  now  in  the  rear. 

139.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides,  about — Face. 

140.  At  this,  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  rear, 
will  face  to  the  front. 

141.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  the  fourth  division,  left 
Tor  riykt)  in  front.  Battalion,  left — Face.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

142.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  of  those  which  precede,  but  by  i»- 
verse  means;  the  fourth  division  on  which  the  bat- 


1G8        School  of  the  Battalion— Tart  II. 

talion  ploys  will  stand  fast;  the  instant  the  movement 
commences,  its  chief  will  command,  guide  right  (or 
lejt). 

143.  The  foregoing;  examples  embrace  all  the  prin- 
ciples ;  thus,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ploy  tho 
battalion  on  an  interior  division,  he  will  command : 

1,  Close  column  hy  divinon.  2.  On  such  division,  right  (or 
left)  in  front.  3.  Battalion  inwards — Face.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March).  > 

144.  The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the 
chief  of  the  directing  division  will  command,  guide 
left  (or  right). 

145.  The  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle, 
are  to  the  right  of  the  directing  division,  will  face  to 
the  left ;  those  which  are  to  the  left,  will  face  to  the 
right. 

146.  If  the  right  is  to  be  in  front,  the  right  divi- 
sions will  ploy  in  front  of  the  directing  division,  and 
the  left  in  its  rear ;  the  reverse,  if  the  left  is  to  be  in 
front. 

147.  In  all  the  ployments  on  an  interior  division, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the 
guides  in  front,  and  the  major  those  in  rear  of  the 
directing  division. 

148.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a 
halt,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  combining  the 
two  gaits  of  quick  and  double  quick  time,  and  always 
in  rear  of  one  of  the  flank  divisions. 

149.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in 
rear  of  the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  the  first  division. 
3.  Battalion — by  the  right  flank.  4.  Double  quick — 
March. 

152.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command:   Guide  left.     At  this,  the  left 


Scliool  of  the  Battalion—Tart  III.       169 

guide  will  move  to  the  left  flank  of  the  division  and 
direct  himself  on  the  point  indicated. 

153.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  the  right 
and  move  off  in  double  quick  time,  breakinp;  to  the 
right  to  take  their  places  in  column  ;  each  'chief  of 
division  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  division 
in  order  to  conduct  it.  The  files  will  be  careful  to 
preserve  their  distances,  and  to  march  with  a  uniform 
and  decided  step.  The  color-bearer  and  general  guides 
will  retake  their  places  in  the  ranks. 

154.  The  second  division  will  immediately  enter  the 
column,  marching  parallel  to  the  first  diVision  •  its 
chief  will  allow  it  to  tile  past  him,  and  when  the  last 
file  is  abreast  of  him,  will  command:  1.  Second 
division,  by  the  left  Jiank—mx^cn.  2.  Guide  left,  tan^ 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division. 

155.  At  the  command  march,  the  division  will  face 
to  the  left ;  at  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide  of  the  first  divi- 
sion ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 
When  the  second  division  has  closed  to  its  proper  dis- 
tance, its  chief  will  command:  Quick  time—'^KRcn 
^^I'f/'mf'""  ^'^'  *^^"  change  its  step  to  quick  time! 

15b.  Ihe  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  execute  their  movements  according  to  the  same 
principles,  taking  care  to  gain  as  much  ground  as 
possible  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 


PART  THIRD. 

Article    First. 
To  march  in  column  at  full  distance. 

^   IGl.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  column 
m  march   he  will  indicate  to  the  leading  guide  two 
distinct  objects  in  front,  on  the  line  which  the  guide 
15  ° 


170       School  of  the  Battalion— TsxH  III. 

ought  to  follow.  This  guide  will  immediately  put  his 
phoulders  in  a  square  with  that  line,  take  the  more 
distant  cthjoct  as  the  point  of  direction,  and  the  nearer 
one  as  the  intermediate  point. 

164.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.   Column  forward.      Guide  left  (or  right.)    3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

105.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  the  column  will  put  itself  in 
march,  conforming  to  what  is  prcvscribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company  No.  200  and  following. 

166.  The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain  him- 
self correctly  on  the  direction  by  keeping  steadily  in 
view  the  two  points  indicated  to  him,  or  chosen  by 
himself;  if  these  points  have  a  certain  elevation,  he 
may  be  assured  he  is  on  the  true  direction,  when  the 
nearer  masks  the  more  distant  point. 

167.  The  following  guide  will  preserve  with  exact- 
ness both  step  and  distance;  each  will  march  in  the 
trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him, 
without  occupying  himself  with  the  general  direction. 

168.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself,  habit- 
ually, abreast  with  the  leading  guide,  to  see  that  he 
does  not  deviate  from  the  direction,  and  will  observe, 
also,  that  the  next  guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  first. 

169.  The  major  will  generally  be  abreast  with  the 
last  subdivision  ;  he  will  see  that  each  guide  marches 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding; 
if  either  deviate  from  the  direction,  the  major  will 
promptly  rectify  the  error,  and  prevent  its  being  propa- 
gated ;  but  he  need  not  interfere,  in  this  way,  unless 
the  deviation  has  become  sensible,  or  material. 

170.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
frequently  cause  the  about  to  be  executed  while  march- 
ing ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  III.       171 

1.  Battalion,  right  about.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

171.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies  will 
face  to  the  right  about,  and  the  column  will  then 
march  forward  in  an  opposite  direction  ;  the  chiefs  of 
subdivision  will  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file 
closers  in  front  of  the  rear  rank,  and  the  guides  will 
place  themselves  in  the  same  rank.  The  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  remain  abreast  of  the  first  division,  now 
in  rear;  the  major  will  give  a  point  of  direction  to 
the  leading  guide,  and  march  abreast  of  him. 

Article  Third. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced 
step,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change 
direction,  he  will  go  to  the  point  at  which  the  change 
ought  to  be  commenced,  and  establish  a  marker  there, 
presenting  the  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  this 
marker,  no  matter  to  which  side  the  change  of  direc- 
tion is  to  be  made,  will  be  posted  on  the  opposite  side, 
and  he  will  remain  in  position  till  the  last  subdivision 
of  the  battalion  shall  have  passed.  The  leading  sub- 
division being  within  a  few  paces  of  the  marker,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right). 

232.  At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision 
will  immediately  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite 
the  change  of  direction,  if  not  already  there.  This 
guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  graze  the  breast  of 
the  marker  ;  arrived  at  this  point,  the  chief  will  cause 
his  subdivision  to  change  direction  by  the  commands 
and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company.     When  the  wheel  is  completed,  the 


172       School  of  the  Battalion— Vd^ri  III. 

chief  of  this   subdivision  will   retake   the    guide,    if 
chanj^ed,  on  the'side  of  the  primitive  direction. 

2.'^3.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as 
well  as  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been 
explained  for  the  leading  subdivision. 


Article    Fourth. 
To  halt  the  column. 

239.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

240.  At  the  second  command,  brisklj  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  column  will  halt ;  no  guide  will  stir, 
though  he  may  have  lost  his  distance,  or  be  out  of  the 
direction  of  the  preceding  guides. 

241.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  double  quick 
time,  will  be  halted  by  the  same  commands.  At  the 
command  halt,  the  men  will  halt  in  their  places,  and 
will  themselves  rectify  their  positions  in  the  ranks. 

242.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wMsh  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  move 
a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  and  face  to  hira  ; 
this  guide  and  the  following  one  will  fix  their  eyes  on 
the  colonel,  in  order  promptly  to  conform  themselves 
to  his  directions. 

243.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a 
general  direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  limit  himself 
to  rectifying  the  position  of  such  as  may  be  without,  or 
within  the  direction,  by  the  command  guide  of  (such) 
company,  or  guides  of  (such)  companies,  to  the  right, 
(or  to  the  left;)  at  this  command,  the  guides  designa- 
ted will  place  themselves  on  the  direction  ;  the  others 
will  stand  fast. 

244.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  neces- 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  III.       173 

sary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  the 
column,  he  will  place  the  first  two  on  the  direction  he 
shall  have  chosen,  and  command  : 

Guides,  cover. 

242.  At  this,  the  following  guides  will  promptly 
place  themselves  on  the  direction  covering  the  first 
two  in  file,  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  to 
the  front  of  his  company,  from  the  guide  immediately 
preceding  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  them  in 
the  direction,  and  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Left^  (or  right) — Dress. 

246.  At  this  command,  each  company  will  incline  to 
the  right  or  left,  and  dress  forward  or  backward,  so  as 
to  bring  the  designated  flank  to  rest  on  its  guide ;  each 
captain  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his 
guide,  promptly  align  his  company  parallelly  with  that 
which  precedes,  then  command  Front,  and  return  to 
his  place  in  column. 


Article  Fifth. 
To  close  the  column  to  half  distance^  or  in  mass. 

252.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance,  on  the  leading 
company,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  half  distance,  close  column.     2.  March,  (or  double 
quick — March.) 

253.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 

254.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  repeated 
by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  leading 

15* 


174        School  of  the  BattaUo7i— Tart  III. 

company,  this  company  will  stand  fast,  and  its  chief 
will  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one 
pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

255.  All  the  other  companies  will  continue  to 
march,  and  as  each  in  succession  arrives  at  platoon 
distance  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its  captain  will 
halt  it. 

25G.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its 
guide  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides 
who  precede,  and  the  captain  will  ali^n  the  company 
by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

257.  No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the 
general  direction  of  the  guides  before  they  respectively 
halt ;  it  will  sufiice  if  each  follow  in  the  trace  of  the 
one  who  precedes  him. 

258.  The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will 
superintend  the  execution  of  the  movement,  observing 
that  the  captains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at  pla- 
toon distance  the  one  from  the  other. 

259.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front, 
will  face  to  the  leading  guide,  and  assure  the  positions 
of  the  following  guides,  as  they  successively  place 
themselves  on  the  direction. 

200.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  last  guide. 

261.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  close  by  the  same  commands. 

202.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  command  quick  time;  the  chiefs  of  the 
other  companies  will  caution  them  to  continue  their 
march. 

203.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company 
will  march  in  quick,  and  the  other  companies  in  double 
quick  time ;  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance 
from  the  preceding  one,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march 
in  quick  time. 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  III.        175 

264.  When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained 
its  distance,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Double  quick — March. 

265.  "When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column 
and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance  at  the  same 
time,  he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the  leadino;  company 
of  his  intention,  who,  at  the  command  march,  will  halt 
his  company  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

266.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  colonel  should  not  give  the  command  double  quick, 
the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  halt  his  com- 
pany at  the  command  march,  and  align  it  by  the  left. 
In  the  case  where  the  colonel  adds  the  command /io?^ We 
quick,  the  captains  of  companies  will  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed  No.  262,  and  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  indicated  No.  263. 

To  close  the  column  on  the  eighth^  or  rearmost 
company. 

267.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  caus- 
ing it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  the  first  company, 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  on  the 
eighth,  he  will  command: 

1.  On  the  -eighth  company,  to  half  distance  close  column. 
2.  Battalion,  about — Face.  3.  Column  forward.  4. 
Guide  right.     5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

268.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  eighth,  will  face  about,  and  their  guides 
will  remain  in  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

269.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their  companies 
on  the  directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  command  march,  the  eighth  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  its  captain  will  align  it  by  the  left, 


17G        School  of  tlie  Battalion— Vart  III. 

the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march, 
and,  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one 
estahiished  before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it  and  face 
it  to  the  front.  At  the  moment  that  each  company 
halts,  the  left  guide,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will 
place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction  of  the  guides 
already  established.  Immediately  after,  the  captaia 
will  align  his  company  by  the  left,  and  the  file  closers 
will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear  rank.  If  this  move- 
ment be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  each  captain, 
in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command,  Such  company,  right 
about — Halt.  At  this  command,  the  company  desig- 
nated will  face  to  the  right  about  and  halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear,  to 
face  about. 

272.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  behind 
the  rearmost  guide,  will  assure  successively  the  posi- 
tions of  the  other  guides,  the  major  will  remain  abreast 
with  the  rearmost  company. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will 
command : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance,  close  column. 
2.  Battalion  right  about.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — • 
March).     4.  Guide  right. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company  will  caution  his  company  that  it  will  remain 
faced  to  the  front ;  the  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  caution  their  companies  that  they  will  have  to  face 
about. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  company  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  by 
the  left;  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the 
rear  rank. 

276.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the 
same  command,  will  place  themselves  on  the  flank  of 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  III.        177 

the  column ;  the  subdivisions  will  face  about,  and  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  company  im- 
mediately preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the  front 
and  halt  it  as  prescribed,  No.  270.  The  instant  each 
company  halts,  the  guide  on  the  directing  flank,  re- 
maining faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  himself 
on  the  direction  of  the  guides  already  established. 
After  which,  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by 
the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  of  the  first  company.  The  major  will 
place  himself  a  few  paces  in  rear  of  the  guide  of  the 
eighth  company,  and  will  assure  successively  the  posi- 
tion of  the  other  guides. 

AtTPCLE  Sixth. 

To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in 

mass. 

281.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being  at 
a  halt,  the  colonel  will  put  it  in  march  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

Article  Seyenth. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 
287.    A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march, 

•111  !••  'O  ' 

Will  change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  as  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance; but  as  the  distance  between  the  subdivisions  is 
less,  the  pivot  man  in  each  subdivision  will  take  steps 
of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine,  and  of  seventeen 
inches  instead  of  eleven,  according  to  the  gait,  in  order 
to  clear,  in  time,  the  wheeling  point,  and  the  march- 


178        School  of  the  Battalion—T^diXi  III. 

ing  flank  will  describe  the  arc  of  a  larger  circle,  the 
better  to  facilitate  the  movement. 


Article  Eighth. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 

Ist.   To  change  direction  in  marching. 

288.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being 
in  march,  will  change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdi- 
visions. 

289.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse, 
or  to  the  pivot  flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on  the 
principle  of  wheeling  in  marching ;  to  this  end,  the 
colonel  will  first  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  guide 
on  the  flank  opposite  to  the  intended  change  of  direc- 
tion, if  it  be  not  already  on  that  flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the 
colonel,  after  having  caused  a  marker  to  be  placed  at 
the  point  where  the  change  ought  to  commence,  will 
command : 

1.  Battalion^  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

291.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  leading  division 
will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the 
wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform  themselves 
to  its  movement;  to  this  end  the  left  guide  of  each, 
advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder,  and  lengthening 
a  little  the  step,  will  incline  to  tlie  left,  and  will  ob- 
serve, at  the  same  time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to  the 
front  that  there  may  constantly  be  an  interval  of  four 
paces  between  his  division  and  that  which  precedes 
it :  and  as  soon  as  he  shall  cover  the  preceding  guide, 


School  of  tlie  Battalion— VsiTt  III.        179 

he  will  cease  to  incline  and  then  march  exactly  in  his 
trace. 

293.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  move- 
ment of  its  guide  ;  the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow 
towards  him  and  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder  the 
instant  the  movement  commences;  each  file,  in  inclin- 
ing, will  gain  so  much  the  less  ground  to  the  front,  as 
the  file  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right 
guide  will  gain  only  so  much  as  may  be  necessary  to 
maintain  between  his  own  and  the  preceding  division 
the  same  distance  which  separates  their  marching 
flanks. 

298.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  ended, 
will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

299.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  leading  division  completes  its  wheel, 
it  will  resume  the  direct  march  ;  the  other  divisions 
will  conform  themselves  to  this  movement;  and  if  any 
guide  find  himself  not  covering  his  immediate  leader, 
he  will,  by  slight  degrees,  bring  himself  on  the  trace 
of  that  guide,  by  advancing  the  right  shoulder. 

2d.   To  change  the  direction  from  a  halt. 

306,  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed 
in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  give  it  a  new  direction,  and  in  which  it  is  to  re- 
main, he  will  cause  it  to  execute  this  movement  by  the 
flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following  manner: 

307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction 
by  the  right  flank,  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  the  point  of  direction  to  the  right ;  this  oflicer 
will  immediately  establish,  on  the  new  direction,  two 
markers,  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less  than  the 
front  of  the  first  subdivision,  the  first  marker  in  front 


180        School  of  the  Battah'on^Vari  III. 

of  the  right  file  of  the  subdivision  ;  ■which  being  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command: 

1.     Chanfj".    direction    by    the    rirjht  flnnk.     2.    Battalion^ 
right — Fack.     3.  March  [or  double  quick— "^Iwicii) 

308.  At  the  second  command,  tlie  column  will  face 
to  the  rifjht,  and  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

300.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  stop  off  together  ;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading 
one  will  direct  himself  from  the  first  step,  parallelly 
to  the  markers  placed  in  advance  on  the  new  direc- 
tion ;  the  chief  of  the  subdivision  will  not  follow  the 
movement,  but  see  it  file  past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left 
guide  shall  have  passed,  he  will  command: 

1.  First  company  [ax  first  division.)     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 
4.  Lefi — Dress. 

310.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision  will 
place  itself  against  the  two  markers,  and  be  promptly 
aligned  by  its  chief. 

311.  The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following  sub- 
divisions will  conform  himself  to  the  direction  of  the 
the  right  guide  of  the  subdivision  preceding  his  own 
in  the  column,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new  direction  par- 
allelly to  that  subdivision,  and  at  the  distance  of  four 
paces  from  its  rear  rank. 

312.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  his  ow^n 
person,  on  arriving  opposite  to  the  left  guides  already 
placed  on  the  new  direction,  see  his  subdivision  file 
past,  and  conform  himself,  in  halting  and  aligning  it, 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  309. 


Sclwol  of  the  Battalion  ^Tart  III.        181 


Article  Ninth. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass, 
to  take  distances. 

1st.   To  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

323.  The  column  beinp;  by  company  at  half  distance 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  take  full  distances  by  the  head,  he  will  command: 

By  the  head  of  column,  take  wheeling  distance. 

324.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  put  it  in  march  ;  to  this  end  he  will 
command : 

1.  First  company,  forward.      2.    Guide   left.      3.   March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

325.  When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheel- 
ing distance,  the  captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company,  forward.     2.    Guide  left.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

326.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  that  this  company  shall  have 
its  wheeling  distance,  it  will  step  off  smartly,  taking 
the  step  from  the  preceding  company.  Each  of  the 
other  companies  will  successively  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

327.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company  puts 
itself  in  march  at  the  instant  it  has  its  distance. 

328.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  march  of  the  lead- 
ing guide. 

329.  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the 
rearmost  guide. 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be 

16 


182        School  of  the  Battalion— ?zx\,  III. 

in  march,  the  colonel  will  p;ive  the  same  commands, 
and  add : 

March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

?)3l.  If  the  column  be  marchinp;  in  quick  time,  at 
the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  leading  com- 
pany will  cause  double  quick  time  to  be  taken,  which 
will  also  be  dcme  by  the  other  captains  as  the  compa- 
nies successively  attain  their  proper  wheeling  distance. 

332.  If  the  column  be  marcliing  in  double  quick 
time,  the  leading  company  will  continue  io  march  at 
the  same  gait.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  company 
gains  its  proper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
retake  the  double  quick  step. 

2d.   To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

333.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the 
rearmost  company,  he  will  establish  two  markers  on 
the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  battle, 
the  first  opposite  to  the  rearmost  company,  the  second 
marker  towards  the  head  of  the  column,  at  company 
distance  from  the  first,  and  both  facing  to  the  rear  ;  at 
the  same  time,  the  right  general  guide,  on  an  intima- 
tion from  the  lieutenant  colonel,  will  move  rapidly  a 
little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  head  of  the  column 
will  extend,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  two  markers.  These  dispositions 
being  made,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  On  the  eighth  company/,  take  wheeling  distance.  2,  Col- 
umn forivard.  3.  Guide  left.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

334.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank  ; 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  it  to 
Btand  fast. 


School  of  the  BaitaUo7i—Tsiit  III.       183 

335.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company, 
this  latter  company  will  stand  fast ;  its  chief  will  align 
it  by  the  left  on  the  first  marker,  who  is  opposite  to 
this  company,  and  place  himself  before  its  centre,  after 
commanding:  Front.  At  this  command,  the  marker 
will  retire,  and  the  left  guide  will  take  his  place. 

336.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  the  guide  of  the  leading  one  directing  himself 
a  little  within  the  right  general  guide;  when  the 
seventh  company  has  arrived  opposite  the  second 
marker,  its  captain  will  halt,  and  align  it  on  thia 
marker,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth  com- 
pany. 

337.  AVhen  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall 
see  that  there  is,  between  his  company  and  the  seventh, 
the  necessary  space  for  wheeling  into  line,  he  will  halt 
his  company  ;  the  guide  facing  to  the  rear  will  place 
himself  promptly  on  the  direction,  and  the  moment  he 
shall  be  assured  in  his  position,  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  by  the  left,  and  then  place  himself  two 
paces  before  its  centre  ;  the  other  companies  will  suc- 
cessively conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  sixth  company. 

338.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement  and  see 
that  each  company  halts  at  the  prescribed  distance  ; 
he  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault  that  may  be  com- 
mitted, and,  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  shall  be 
aligned,  he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the 
rear,  to  face  about. 

339.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  successively  assure 
the  left  guides  on  the  direction,  placing  himself  in 
their  rear,  as  they  arrive. 

340.  The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

3c?.   To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  cohimn. 


184        School  of  the  Battah'on—Vart  III. 

341.  Tlio  colonel,  wishing;  to  take  distances  on  the 
leadin*;  ctmipany,  will  establish  two  markers  in  the 
manner  just  prcserilied,  one  abreast  with  this  company 
and  the  other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  first, 
but  bdth  facinf]:;  to  the  front:  the  left  ;i;eneral  j^uide,  on 
an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  colonel,  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  rear  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the 
prtdongation  of  the  two  markers,  a  little  beyond  the 
point  to  which  the  rear  of  the  column  will  extend  : 
these  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  On  the  jirst  company ^  take  wheeling  distance.  2.  Bat- 
talion, about — Face.  3.  Column,  forward.  4.  Guide 
right.     5.   Mauch  (or  double  quick — Maucii). 

342.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  one  designated,  will  face  about,  the  guides 
remaining  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

343.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the 
designated  company  will  align  it,  as  prescribed,  No. 
335,  on  the  marker  placed  by  its  side. 

345.  The  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves 
in  march,  the  guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct 
himself  a  little  within  the  left  general  guide ;  whea 
the  second  company  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the 
second  marker,  its  captain  will  face  it  about,  conform- 
ing to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  270,  and  align  it,  as  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

340,  The  instant  that  the  third  company  shall  have 
its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it  facing  it 
about,  as  prescribed.  No,  270,  and  align  it  by  the  left ; 
the  captains  of  the  remaining  companies  will  each  in 
succession  conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  captain  of  the  third. 

347.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  indi- 


Scliool  of  tie  Battalion— V^xi  III.       185 

cated  No.  338  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  -^ill 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  339 
and  340. 


Article  Tenth. 
Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance, 

351.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated, 
school  of  the  company;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  wnll 
command : 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion  right  (or  left) — Face.  3. 
By  file  left  (or  right).  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

352.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
subjoined. 

353.  The  column  being  supposed  formed  by  division, 
right  in  front,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion,  right  a?id  left — Face.  3. 
By  file  left  and  right.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

354.  At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of  the  odd 
numbered  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
right,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  face  to  the  left. 

355.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  the  even  to  the  left ;  the  right 
and  left  guides  of  all  the  divisions  will  face  about ; 
the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  right 
and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  leading  front  rankmaa 


180        School  of  the  Ba(taUon—VciYt  III. 

of  liis  division;  tlic  cliiefs  of  even  divisions  will  hasten 
to  their  IvSt,  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear, 
and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  lead- 
ing front  rank  man. 

350.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  divisions,  each 
conducted  hy  its  chief,  "will  step  otf  smartly,  the  guides 
standin};  fast;  each  odd  division  will  wiiecl  by  tile  to 
the  left  around  its  rip;ht  guide  ;  each  even  division 
■will  wheel  by  file  to  the  ri<5ht  around  its  left  guide, 
each  division  so  directing  its  marcdi  as  to  arrive  behind 
its  opposite  guide,  and  when  its  hea<l  shall  bo  up  with 
this  guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and  cause 
it  to  face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  bo 
aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right;  to  this  end,  the 
chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

358.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will 
command.  Front  ;  at  this,  the  guides  will  shift  to  their 
proper  flanks. 

359.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
moans  ;  but  all  tho  divisions  will  be  aligned  by  the 
left:  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions  will 
hasten  to  the  left  (jf  their  respective  divisions  as  soon 
as  tho  latter  shall  have  been  faced  to  the  front. 

3G2.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  the 
countermarch  will  be  executed  by  tho  same  means  and 
commands,  applying  to  companies  what  is  prescribed 
for  divisions. 

3()3.  The  countermarch  will  always  tako  place  from 
a  halt,  whether  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  or  at 
full,  or  half  distance. 


School  of  tie  Battalion— Pait  III.       187 


Article  Eleventh. 

Being  in  column  hy  company^  closed  in  mass,  to 
form  divisions. 

3C)4.  The  column  beinpj  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  divisions.     2.   Left  companies,   left — Face. 
3.   March  (or  double  quick — March). 

365.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  left 
companies  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  left. 

3GG.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  companies  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  their  captains  will  place  them- 
selves by  the  side  of  their  respective  left  guides. 

367.  The  right  companies,  and  their  captains  will 
stand  fast;  but  the  right  and  left  guides  of  each  of 
these  companies  will  place  themselves  respectively 
before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  company,  both  guides 
facing  to  the  right,  and  each  resting  his  right  arm 
gently  against  the  breast  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  file,  in  order  to  mark  the  direction. 

368.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  companies 
only  will  put  themselves  in  march,  their  captains 
standing  fast ;  as  each  shall  see  that  his  company, 
filing  past,  has  nearly  cleared  the  column,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Such  company.      2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

369.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  march;  the 
second  at  the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its  right 
company  ;  and  the  third  immediately  after  the  second. 

370.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,  the 
files,  if  there  be  intervals  between  them,  will  promptly 


188        School  of  the  J3atfah'o7i—Vavt  III. 

incline  to  the  ri-^lit,  the  captain  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  right  company  of  the  division,  and 
align  himself  correctly  on  the  front  rank  of  that  com- 
pany. 

.".71.  The  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  same 
time  hcfore  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company, 
face  to  the  right,  and  cover  correctly  the  guides  of  the 
right  company;  the  moment  his  capiain  sees  him 
established  on  the  direction,  he  will  command: 

Jiir/ht — Drkss. 

372.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  forward 
on  the  alignment  of  the  right  company  ;  the  front 
rank  man,  who  may  find  himself  opposite  to  the  left 
guide,  will,  without  preceding  his  rank,  rest  lightly 
his  1)reast  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide;  the 
captain  of  the  left  company  will  direct  its  alignment 
on  this  man,  and  the  alignment  being  assured,  he  will 
command,  Froxt  ;  but  not  quit  his  position. 

o7.'>.  The  colonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

374.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the  fronts 
of  divisions  will  return  to  their  places  in  column,  the 
left  guide  of  each  right  company  passing  through  the 
interval  in  the  centre  of  the  division,  and  tiie  captains 
will  place  themselves  as  proscribed. 

37G.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Form  divisions.       2.   Lr/t  companies,  hy  the  left  flank. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  right 
companies  will  command,  Mark  time,  the  captains  of 
the  left  companies  will  caution  their  companies  to 
face  hy  iJw  hft  Jlanl-. 


ScTiool  of' the  Battalion— Vd^xt  III.        189 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  ri^ht  companies 
■will  mark  time,  the  left  companies  will  face  to  the 
left;  the  captains  of  the  left  companies  will  each  see 
his  company  file  past  him,  and  when  it  has  cleared  the 
column,  will  command : 

Such  company  by  the  right  flank — March. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

4.  Forward.     5.   March. 

379.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume 
the  gait  at  which  it  was  marching  previous  to  the 
commencement  of  the  movement.  The  guides  of  each 
division  will  remain  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  re- 
spective companies ;  the  left  guide  of  the  right  com- 
pany will  pass  into  the  line  of  file-closers,  before  the 
two  companies  are  united  ;  the  right  guide  of  the  left 
company  will  step  into  the  rear  rank.  The  captains 
will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No.  75. 

Being  in  column  at  full  or  half  distance  to  form 
divisions. 

380.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of 
being  closed  in  mass,  is  at  full  or  half  distance,  divi- 
sions will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner;  but  the 
captains  of  the  left  companies,  if  the  movement  be 
made  in  quick  time,  after  commanding  Front,  will 
each  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  command,  1.  Such  company/  forioard.  2.  Guide 
right.  3.  March.  If  the  movement  be  made  in  dou- 
ble quick  time,  each  will  command  as  soon  as  his 
company  has  cleared  the  column  : 

1.  Such  company  by  the  right  flank.     2.  March. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  inverse  means. 


100        School  of  the  Battalion— Vaxi  IV. 


PART  FOURTH. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  col- 
umn to  the  order  in  battle. 

Article  First. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

380.  Tho  line  of  battle  may  be  marked  or  deter- 
mined in  three  different  manners  :  1*^  by  placing  two 
markers  eighty  or  a  hundred  paces  apart,  on  the  di- 
rection it  is  wished  to  give  to  the  line  ;  2(1,  by  placing 
a  marker  at  the  point  at  which  it  may  be  intended  to 
rest  a  flank,  and  then  choosing  a  second  point  towards, 
or  beyond  the  opposite  flank,  and  there  posting  a  se- 
cond marker  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less  than 
the  leading  subdivision  ;  3t7,  by  choosing  at  tirst  the 
points  of  direction  for  the  flanks,  and  then  deter- 
mining by  intermediate  points,  the  straight  line  be- 
tween those  selected  points,  both  of  which  may  some- 
times be  beyond  reach. 

Article  Second. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  fall 
distance  into  line  of  battle. 

Ist.   Column  at  full  distance,  ri<)ht  in  front,  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

390.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line, 
he  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the  means 
previously  indicated,  and  then  command  : 

1.    Left  into   line,  toheel.      2.    Marcu   (or  double  quick — 
March). 


School  of  the  Battalion— Part  TV.  ••      191 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company  will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them, 
and  phice  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  right  files  of  his  company,  when  they  shall  be  in 
line ;  he  will  be  assured  in  this  position  by  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel. 

392.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  company 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast  lightly  against 
the  right  arm  of  his  guide ;  the  companies  will  wheel 
to  the  left,  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  from  a  halt, 
conforming  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  school  of 
the  company.  No.  239  ;  each  captain  will  turn  to  his 
company,  to  observe  the  execution  of  the  movement, 
and,  when  the  right  of  the  company  shall  arrive  at 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command: 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt. 

303.  The  compuny  being  halter^  the  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  line  by  the  side  of  the  left  front 
rank  man  of  the  company  nest  on  the  right,  align 
himself  correctly,  and  command : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

394.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up 
between  the  captain  and  the  front  rank  man  on  its 
left,  the  captain  directing  the  alignment  on  that  man  ; 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  righ  t  company, 
who  finds  himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will  lightly 
rest  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this  guide. 

395.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company,  will 
command  Front,  and  the  colonel  will  add: 

Guides — Posts. 

396.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through  the 


192      •  School  of  the  Battalion— Vart  IV. 

nearest  captuin's  interval ;  to  permit  him  to  pa^s,  the 
captain  -vvill  momentarily  step  before  the  first  file  of 
hi8  company,  ami  the  covering  sergeant  behind  the 
same  file.  T/n'.s  rule  is  general  for  all  the  formations 
into  line  nf  battle. 

IVJl.  "When  companion  form  line  of  battle,  file  closers 
will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two  paces  from 
the  rear  rank,  which  will  sufficiently  assure  their  align- 
ment. 

308.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the  colo- 
nel, lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  as  well  as  the  adju- 
tant and  sergeant  major,  will  return  to  their  respective 
places  in  line  of  battle.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  the 
formations  info  line  of  baffle. 

oU9.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form 
itself  to  the  riyht  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

400.  At  the  command  r/tn'des  posts,  the  captains  will 
take  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  as  well  as  the  guides. 
This  rule  is  general  for  all  Jormations  into  line  of  battle 
in  which  the  companies  are  aliyned  by  the  left. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line 
of  battle  by  the  same  commands  and  means,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows  ;  if  the  right  be  in  front,  at  the 
command  half,  given  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  the  left 
guide  of  each  right  company  Avill  place  himself  on  the 
alignment  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left 
of  his  company;  the  left  guide  of  the  first  company 
■vvill  be  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel ;  the  left  guides  of  the  other  right  companies 
will  align  themselves  correctly  on  the  division  guides; 
to  this  end,  the  division  guides  (on  the  alignment) 
wnll  invert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  perpendicularly 
before  the  centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the  command  left 
into  line,  wheel.  If  the  column  by  division  be  with  the 
left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of  left  companies  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
or  the  left  guides  of  right  companies,  and  place  them- 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  IV.         193 

selves  on  the  line  opposite  to  one'  of  the  three  right 
files  of  their  respective  companies. 

402.  A  column  in  march  will  be  formed  into  line, 
without  halting,  by  the  same  commands  and  means. 
At  the  command  march,  the  guides  will  halt  in  their 
places,  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rectify 
their  positions. 

403.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  move  forward,  without  halting,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  companies  left  wheel.     2.  Mabch  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

404.  At  the  command  inarch,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  on 
a  fixed  pivot,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, the  left  guides  will  step  back  into  the  rank  of 
file  closers  before  the  wheel  is  completed,  and  when 
the  right  of  the  companies  shall  arrive  near  the  line, 
the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  centre. 

405.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  companies  will  march 
directly  to  the  front.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  color 
and  the  general  guides  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  to 
the  front.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of 
the  color;  the  captains  of  companies  and  the  men  will, 
at  once,  conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  line  of  battle,  to  be  indicated,  No.  587. 

406.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column 
left  in  front. 

By  inversion  to  the   right  (or   left^  into   line  of 

battle. 

407.  AVhen  a  column,  right  in  front,  shall  be  under 
the  necessity  of  forming  itself  into  line  faced  to  the 

17 


194        School  of  the  Battalion— V^xi  IV. 

reverse  flank,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  execute 
this  formation  by  the  shortest  movement,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line,  wheel.     2.  Battalion,  guide 

right. 

408.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  himself  in  front,  and  facing  to  the  right 
guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  ;  at  the  second  com- 
mand, he  will  rectify,  as  promptly  as  possible,  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  column  ;  the  cap- 
tain of  the  odd  company,  if  there  ])e  one,  and  the 
column  be  by  division,  will  promptly  bring  the  right 
of  his  company  on  the  direction,  and  at  company  dis- 
tance from  the  division  next  in  front ;  the  left  guide 
of  the  leading  subdivision  will  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  will  be  assured  in 
his  position  by  the  lieutenant  colonel ;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

409.  At  this,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  sub- 
division will  face  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  left  arm  of  his  guide,  and  the  battalion 
will  form  itself  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed. 

Successive  Formations. 

412.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive  forma- 
tions are  included  all  those  formations  where  the 
several  subdivisions  of  a  column  arrive  one  after  an- 
other on  the  line  of  battle;  such  are  formations  on 
the  right  or  left,  forward  and  faced  to  the  rear  into 
line  of  battle,  as  well  as  deployments  of  columns  in 
mass. 

413.  The  successive  formations  which  may  be  or- 


School  of  the  Battalion— V^xt  IV.        195 

dered  when  the  column  is  marching,  and  is  to  con- 
tinue marching,  will  be  executed  by  a  combination  of 
the  two  gaits,  qriick  and  double  quick  time. 

2d.   Column  at  full  distance,  on  the  right  (or  on  the  left), 
into  line  of  battle. 

414.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance  and 
right  in  front,  having  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  indicate  to  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  a  little  in  advance,  the  point  of  appui,  or 
rest,  for  the  right,  as  well  as  the  point  of  direction  to 
the  left;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  hasten  with  two 
markers,  and  establish  them  in  the  following  manner 
on  the  direction  indicated. 

415.  The  first  marker  will  be  placed  at  the  point  of 
appui  for  the  right  front  rank  man  of  the  leading  com- 
pany ;  the  second  will  indicate  the  point  where  one  of 
the  three  left  files  of  the  same  company  will  rest  when 
in  line;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  present  the  right 
shoulder  to  the  battalion  when  formed. 

416.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

1.   On  the  right,  into  line.     2.  Battalion,  guide  right. 

417.  At  the  second  command,  the  right  will  become 
the  directing  flank,  and  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  be 
to  that  side ;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  company 
will  march  straight  forward  until  up  with  the  turning 
point,  and  each  following  guide  will  march  in  the 
trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding. 

418.  The  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with 
the  first  marker,  its  captain  will  command:  1.  Right 
turn,  and  when  the  company  is  precisely  up  with  this 
marker,  he  will  add:  2.  March. 

419.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  turn 
to  the  right;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as 
to  bring  the  man  next  to  him   opposite  to  the  right 


196         School  of  the  Battalion— Vztt  IV. 

marker,  and  Tvlicn  at  three  paces  from  him,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

].  First  company.     2.   Halt. 

42{).  At  tlie  second  command,  the  companv  will 
lialt,  tho  files,  not  yet  in  line,  M'ill  form  promptly,  the 
left  guide  ^vill  retire  as  a  file-closer,  and  the  captaia 
■will  then  command  : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

421.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align  itself; 
the  two  men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to  tlie  two 
markers  will  each  lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the 
right  arm  of  his  marker  ;  the  captain,  passing  to  the 
right  of  the  front  rank,  will  direct  the  alignment  on 
these  two  men.  These  rules  are  general  for  all  succes- 
sive formations. 

422.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  ;  when  arrived  opposite  to  the  left 
flank  of  the  preceding  company,  it  will  turn  to  the 
right,  and  be  formed  on  the  line  of  battle,  as  has  just 
been  prescribed  ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself 
so  as  to  come  upon  that  line  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  first  comp.any. 

423.  At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line 
of  battle,  the  company  will  be  halted  by  its  captain, 
who  will  place  himself  briskly  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  him- 
self correctly  on  its  front  rank. 

424.  The  left  guide  will  at  the  same  time  place  him- 
self bef<»re  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company, 
and,  facing  to  the  right,  he  will  place  himself  accu- 
rately on  the  direction  of  the  two  markers  of  the 
preceding  company. 

425.  The  captain  will  then  command  : 

Right — Dress. 


Scliool  of  the  Battalion — Part  IV.        197 

426.  At  this  command,  the  second  company  •will 
dress  forward  on  the  line ;  the  captain  will  direct  its 
alignment  on  the  front  rank  man  who  has  rested  his 
breast  ao;ain.st  the  left  guide  of  the  company. 

427.  The  followinj^  companies  will  thus  come  suc- 
cessively to  form  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle, 
each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  one  next  to  the  right;  and  when  they 
shall  all  be  established,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

428.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  placed  before 
the  right  company  will  retire. 

420.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  will  add  the  com- 
mand :  Double  quick — March.  At  the  command 
march,  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quick 
step,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed, 
No.  417,  and  following. 

430.  The  colonel  will  follow  up  the  formation,  pass- 
ing along  the  front,  and  being  always  opposite  to  the 
company  about  to  turn  ;  it  is  thus  that  he  will  be  the 
better  able  to  see  and  to  correct  the  error  that  would 
result  Irom  a  command  given  too  soon  or  too  late  to 
the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  with  the  greatest 
care,  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides  ;  to  this  end, 
the  instant  that  the  markers  are  established  for  the 
leading  company,  he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the 
point  at  which  the  left  of  the  next  company  will  rest, 
establish  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
two  markers,  and  assure  the  guide  of  the  second  com- 
pany on  this  direction  :  this  guide  being  assured,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  farther  to  the 
rear,  in  order  to  assure,  in  like  manner,  the  guide  of 

17* 


198         School  of  the  Battalion— Vart  IV. 

the  third  company,  and  so  on,  successively,  to  the  left 
of  the  battalion.  In  assuring  the  guides  in  their  posi- 
tions on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  take  care  to  let  them 
first  place  themselves,  and  confine  himself  to  rectify- 
ing their  positiims  if  they  do  not  cover  accurately, 
and  at  the  proper  distance,  the  preceding  guides  or 
markers.  This  rule  is  yeneral  for  all  successive  for- 
mat  ions. 

41)2.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on 
the  left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

435.  When  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  forms 
a  sensible  angle  with  that  of  the  march  of  the  column, 
the  cohmel,  before  beginning  the  movement,  will  give 
the  head  of  the  column  a  new  direction  parallel  to  that 
line. 

437.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to  sup- 
port arms,  the  instant  that  the  captain,  who  follows 
him,  shall  have  commanded  front.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral J'or  all  successive  formations. 

438.  When,  in  the  execution  of  this  movement,  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  commence  tiring,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose  company  is 
the  first  in  line  of  battle  ;  this  captain  will  immedi- 
ately place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  as  soon  as  the  next  captain  shall  have  commanded 
front,  he  will  commence  the  fire  by  file,  by  the  com- 
mands proscribed,  school  of  the  company.  At  the 
command //re  hi/  file,  the  marker  at  the  outer  tile  of 
this  first  company  will  retire,  and  the  other  will  place 
himself  against  the  nearest  man  of  the  next  company. 
The  captain  of  the  latter  will  commence  firing  as  soon 
as  the  captain  of  the  third  company,  in  line,  shall 
have  commanded //"o/J^ ;  the  marker  before  the  nearest 
file  of  the  second  company,  in  line,  will  now  retire, 
and  the  guide  before  the  opposite  flank  will  place  him- 
self before  the  nearest  file  of  the  third  company,  in 
line,  and  so  on,  in  continuation,  to  the  last  company 


School  of  the  Battalion— F^rt  IV.        199 

on  the  left  or  right  of  the  battalion,  according  as  the 
formation  may  have  commenced  with  the  right  or  left 
in  front. 

3c?.   Column  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of  battle. 

440.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  fuTl  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line,  he  A\ill  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  414  and  415,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  Forward  info  line.      2.   Bi/  company,    left  half  wheel. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

441.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  add — guide  right,  put  the  company 
in  march,  halt  it  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and 
align  it  against  the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  compa- 
nies will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots  ;  and,  at  the 
instant  the  colonel  shall  judge,  according  to  the  direc- 
tion of  the  line  of  battle,  that  the  companies  have 
sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command : 

4.  Forward,     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies,  ceasing 
to  wheel,  will  march  straight  forward  ;  and  at  the 
sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 
The  right  guide  of  the  second  company,  who  is  near- 
est to  the  line  of  battle,  will  march  straight  forward  ; 
each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  imme- 
diately before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel. 

444.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of  bat- 


200         School  of  the  Battalion— V&xi  lY. 

tie  ;  and  wlien  its  right  guide  shall  be  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

445.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  jSles  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come 
into  it  promptly,  the  left  guid^  will  place  himself  on 
the  line  of  battle,  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  files  on  the  left  of  the  company  ;  and  as  soon  as 
he  is  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel, the  captain,  having  placed  himself  accurately  on 
the  line  of  battle,  will  command : 

8.  Right — Dkess. 

446.  At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second 
company  begins  to  turn  to  the  right,  the  guide  of  the 
third,  ceasing  to  follow  the  file  immediately  before 
him,  will  march  straight  forward  ;  and  when  he  shall 
arrive  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain 
will  cause  the  company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order 
to  approach  the  line  of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  and  align  it  by  the  right,  as  prescribed 
for  the  second  company. 

447.  Each  following  company  will  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  third,  as  the  preceding 
company  shall  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach 
the  line  of  battle. 

448.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

449.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  observe 
in  this  formation,  what  is  prescribed  for  them  on  the 
right  into  line. 

450.  A  column  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  forward 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means. 


School  of  the  Battalion— Vaxi  IV..       201 

451.  "When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  in  march,  shall  arrive  at  company 
distance  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the  line, 
the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Forward  into  line.     2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

453.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  command,  Guide  right,  and  caution  it 
to  march  directly  to  the  front,  the  captains  of  the 
other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the  left. 

454.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  in  the 
last  case. 

450.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column 
forward  into  line,  and  to  continue  to  march  in  this 
order,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be  established; 
the  movement  will  be  executed  m  double  quick  time,  by 
the  same  commands  and  means,  but  with  the  follow- 
ing modifications. 

457.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  add  qtiick  time,  after  the  command  guide 
right.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  company 
will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time,  and  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  its  chief  will  imme- 
diately place  himself  on  its  right,  and  to  assure  the 
march,  will  take  points  of  direction  to  the  front. 
The  captain  of  the  second  company  will  cause  his 
company  to  take  the  same  gait  as  soon  as  it  shall  arrive 
on  a  line  with  the  first,  and  will  also  move  to  the  right 
of  his  company  ;  the  captains  of  the  third  and  fourth 
companies  will  execute  successively  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  second.  The  companies  will  pre- 
serve the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  until  the  com- 
mand, guide  centre. 

458.  When  the  color  company  shall  have  entered 
the  line,  the  colonel  will  command,  guide  centre.     At 


% 


202        School  of  the  Battalion— Vd^ri  IV. 

this  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the  right  general 
guide  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of  the 
line.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  right 
companies  will  immediately  conform  themselves  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The  left 
companies  and  the  left  general  guide,  as  they  arrive 
on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  the  same  principles. 
If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  when 
the  last  company  shall  have  arrived  on  the  line,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to  be  resumed. 

Ath.  Column  at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 

battle. 

466.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
■wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  and  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos  414  and  415,  and  the  colonel  will  then 
command  : 

1.   Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  right — Face. 
8.  Mabcii  (or  double  quick — March). 

467.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  put 
it  in  march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and 
direct  its  march  towards  the  line  of  battle  which  it 
■will  pass  in  rear  of  the  left  marker  ;  the  first  file  having 
passed  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the  company  will 
•wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place  itself 
in  rear  of  the  two  markers  ;  being  in  this  position,  its 
captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by 
the  right  against  the  markers. 

468.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  other  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain  placing 
himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 


School  of  the  Battalion— PsLYt  TV.       203 

469.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  -will 
put  themselves  in  movement;  the  left  guide  of  the 
second,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  w^ill  hasten 
in  advance  to  mark  that  line;  he  will  place  himself  on 
it  as  prescribed  above  for  successive  formations,  and 
thus  indicate  to  his  captain  the  point  at  which  he 
ought  to  pass  tiic  line  of  battle,  by  three  paces,  in 
order  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct  his 
company  parallelly  to  that  line. 

470.  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall 
have  arrived  near  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  one 
already  on  the  line  of  battle,  its  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 
4.  Right — Dress. 

471.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to  reach  the 
halting  point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front,  and  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  the 
latter  will  promptly  close  to  the  right;  the  captain 
will  immediately  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  him- 
self on  its  front  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  420. 

475.  The  following  companies  will  be  conducted  and 
established  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed  for 
the  second,  each  regulating  itself  by  the  one  that  pre- 
cedes it;  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  in 
time  to  precede  their  respective  companies  on  the  line 
by  twelve  or  fifteen  paces,  and  each  place  himself  so  as 
to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  tiles  of  his  com- 
pany, when  in  line.  If  the  movement  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  the  moment  it  is  commenced,  all 


204       School  of  the  Battalion— V art  lY. 

the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  at  the  same  time 
from  the  column,  and  will  move  at  a  run,  to  establish 
themselves  on  the  line  of  battle. 

470.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Post. 

477.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel,  in  this  for- 
mation, will  each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for  him 
in  that  of  o/t  the  right,  into  line  ofhattle. 

478.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced 
to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

479.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  nearly  at  com- 
pany distance  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  hj  the  right 
flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick  March). 

481.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  caution 
their  companies  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

482.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains  of  companies,  all  the  companies  will  face 
to  the  right.  The  remaining  part  of  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  heretofore  explained. 

Article  Third. 
Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  two  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  and  at 
a  halt,  find  itself  in  part  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  the 
colonel  should  think  proper  to  form  line  of  battle 
before  all  the  companies  enter  the  new  direction,  the 
formation  will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

48G.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  arrived 


School  of  ilie  Battalion— Vart  IV,       205 

behind  the  Hue  of  battle,  and  that  five  companies  have 
entered  the  new  direction.  The  colonel  having  as- 
sured the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies  on  the 
direction,  will  command: 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.   Three  rear  companies,  forward 
into  line. 

487.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  each  of 
the  rear  companies  will  command:  By  company,  left 
half  wheel;  and  the  colonel  will  add: 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

488.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last  forward,  into  line  of 
battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  respective 
formations;  each  captain  of  the  three  rear  companies 
will,  when  his  company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled, 
command: 

1.  Forxoard.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

489.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

1.   To  the  left,  and  forward  into  line.     2.  March  [oy  double 
quick — March). 

491.  If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  forming  the  bat- 
talion into  line,  to  march  it  immediately  forward,  he 
will  command: 

1.  By  company  to  the  left,  and  forward  into  line. 
2.  March. 

492.  And  when  the  right  of  these  companies  shall 
arrive  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     6.   Guide  centre.  * 

18 


20G       ScJwol  of  the  BaUalw7i—Vart  IV. 

404.  If  the  battalion  be  marchino;  in  double  quick 
time,  the  oolonel  will  cause  quick  time  to  be  tuken 
before  ccmmencinj];  the  movement. 

40').  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column 
should  arrive  before  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Lr/l  into  line,  wheel.     2.   Three  rear  coinjjanies,  into  line^ 
faced  to  the  rear. 

400.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each  of 
the  three  rear  companies  will  command:  1.  Such  com- 
jjany ;  2.  Itiglit — Face.     The  colonel  will  then  add: 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

407.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  battle. 

408.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

1.   To  the  left,  and  into  line  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  March 
(or  duuhle  quick — Maucii.) 

Article  Fourth. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half 
distance^  into  line  of  battle. 

lit.   Column  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line 
of  battle. 

501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  itself 
to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the  means  pre- 
scribed. Article  IX.,  Part  Third,  of  this  school ;  which 
being  executed,  he  will  form  the  column  into  lino  of 
battle,  as  has  been  indicated,  No.  300,  and  following : 


Scliool  of  the  Battalion— Tart  IV.        207 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be 
in  march,  and  it  be  necessary  to  form  rapidly  into  line 
of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   By  the  rear  of  co'lumn  left   (or  right)  into  line,  wheel. 
2.  Mauch  (or  double  quick — March). 

503.  At  the  first  command,  the  ri|2;ht  general  guide 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  front,  and  place  himself  a 
little  beyond  the  point  where  the  head  of  the  column 
will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation  of  the  guides.  The 
captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  command  :  Left 
into  line,  wheel ;  the  other  captains  will  caution  their 
companies  to  continue  to  march  to  the  front. 

504.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  the  guide  of  this 
company  will  halt  short,  and  the  company  will  wheel 
to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
wheeling  from  a  halt;  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near 
the  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align 
it  by  the  left.  The  other  captains  will  place  them- 
selves briskly  on  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  when  the 
captain  of  the  seventh  sees  there  is  sufficient  distance 
between  his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form  the  latter 
into  line,  he  M'ill  command:  Left  into  line,  wheel — 
March  ;  the  left  guide  will  halt  short,  and  facing  to 
the  rear,  will  place  himself  on  the  line  ;  the  company 
will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast  against 
the  left  arm  of  the  guide  ;  the  captain  will  halt  the 
company  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  and 
will  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  companies  will 
conform  successively  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  seventh. 

505.  Each  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  of  his 
company  on  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  the  com- 
pany ne.Kt  on  his  right. 

500.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  watchful   that 


208        Sdwol  of  the  Battalion— Vaxi  lY. 

the  leading  guide  marches  accurately  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  line  of  battle,  and  direct  himself  on  the  right 
general  guide.  The  major,  placed  in  rear  of  the  left 
guide  of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as  soon  as  the  guide 
of  the  seventh  company  is  established  on  the  direction, 
hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  other  companies,  so 
as  to  assure  each  of  them  in  succession  on  the  line. 

2d.   Column  at  half  distance,  on  the  right  (or  left)  into  line- 
of  battle. 

507.  A  column  at  half  distance  "will  form  itself  on 
the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle,  as  prescribed  for 
a  column  at  full  distance. 

Zd.   Column  at  half  distance,  forward,  into  line  of  battle. 

508.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, forward  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  it  to  close  in  mass  and  then  deploy  it  on  the 
leading  company. 

4M.   Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 

battle. 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  into 
line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  a 
column  at  full  distance. 


Article  Fifth. 

Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass. 

511.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives 
behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  intended  to  deploy  it, 
the  colonel  will  indicate,  in  advance,  to  the  lieutenant- 
colonel,  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  as  well  aa 
the  point  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the  column. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  will  immediately  detach  him- 


ScJiool  of  tlie  Battalion— VslH  IY.       209 

self  with  two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  that 
line,  the  first  at  the  point  indicated,  the  second  a  little 
less  than  the  front  of  a  division  from  the  first. 

512.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon  lines 
parallel,  and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle ; 
consequently,  if  the  head  of  the  column  be  near  the 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  establish- 
ing the  direction  of  the  column  perpendicularly  to 
that  line,  if  it  be  not  already  so.  If  the  column  be  in 
march,  he  will  so  direct  it  that  it  may  arrive  exactly 
behind  the  markers,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of 
battle,  and  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line. 

513.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is 
supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the 
first  division  ;  he  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to 
go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  beyond  that 
at  which  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  de- 
ployed, and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  markers  established  before  the  first  divison. 

514.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonol  will 
command : 

1.   On  the  first  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion^ 
left — Face. 

515.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the 
three  other  divisions  will  remind  them  that  they  will 
have  to  face  to  the  left. 

51G.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  lastdivisions 
will  face  to  the  left;  the  chief  of  each  division  will 
place  himself  ]>y  the  side  of  its  left  guide,  and  the 
junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of 
the  left  company,  who  will  have  stepped  into  the  front 
rank. 

517.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel 

will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  alignment  of  the  two 

first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  right 

company,«first  division-,  and  then  place  himself  on  the 

18* 


210       School  of  the  Battalion— Vd^xi  III. 

line  of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which 
the  left  of  the  second  division  -will  rest. 
518.  The  colonel  "will  then  command: 

3.   March  (or  double  quick — March). 

510.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  go  to  its  right,  and  command : 

Right — Dress. 

520.  At  this,  the  division  vrill  dress  up  against  the 
markers  ;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior  cap- 
tain, will  each  align  the  company  on  his  left,  and  then 
command : 

Front. 

521.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  put 
themselves  in  march  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  second 
will  direct  himself  parallelly  to  tlie  line  of  battle  ;  the 
left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  march 
abreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second  ;  the  guides  of 
the  third  and  fourth,  each  preserving  the  prescribed 
distance  between  himself  and  the  guide  of  the  division 
which  preceded  his  own  in  the  column. 

522.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  follow 
its  movement;  he  will  see  it  file  by  him,  and  when 
its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Second  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

523.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  di- 
vision shall  yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to  march  ; 
the  second,  when  the  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with 
the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the  third  immediately 
after  the  second. 

524.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt; 
at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  IV.        211 

openings  between  the  files,  the  chief  of  the  division 
will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  right ; 
the  left  guides  of  both  companies  will  step  upon  the 
line  of  battle,  face  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves 
on  the  direction  of  the  markers  established  before  the 
first  division,  each  guide  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
left  files  of  his  company. 

525.  The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its  chief 
will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  on 
the  left  of  the  first  division  ;  and  when  he  shall  see 
the  guides  assured  on  the  direction,  he  will  command, 
Right — Dress.  At  this,  the  division  will  be  aligned 
by  the  right,  in  the  manner  indicated  for  the  first. 

526.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  continue  to 
march;  at  the  command  halt,  given  to  the  second,  the 
chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  place 
himself  exactly  opposite  to  the  guide  of  the  second, 
after  this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front  and 
closed  its  files ;  he  will  see  his  division  file  past,  and 
when  his  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he 
will  command: 

1.  Third  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

527.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front,  its 
chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre, 
and  command : 

1.   Third  division,  forward.      2.   Guide  right,      3.  March. 

528.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  march 
towards  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  right  guide  will  so 
direct  himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on 
the  left  of  the  second  division,  and  when  the  division 
is  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  its  chief  will 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform 
himgelf  (and  the  chief  of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth) 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 


212        Scliool  of  the  Battalion— Tart  lY. 

530.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

Guides — Posts. 

531.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  resume  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

532.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  make  the  dispositions  in- 
dicated, Nos.  512  and  513,  and  when  the  first  division 
shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  line,  he  will 
command : 

1.  On  the  first  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion  hy  the 
left  flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

533.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command, 
First  division;  the  other  chiefs  will  caution  their  divi- 
sions to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

534.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command.  Halt,  and  will  align  his  divi- 
sion by  the  right  against  the  markers ;  the  other  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to  the 
left  of  their  divisions.  The  second  division  will  con- 
form its  movements  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  522 
and  following.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will 
execute  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  526  and  following ; 
but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his  own  per- 
son at  the  command  march  given  by  the  chief  of  the 
division  which  precedes  him,  and  when  the  right  of 
his  division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he  will  command : 

Such  division,  hy  the  right  flank — March. 

536.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column 
without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the 
markers  will  not  be  posted ;   the  movement  will  be 


School  of  the  Battalion— ?diXt  lY.        213 

executed  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means 
as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following  modifica- 
tions : 

537.  At  the  first  comm»nd,*the  chief  of  the  first 
division  ■will  commsuad ;  \.  Guide  right.  2.  Quick 
time.  At  the  command,  Double  quick — March,  given 
by  the  colonel,  the  first  division  will  march  in  quick 
time  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right; 
the  captains  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  their 
respective  companies  ;  the  captain  on  the  right  of  the 
battalion  will  take  points  on  the  ground  to  assure  the 
direction  of  the  march.  The  chief  of  the  second  divi- 
sion will  allow  his  division  to  file  past  him,  and  when 
he  sees  its  right  abreast  of  him,  he  will  command : 
1.  Second  division  by  the  right  flank.  2.  March.  3. 
Guide  right;  and  when  this  division  shall  arrive  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause  it  to  march  in 
quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  de- 
ploy according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  second. 

538.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major  and 
color-bearer  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  458. 

540.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  de- 
ploying it  on  the  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy 
it  on  the  rearmost  division,  he  will  cause  the  disposi- 
tions to  be  made  indicated  No.  511  and  following;  but 
it  will  be  the  right  general  guide  whom  he  will  send 
to  place  himself  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right 
of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed. 

541.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

1.   On  the  fourth  (or  such)  division,  deploy  column. 
2.  Battalion,  right — Face. 

542.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the 
other  divisions  will  caution  them  that  they  will  have 
to  face  to  the  right. 


214        School  of  the  Battalion— Voxi  IV. 

543.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  three  divi- 
sions -will  face  to  the  rip;ht;  and  the  chief  of  each  -will 
place  hiinsclf  by  tlio  side  of  its  right  guide. 

544.  At  the  same  cq|nmand,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
"will  place  a  third  marker  between  the  first  two,  so 
that  this  marker  may  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
right  files  of  the  left  company  of  the  division  ;  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  Iben  place  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  third  division  will  rest  when  deployed. 

545.  The  colonel  w^ill  then  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

546.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will 
put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of  the  first  so  di- 
recting himself  as  to  pass  three  paces  within  the  line 
marked  by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief  of  the 
third  division  will  not  follow  its  movement ;  he  will 
see  it  file  past,  halt  it  when  its  left  guide  shall  be 
abreast  with  him,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front; 
and,  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will 
cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 

547.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees 
it  nearly  unmasked  by  the  three  others,  will  com- 
mand: 

1.   Fourth  division,  forward.     2.   Guide  left.     3.  March. 

548.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
the  instant  the  fourth  is  unmasked,  this  division  will 
approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces 
from  the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it, 
and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

549.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  for- 
ward against  the  markers ;  the  chief  of  the  division 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  lY.        215 

and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align  the  company  on 
his  right,  and  then  command : 

Front. 

550.  The  instant  that  tho  third  division  is  un- 
masked, its  chief  will  cause  it  to  approach  the  line 
of  battle,  and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  prescribed  for 
the  fourth. 

551.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide 
and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left  company  will  step 
on  the  line  of  battle,  placing  themselves  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  markers  established  in  front  of  the 
fourth  divisi.in  ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  be  assured  in 
their  positions,  the  division  will  be  aligned  as  has  just 
been  proscribed  for  the  fourth. 

552.  The  second  and  first  divsiona  which  will  have 
continued  to  march,  will,  in  succession,  be  halted  and 
aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  third  ; 
the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  526,  The  second  being 
near  the  line  of  battle,  the  command  will  not  be  given 
for  it  to  move  on  this  line  but  it  will  be  dressed  up 
to  it. 

553.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

55G.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fourth  division,  he  will 
make  the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  511  and  following  ; 
and  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive  within 
three  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  command: 

1.    On  the.  fourth  division,  deploy  coluvin.     2.  Battalion,  by 
the  right  flank.     3.   Marcu  (or  double  quick — March). 

5G3.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by  the  means 


21 C  School  of  the  Battalion— Vart  V. 

above  indicated,  and  the  general  guides  -will  move 
l>riskh'  on  the  line,  as  prescribed,  Nos.  513  and  540. 
This  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion,  outwards 
— Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

5G4.  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle, 
])elong  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one,  will  face  to 
the  right;  the  others,  except  the  directing  division, 
will  face  to  the  left. 

505.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  itself 
unmasked,  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  taking  the 
guide  left  or  right,  according  as  the  right  or  left  of 
the  column  may  be  in  front.  The  chief  of  this  divi- 
sion will  align  it  by  the  directing  flank,  and  then  step 
back  into  the  rear,  in  order  momentarily  to  give 
place  to  the  chief  of  the  next  for  aligning  the  next 
division. 

507.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion,  by  the 
right  and  left  flanks.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

PART  FIFTH.  ^ 

Article  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

587.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and  sup- 
posed to  be  the  directing  one,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  march  in  line  of  battle,  he  will  give  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place 
himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color-tile,  and 
face  to  the  front. 


Scliool  of  the  Battalion— VdiYi  V.         217 

588.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  alike 
distance  in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face  to  the  colo- 
nel, who  will  establish  him  as  correctly  as  possible,  by 
signal  of  the  sword,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of 
battle  opposite  to  the  color-bearer.  The  colonel  will 
next,  above  the  heads  of  the  lieutenant  colonel  and 
color-bearer,  take  a  point  of  direction  in  the  field  be- 
yond, if  a  distinct  one  present  itself,  exactly  in  the 
prolongation  of  those  first  two  points. 

589.  The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  far- 
ther to  the  rear,  and  establish  two  markers  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  straight  line  passing  through  the 
color-bearer  and  the  lieutenant  colonel ;  these  markers 
will  face  to  the  rear,  the  first  placed  about  twenty-five 
paces  behind  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  and  the 
second  at  the  same  distance  from  the  first. 

590.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take,  the 
moment  the  lieutenant  colonel  shall  be  established  on 
the  perpendicular,  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the 
straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pass 
between  the  heels  of  that  ofiicer ;  the  first  of  these 
points  will  be  taken  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from 
the  color-bearer. 

591.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Battalion,  forward. 

592.  At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will 
advance  six  paces  to  the  front ;  the  corporals  in  the 
rear  rank  will  place  themselves  in  the  front  rank,  and 
these  will  be  replaced  by  those  in  the  rank  of  file- 
closers  :  at  the  same  time  the  two  general  guides  will 
move  in  advance,  abreast  with  the  color-bearer,  the 
one  on  the  right,  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  right 
company,  the  other  opposite  to  the  sergeant  who  closes 
the  left  of  the  battalion. 

593.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  passing 
before  the  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  their  respective 

19 


218         School  of  the  Battalion— V&rt  V. 

companies ;  the  serceant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion 
■will  stop  back  into  the  rear  rank.  The  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  the  color- 
company,  Avill  step  into  the  front  rank. 

594,  The  lieutenant  colonel  having  assured  the 
color-bearer  on  the  line  between  himself  and  the  cor- 
poral of  the  color-tile,  now  in  the  front  rank,  will 
go  to  the  position  which  will  be  indicated,  No.  G02. 

505,  The  major  will  place  himself  six  or  eight  paces 
on  either  flank  of  the  color-rank. 

596.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

597.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step  off 
with  life  ;  the  color-bearer,  charged  with  the  step  and 
direction,  will  scrupulously  observe  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  pace,  marching  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  two  points  previously  taken,  and  successively 
taking  others  in  advance  by  the  means  indicated  in 
the  school  of  the  company  ;  the  corporal  on  his  right, 
and  the  one  on  his  left,  will  march  in  the  same 
B*:ep,  taking  care  not  to  turn  the  head  or  shoulders, 
the  color-bearer  supporting  the  color-lance  against 
the  hip. 

598.  The  two  general  guides  will  march  in  the 
same  step  with  the  color-rank,  each  maintaining  him- 
self abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank,  and  neither 
occupying  himself  wMth  the  movement  of  the  other. 

599.  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  now 
in  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion,  will  march  well 
aligned,  elbow  to  elbow,  heads  direct  to  the  front, 
and  without  deranging  the  line  of  their  shoulders; 
the  centre  one  will  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
the  color-bearer,  and  maintain  the  same  step,  without 
lengthening  or  shortening  it,  except  on  an  intimation 
from  the  colonel  or  lieutenant  col'.nel,  although  he 
should  find  himself  more  or  less  than  six  paces  from 
the  color-rank. 


School  of  the  Battalion— VdiVi  V.        219 

600.  The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank  be- 
tween the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the  left,  will 
march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  on  the  same  line,  with  the 
three  corporals  in  the  centre,  his  head  well  to  the 
front. 

GOl.  The  captains  of  the  color-company,  and  the 
company  next  to  the  left,  will  constitute,  with  the 
three  corporals  in  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  the 
basis  of  alignment  for  both  wings  of  the  battalion  ; 
they  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color- 
bearer,  and  exert  themselves  to  maintain  their  shoul- 
ders exactly  in  the  square  with  the  direction.  To  this 
end,  they  will  keep  their  heads  direct  to  the  front, 
only  occasionally  casting  an  eye  on  the  three  centre 
corporals,  with  the  slightest  possible  turn  of  the 
neck,  and  if  they  perceive  themselves  in  advance,  or 
in  rear  of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or  two  cap- 
tains, will  almost  insensibly  shorten  or  lengthen  the 
step,  so  as,  a^  the  end  of  several  paces,  to  regain  the 
true  alignment,  without  giving  sudden  checks  or  im- 
pulsions to  the  wings  beyond  them  respectively. 

602.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  twelve  or  fifteen 
paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the  color-com- 
pany, will  maintain  this  captain  and  the  next  one 
beyond,  abreast  with  the  three  centre  corporals  ;  to  this 
end,  he  will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to  shorten 
the  step  as  may  be  necessary,  which  the  captain,  or 
two  captains,  will  execute  as  has  just  been  explained. 

603.  All  the  other  captains  will  maintain  them- 
selves on  the  prolongation  of  this  basis  ;  and,  to  this 
end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  towards  the  centre, 
taking  care  to  turn  the  neek  but  slightly,  and  not  to 
derange  the  direction  of  their  shoulders. 

604.  The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of  their 
companies,  and  prevent  the  men  from  getting  in  ad- 
vance of  the  line  of  captains  ;  they  will  not  lengthen 
or  shorten  step  except  when  evidently  necessary; 
because  to  correct,  with  too  scrupulous  attention,  small 


220         School  of  the  Battalion— Vari  V. 

faults,  is  apt  to  cause  the  production  of  greater — loss 
of  calmness,  silence  and  equality  of  step,  each  of 
which  it  is  go  important  to  maintain. 

G05.  The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads  well 
directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  flank,  give 
the  greatest  attention  to  the  squareness  of  the  shoul- 
ders, and  hold  themselves  always  very  slightly  behind 
the  line  of  the  captains,  in  order  never  to  shutout 
from  the  view  of  the  latter  the  basis  of  alignment ; 
they  will,  from  time  to  time,  cast  an  eye  on  the  color- 
rank,  or  on  the  general  guide  of  the  wing,  in  order  to 
march  constantly  in  the  same  step  with  those  advanced 
persons. 

606.  Pending  the  march,  the  line  determined  by  the 
two  markers  [h  and  d)  will  be  prolonged  by  placing, 
in  proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third  marker 
(/)  in  the  rear  of  the  first  (/().  then  the  marker  [d) 
will  quit  his  place  and  go  a  like  distance  in  rear  of 
{i)  ;  the  marker  [h)  will,  in  his  turn,  do  the  like  in 
respect  to  [d),  and  so  on,  in  succession,  as  long  as  the 
battalion  continues  to  advance  ;  each  marker,  on  shift- 
ing position,  taking  care  to  face  to  the  rear,  and  to 
cover  accurately  the  twp  markers  already  established 
on  the  direction.  A  staff  officer,  or  the  quartermaster 
sergeant,  designated  for  the  purpose,  and  who  will 
hold  himself  constantly  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  facing 
the  marker  farthest  from  the  battalion,  will  caution 
each  marker  when  to  shift  place,  and  assure  him  on 
the  direction  behind  the  other  two. 

Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  hattalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  to.  align  it. 

635.  The  battalion,  marching  In  the  line  of  battle, 


School  of  tlie  Battalion— TaH  V.         221 

when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

636.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
halt ;  the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides  will  re- 
main in  front ;  but  if  the  colonel  should  not  wish  im- 
mediately to  resume  the  advance  in  line,  nor  to  give 
a  general  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Color  and  general  guides — Posts. 

637.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their 
companies.  ^ 

638.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary 
to  rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  command : 

Captains,  rectify  the  alignment. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye  to- 
wards the  centre,  align  themselves  accurately  on  the 
basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  see  well  directed,  and  then  promptly  dress  their 
respective  companies.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will 
admonish  such  captains  as  may  not  be  accurately  on 
the  alignment  by  the  command:  Captain  q/' (such) 
company,  or  captains  of  (such)  companies^  move  up  or 
fall  back. 

640.  But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  the 
battalion  a  general  alignment,  either  parallel  or 
oblique,  instead  of  rectifying  it  as  above,  he  will 
move  some  paces  outside  of  one  of  the  general  guides 
(the  right  will  here  be  supposed)  and  caution  the  right 
general  guide  and  the  color-bearer  to  face  him,  and 
then  establish  them,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the 
direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  batta- 

19* 


222         School  of  the  Battalion— Part  V. 

lion.  As  soon  as  they  shall  be  correctly  established, 
the  left  f^eneral  guide  will  place  himself  on  their  direc- 
tion, and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  major.  The 
color-bearer  will  carry  the  color-lance  perpendicularly 
between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of  his  rank 
will  return  to  their  places  in  the  front  rank  the  mo- 
ment he  shall  face  to  the  colonel. 

G41.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Guides — On  the  line. 

642.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each  com- 
pany in  the  right  wing,  and  the  left  guide  of  each 
company  in  the  left,  will  each  place  himself  on -the 
direction  of  the  color-bearer  and  the  two  general 
guides,  face  to  the  color-bearer,  place  himself  in  rear 
of  the  guide  who  is  next  before  him  at  a  distance  equal 
to  the  front  of  his  company,  and  align  himself  upon 
the  color-bearer  and  the  general  guide  beyond. 

643.  The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  shift  to  the 
left  of  their  companies,  except  the  captain  of  the 
color  company,  who  will  remain  on  its  right,  but  step 
into  the  rear  rank  ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will 
shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies. 

644.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rectify,  if 
necessary,  the  positions  of  the  guides  of  the  right 
wing,  and  the  major  those  of  the  other;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command: 

2.  On  the  centre — Deess. 

645.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move  up 
in  quick  time  against  the  guides,  where,  having  ar- 
rived, each  captain  will  align  his  company  according 
to  prescribed  principles,  the  lieutenant  colonel  align- 
ing the  color  company. 

646.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will 


School  of  the  Battalion—FsiTt  V.         223 

take  care  to  conform  their  companies  to  it  in  conduct- 
ing them  towards  the  line. 

647.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

3.  Color  and  guides — Posts. 

648.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer,  the  general 
and  company  guides,  and  the  captains  in  the  right 
wing,  will  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle,  and 
the  color-bearer  will  replace  the  heel  of  the  color-lance 
against  the  right  hip. 


Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat^  in  line  of  battle. 

664.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish  of 
the  colonel  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will 
command: 

1.  Face  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion^  about — Face. 

665.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  the  color-rank,  and  the  general  guides,  if  in 
advance,  will  take  their  places  in  line  ;  the  color-bearer 
will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the  corporal 
of  his  file  will  step  behind  the  corporal  next  on  his 
own  right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  then  step 
into  the  front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re-form  the  color-file; 
the  colonel  will  place  himself  behind  the  front  rank, 
become  the  rear;  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will 
place  themselves  before  the  rear  rank,  now  leading. 

666.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  behind 
the  color-file,  in  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant  colonel 
on  the  perpendicular,  who  will  place  himself  at  a  like 


224         School  of  the  Battalion— V&xi  Y. 

distance  in  front,  as  prescribed  for  the  advance  in  line 
of  battle. 

6G7.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with  the 
direction,  the  colonel  will  establish  markers  in  the 
manner  indicated,  No.  589,  except  that  they  will  face 
to  the  battalion,  and  that  the  first  will  be  placed 
twenty-five  paces  from  the  lieutenant  colonel.  If  the 
markers  be  already  established,  the  officer  charged 
with  replacing  them  in  succession  will  cause  them  to 
face  about,  the  moment  that  the  battalion  executes 
this  movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to  the 
battalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two  others. 

6C8.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

3.  Battalion,  forward. 

669.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  advance 
six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers,  accompanied 
by  the  two  corporals  of  his  guard  of  that  rank,  the 
centre  corporal  stepping  back  to  let  the  color-bearer 
pass;  the  two  file  closers  nearest  this  centre  corporal 
will  unite  on  him  behind  the  color-guard  to  serve  as  a 
basis  of  alignment  for  the  line  of  file  closers;  the  two 
general  guides  will  place  themselves  abreast  with  the 
color  rank,  the  covering  sergeants  will  place  them- 
selves in  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  the  captains  in 
the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the  captains  in  the  left 
wing,  now  right,  will,  if  not  already  there,  shift  to  the 
left  of  their  companies,  now  become  the  right. 

670.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

671.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the 
same  principles  which  govern  the  advance  in  line;  the 
centre  corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will  march 
exactly  in  his  trace. 


Sclwol  of  the  Battalion— VsiTt  V.         225 


Article  Sixth. 

To  halt  the  battalion  marching  in  retreat^  and  to 
face  it  to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel  havin<5  halted  the  battaHon,  and 
"wishing  to  face  it  to  the  front,  will  command: 

1.  Face  to  the  front.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

677.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  gene- 
ral guides,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all 
retake  their  habitual  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front  rank. 

678.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle  by  the 
front  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in 
retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.  Battalion,  right  about.     2.  March.  « 

679.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  the  rear 
rank.  The  principles  prescribed  Nos.  669  and  follow- 
ing will  be  carefully  observed. 

680.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion  to 
march  again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  same 
commands. 


Article  Eighth. 

Passage  of  ohstacles,  advancing  and  retreating, 

682.  The  battalion  advancing  in  line  will  be  sup- 
posed to  encounter  an  obstacle  w^hich  covers  one  or 
more  companies;  the  colonel  will  cause  them  to  ploy 
into  column  at  full  distance,  in  rear  of  the  next  com- 
pany towards  the  color,  which  will  be  executed  in  the 


226         School  of  the  Battalion— Vari  Y. 

following  manner.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  ob- 
stacle only  covers  the  third  company,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

Third  company,  obstacle. 

683.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany will  place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it,  and 
command:  1.  Third  company,  by  the  left  flank,  to  the 
rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick.  3.  March.  He 
will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

G84.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  left  in  marching;  the  two  left  files  will  promptly 
disengage  to  the  rear  in  double  quick  time;  the  left 
guide,  placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank, 
will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  company,  directing 
himself  parallelly  wnth  this  company;  the  captain  of 
the  third  will  himself  halt  opposite  to  the  captain  of 
the  fourth,  and  see  his  company  file  past;  when  its 
right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him,  he  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Third  company.  2.  By  the  right  Jiank.  3. 
March.  4.  Guide  right,  and  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  moment 
it  shall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  captain  will 
command: 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

086.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that 
behind  which  it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance, 
its  right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
captain  of  that  company. 

687.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced 
to  the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place  him- 
self on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and 
maintain  between  himself  and  the  right  of  the  fourth 
the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into  line  of  the 
third. 


School  of  the  Battalion— Vfxri  Y.         227 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Third  company,  forward^  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  his 
company,  will  add : 

1.  By  company,  right  half  wheel.     2.  Double  quick. 
3.  March. 

690.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take 
the  double  quick  step,  and  execute  a  half  wheel;  its 
captain  will  then  command,  1.  Forward.  2.  March. 
3.  Guide  left.  The  second  command  will  be  given 
when  the  company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled. 

691.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
direct  itself  straight  forwards  towards  the  line  of  battle, 
and  retake  its  position  in  it  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  the  formation  forward  into  line  of 
battle. 

692.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  covers 
several  contiguous  companies  (the  three  companies  on 
the  right  for  example),  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   Three  right  companies,  obstacle.     2.  By  the  left  flank^  to 
the  rear,  into  column.     3.  Double  quick — March. 

693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  de- 
signated companies  will  each  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  as  to  the  move- 
ment about  to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  w.arch,  the  designated  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  immedi- 
ately take  the  double  quick  step ;  each  captain  will 
cause  the  head  of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  to 
the  rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed.  No. 
684  and  following ;  the  captains  of  the  other  compa^ 


228        ScJiool  of  the  Battalion— Vart  V. 

nies  will  conduct  them  by  the  flank  in  rear  of  the  third, 
inclinin;;  towards  the  head  of  the  column  ;  and,  aa 
the  head  of  each  company  arrives  opposite  to  the  right 
of  the  one  next  before  it  in  column,  its  captain  will 
liimself  halt,  see  his  company  file  past,  and  conform 
himself  for  facing  it  to  the  front,  in  marching,  to  what 
is  prescribed  No.  G84  and  following. 

095.  When  the  last  company  in  column  shall  have 
passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Three  right  companies,  forward,  into  line. 

C96.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these 
three  companies  will  command  :  Bi/  company,  right 
half  wheel.     The  colonel  will  then  add : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

697.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of  the 
three  companies,  each  company  will  conform  itself  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  690  and  following. 

098.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  that 
the  companies  belonged  to  the  right  wing ;  if  they 
make  part  of  the  other,  they  will  execute  the  passage 
of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means. 

699.  When  flank  companies  are  broken  off  to  pass 
an  obstacle,  the  general  guide  on  that  flank  will  place 
himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  outer  file  of  the  nearest 
company  to  him  remaining  in  line. 

700.  In  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been  sup- 
posed that  the  battalion  was  marching  in  quick  time, 
but  if  it  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  several  contiguous  compa- 
nies to  break  to  the  rear,  he  will  first  order  the  bat- 
talion to  march  in  quick  time ;  the  companies  will 
break  as  indicated  No.  692. 

706.  When  the  color-company  shall  be  obliged  to 
execute   the  movement  of  passing  an   obstacle,  the 


School  of  the  Battalion— Tart  V.        229 

color-rank  will  return  into  line  at  the  moment  the  com- 
pany shall  face  to  the  left  or  right ;  the  major  will 
place  himself  six  paces  before  the  extremity  of  the 
company  behind  which  the  color-company  marches  in 
column,  in  order  to  give  the  step  and  the  direction; 
he,  himself,  first  taking  the  step  from  the  battalion. 


Article  Ninth. 

To  pass  a  dejihy  in  retreat,  hy  the  right  or  left 
flank. 

709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  en- 
counter a  defile  which  it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of 
the  left  flank,  and  that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give 
passage  to  a  column  by  platoon  ;  the  colonel  will  place 
a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers  .at  the  point  around  which  the  subdivisions  will 
have  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile ; 
he  will  then  command: 

To  the  rear,  by  the  right  flank,  pass  the  defile. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  immedi* 
ately  command  : 

1.  First  company,  right — Face.      2.  March  (or  double- 
quick — March.) 

712.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will! 
commence  the  movement ;  the  first  file  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it  shall  have  passed  four 
paces  beyond  the  file  closers,  when  it  will  wheel  again  i 
to  the  right,  and  then  direct  itself  straight  forward' 
towards  the  left  flank.     All  the  other  files  of  this  cora- 

20 


230         Scliool  of  the  Battalion— Vart  V. 

pany  will  come  to  wheel  in  succession  at  the  same  place 
where  the  first  had  wheeled. 

713.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  turn, 
the  same  movement,  by  the  commands  of  its  captain, 
who  M'ill  f;ive  the  command  March,  so  that  the  first 
file  of  his  company  may  immediately  folh^w  the  last 
of  the  first,  without  constraint,  however,  as  to  taking 
the  step  of  the  first ;  the  first  file  of  the  second  com- 
pany will  wheel  to  the  right,  on  its  ground  ;  all  the 
other  files  of  this  company  will  come  in  succession  to 
wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following  companies 
will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  second. 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall 
be  on  the  same  direction  with  the  first,  the  captain  of 
the  first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by  platoon,  into  line,  and 
the  moment  that  it  is  in  column,  the  guide  of  the  first 
platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the  marker  around  whom 
he  has  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile. 

715.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  by 
the  flank,  directing  itself  parallelly  with  the  line  of 
battle  ;  and  it,  in  its  turn,  will  form  by  platoon  into 
line,  when  the  third  company  shall  be  wholly  on  the 
earae  direction  with  itself. 

71C.  The  following  companies  will  successively  exe- 
cute what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

717.  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company  having 
arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the  entrance 
of  the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  and  the  following 
platoons  will  all  execute  this  movement  at  the  same 
point.  As  the  last  companies  will  not  be  able  to  form 
platoons  before  reaching  the  defile,  they  will  so  direct 
themselves,  in  entering  it,  as  to  leave  room  to  the  left 
for  this  movement. 

718.  The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  defile  by  pla- 
toon ;  and,  as  the  two  platoons  of  each  company  shall 
clear  it,  companies  will  be  successively  formed. 

719.  The  head  of  the  column  having  cleared   the 


Scfiool  of  the  Battalion— Vavt  V.        231 

defile,  and  having  reached  the  distance  at  which  the 
colonel  wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to  the  defile,  ho 
may  cause  the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left,  to 
prolong  the  column  in  that  direction,  and  then  form  it 
to  the  left  into  line  of  battle ;  or  he  may  halt  the 
column,  and  form  it  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the 
rear. 

720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank, 
it  will  be  passed  by  the  left ;  the  movement  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

721.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front 
of  a  platoon,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank. 


Article  Tenth, 
To  march  hy  the  JianJc. 

722.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalion  to  march  by 
the  flank,  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Right   (or  left) — Face.     8,  Forward. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

723.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and  cov- 
ering sergeants  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed, 
No8.  136  and  141,  school  of  the  company. 

724.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will 
place  himself  to  the  left  and  by  the  side  of  the  last  file 
of  his  company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

725.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  left  flank, 
the  captains,  at  the  second  command,  will  shift  rapidly 
to  the  left  of  their  companies,  and  each  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  company 
preceding  his  own,  except  the  captain  of  the  left  com- 
pany, who  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  ser- 


232        ScJiool  of  the  Battalioji —VuTt  V. 

geant  on  th*  left  of  the  battalion.  The  coverinp; 
sergeant  (»f  the  right  company  will  place  himself  by 
the  right  siile  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  rearmost  file 
of  hia  company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

720.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  step 
off  with  life;  the  sergeant,  placed  before  the  leading 
file  (right  or  left  in  front),  wmU  be  careful  to  preserve 
exactlv  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  to  di- 
rect himself  straight  forward  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  take 
points  on  the  ground. 

727.  "Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or 
left  flank,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  the  leading  file,  and  the  major  abreast 
with  the  color-file,  both  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank, 
and  about  six  paces  from  it. 

728.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  front  rank,  will  march  in  the  same 
step  with  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and  the  sergeant 
major,  placed  between  the  major  and  the  color-bearer, 
will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  adjutant. 

729.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully  see 
that  the  files  neither  open  out,  nor  close  too  much, 
and  that  they  regain  insensibly  their  distances,  if 
lost. 

730.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel 
by  file,  will  command: 

1.  B>/  file  right  (or  left).  .  2.  March. 

731.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all  at 
the  place  where  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conforming  to 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

733.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  140. 


School  of  the  Battalion— Fart  V.         233 

734.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flanlc,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line, 
either  to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the  movements  will 
be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 


Article  Eleventh. 

To  fortn  the  hattalion  on  the  right  or  left^  hy  jile^ 
into  line  of  battle. 

735.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right  by 
file,  he  will  determine  the  line  of  battle,  and  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  place  two  markers  on  that  line, 
in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed.  No.  415. 

736.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up  with 
the  first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   On  the  right y  by  file,  into  line.     2.   March  (or  double 
quick — March.) 

737.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company 
will  form  itself  on  the  right,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle, 
as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  149 : 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  first  marker ;  the 
other  companies  will  follow  the  movement  of  the  lead- 
ing company;  each  captain  will  place  himself  on  the 
line  at  the  same  time  with  the  front  rank  man  of  his 
first  file,  and  on  the  right  of  this  man. 

738.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the 
leading  one,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
markers,  and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  his  company, 
at  the  instant  that  the  front  rank  man  of  this  file 
arrives  on  the  line. 


234         JSchool  of  the  Battalion— Part  V. 

739.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  'will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive 
formation  of  the  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of 
the  line  of  battle. 

741.  The  lieutenant  colonel  vs'ill,  in  succession,  as- 
sure the  direction  of  the  guides,  and  see  that  the  men 
of  the  front  rank,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  line, 
do  not  pass  it. 


Article   T^velfth. 

Changes  of  front. 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  forward. 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  sup- 
posed to  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a  change 
of  front  forward  on  the  right  company,  and  that  the 
angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions  be  a  right 
angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  less  than  one ;  he  will 
cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new  direc- 
tion, before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  that  com- 
pany, and  order  its  captain  to  establish  it  against  the 
markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  imme- 
diately direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot ;  and  after  having  halted  it, 
he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company.  2.  By  com- 
pany, right  half  wheel.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
MARcnj. 


School  of  the  Battalion— Psiri  V.         235 

74G.  At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guide  of  each  will 
place  himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to 
pass;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the  com- 
panies have  sufi&ciently  wheeled,  he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

748.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing 
to  wheel  will  march  straight  furward ;  at  the  sixth, 
the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 

749.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  will 
march  straight  forward  until  this  company  shall  drrive 
at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to  the  right ;  each 
succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately 
before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  this  file  until  this  company  shall 
turn  to  the  right  to  move  upon  the  line ;  this  guide 
will  then  march  straight  forward. 

750.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself 
so  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle,  and 
when  he  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  the 
captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

751.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come 
into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on 
the  line  of  battle,  and  as  soon  as  he  is  assured  in  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  captain  will 
align  the  company  by  the  right. 

752.  Each  following  company  will  conform  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 


236         School  of  the  Battalion— VsiTi  Y, 

753.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  "will  com- 
mand: 

Guides — Posts. 

754.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  change  front  forward  on  the  first  com- 
pany, and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new 
positions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position 
to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  will  command: 

1.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company.  2.  By  com- 
pany, right  half  wheel.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

755.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  move 
rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies: the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  command: 
1.  Right  iurn ;  2.  Quick  time;  the  captains  of  the 
other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the 
right. 

756.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will 
turn  to  the  right,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402  ;  its  captain  will 
halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and  the  files 
in  rear  will  promptly  come  into  line.  The  captain 
will  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

757.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guides  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  left  of  their  respective  companies,  and 
when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled  suffi- 
ciently, he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

759.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change 
front  forward  on  the  eighth  company,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


School  of  the  Battalion— Poit  V.         237 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear. 

760.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  change  front  to  the 
rear  on  the  right  company,  will  impart  his  purpose  to 
the  captain  of  this  company.  The  latter  will  imme- 
diately face  his  company  about,  wheel  it  to  the  left  on 
the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  shall  be  in  the  di- 
rection indicated  to  him  by  the  colonel ;  the  captain 
will  then  face  his  company  to  the  front,  and  align  it 
by  the  right  against  the  two  markers,  whom  the  colonel 
will  cause  to  be  established  before  the  right  and  left 
files. 

761.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear,  on  first  company.  2.  Batta- 
lion, about — Face.  3.  By  company,  left  half  wheel. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

762.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  right,  will  face  about. 

763.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companies 
have  faced  about,  will  each  place  himself  behind  the 
centre  of  his  company,  two  paces  from  the  front  rank, 
now  the  rear. 

764.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to 
the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  the  rear  rank  ;  the  left 
guide  of  each  will,  as  soon  as  he  is  able  to  pass,  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  qf  his  company, 
now  become  the  right ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall 
judge  that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he 
will  command: 

5.  Forward.     6.  March.     7.   Guide  left. 

765.  At  the  sixth  command,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel,  march  straight  forward  towards  the 
n«w  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  seventh,  take  the  touch 
of  the  elbow  towards  the  left. 

767.  The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having 


238        Scliool  of  the  Battalion— ?d.vi  Y. 

arrived  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to  the 
left ;  the  o;uide  will  so  direot  himself  as  to  arrive  par- 
allelly  with  the  line  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and 
"when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three 
paces  beyond  it,  the  captain  will  command  :  1.  Second 
company;  2.  Halt. 

768.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ; 
the  files  which  may  not  yet  be  in  line  with  the  guide, 
will  promptly  come  into  it ;  the  captain  will  cause  the 
company  to  face  about,  and  then  alio;n  it  by  the  right. 

769.  AH  the  other  companies  will  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  as  it  succes- 
sively arrives  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  company  that 
precedes  it  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

770.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

771.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  change  of  front  on  the 
left  company  of  the  battalion  to  the  rear,  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Thirteenth. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the 

centre. 

776.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the  corre- 
sponding companies  of  the  right  and  left  wings  into 
column  at  company  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  in  rear 
of  the  two  centre  companies,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed,  Article  Third,  Part  Second,  of  this 
School. 

777.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  donble  ccdumn 
at  company  distance,  (the  battalion  being  in  line  of 
battle,)  will  command: 

1.  Douhle  column,  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion,  inwards — 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


Sclwol  of  the  Battalion— Vart  V.        239 

778.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  their  respective  com- 
panies ;  the  captains  of  the  two  centre  companies  will 
caution  them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  captains  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  left  and  right, 
respectively.  The  covering  sergeants  will  step  into 
the  front  rank. 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  stand  fast ;  the  others  of  the  right  wing 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left  wing 
will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain  whose  company- 
has  fiiced,  will  hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  files 
at  the  head  of  his  company;  the  left  guide  of  each 
right  company,  and  the  right  guide  of  each  left  com- 
pany, will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of  its  front 
rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

780.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies,  which  are  to  form  the  first  division,  will 
stand  fast;  the  senior  captain  of  the  two  will  place 
himself  before  thecentre  of  the  division,  and  command: 
Guide  rig/it;  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in 
the  interval  between  the  two  companies,  and  the  left 
guide  of  the  left  company  will  place  himself  in  the 
front  rank  on  the  left  of  the  division,  as  soon  as  he 
shall  be  al)le  to  pass. 

781.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their 
captains,  will  step  off  with  life  to  arrange  themselves 
in  column  at  company  distance,  each  company  behind 
the  preceding  one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so 
that,  in  the  right  wing,  the  third  may  be  next  behind 
the  fourth,  the  second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to 
the  right  company;  and  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth 
may  be  next  behind  the  fifth,  the  seventh  next  to  the 
sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left  company  of  the  battalion. 

782.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings 
will  unite  into  divisions  in  arranging  themselves  in 
column  ;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at  the  centre  of 
the  column,  the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will 


240        School  of  the  Battalion— ?tixt  V. 

pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  each  captain  will 
command:   1.   Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

783.  At  the  .second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will  halt;  at 
the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  senior  captain 
in  each  division  will  place  himself  on  its  right,  and 
command,  lii'jht — Dress,  and  the  junior  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  compa- 
nies. The  division  being  aligned,  its  chief  will  com- 
mand Front,  and  take  his  position  two  paces  before 
its  centre. 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions 
will  take  the  respective  denominations  of  Jirst,  .second, 
third,  (&c.,  according  to  position  in  the  column,  begin- 
ing  at  the  front. 

785.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  who,  at  the  second  com- 
mand given  by  the  colonel,  will  have  placed  himself 
at  a  little  more  than  comppany  distance  in  rear  of  the 
right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  right 
guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  by 
placing  himself  in  their  rear. 

786.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the 
double  column  at  company  distance  without  halting 
the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Double  column  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion  by  the 
right  and  left  flanks.  3.  March  {or  double  quick — 
March). 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company ;  the 
captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their  com- 
panies to  march  straight  forward ;  the  other  captains 
will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  right  and 
left. 

789.  At  the  command  marchy  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward ; 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  Y.        241 

the  senior  captain  -will  place  himself  before  the  centre 
of  his  division  and  command:  Guideright;  the  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the 
two  companies.  The  left  guide  of  the  fifth  company 
will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
division.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  ri^ht.  The  color  and  general  guides  will  retake 
their  places.  The  three  right  companies  Avill  face  to 
the  left,  and  the  three  left  companies  will  'face  to  the 
right.  Each  captain  will  break  to  the  rear  two  files  at 
the  head  of  his  company^  the  left  guides  of  the  right 
companies,  and  the  right  guides  of  the  left  companies, 
will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  ofthe  front  rank  of 
his  company,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the 
column  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first 
division.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will,  in  like 
manner,  place  itself  behind  the  company  of  the  wing  to 
which  it  belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain  as  much 
ground  as  possible  towards  the  head  of  the  colnmn. 

791.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing 
will  unite  into  divisions  on  taking  their  positions  in 
column,  and  each  captain,  the  instant  the  head  of  his 
company  arrives  at  the  centre  of  the  column,  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Such  compamj,  hij  the  right  {ov  left)  flank. 
2.  March.  The  senior  captain  of  the  two  companies 
will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division, 
and  command:  Guide  right;  the  junior  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  compa- 
nies. The  two  companies  thus  formed  into  a  division 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  and  when 
each  division  has  gained  its  proper  distance,  its  chief 
will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

793.  The  double  column,   closed  in  mass,  will  be 
formed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  "the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  indication,  closed  in 
mass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance. 
21 


242         School  of  the  Battalion— Vd^ri  Y. 


Deployment  of  the  double  column^  faced  to  the 
front. 

796.  The  colonel,  -wishing  to  deploy  the  double 
column,  will  place  a  marker  respectively  before  the 
right  and  left  files  of  the  first  division,  and  a  third 
before  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  same  division  ; 
■which  being  done  he  will  cause  the  two  general  guides 
t«  spring  out  on  the  alignment  of  the  markers  a  little 
beyond  the  points  at  which  the  respective  flanks  of 
the  battalion  ought  to  rest ;  he  will  then  command  : 

\.  Deploy  column.  1.  Battalion  outwards — Face.  S.March 
(or  double  quick — March).  * 

797.  The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  com- 
panies at  its  head,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  deployment  of  columns  in  mass.  The 
captains  of  these  companies  will  each,  at  the  command 
march,  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  own  company, 
and  align  it  by  the  right  ;  the  captain  of  the  fourth 
will  then  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  at  the 
moment  the  captain  of  the  third  shall  come  to  its  left 
to  align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

800.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in 
march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  cause  three  markers  to  be 
posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the  head  of 
the  column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers,  he  will 
command: 

1.    Deploy  column.      2.    Battalion,   by  the  right  and  left 
flanks.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


School  of  the  Battalion— Vari  Y.         243 

801.  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  leading 
companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  deployment  of  a  close  column,  No.  533  and  fol- 
lowing; at  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
divisions  will  halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth 
and  fifth  companies  will  align  their  companies  by  the 
right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  deploy  the  column  and  to  c(;ntinue  to 
march  in  the  order  of  battle,  he  will  not  cause  markers 
to  be  established  at  the  head  of  the  column.  At  the 
first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  com- 
mand, Quick  time.  At  the  command  march,  the  first 
division  will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time  ;  the 
colonel  will  command,  Guide  centre.  The  captains  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the  men, 
will  immediately  conform  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  line  of  battle.  The  companies  will  takd  the 
quick  step  by  the  command  of  their  captains,  as  they 
successively  arrive  in  line.  The  movement  completed, 
the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  double 
quick  time. 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  hattle,  faced 
to  the  right  or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance 
and  at  a  halt,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  faced 
to  the  right  or  left;  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  it  faced  to  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  info  line  ivheel,  left  companies  on  the  right  into  line. 
2.  Battalion,  guide  right.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

804.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company;  the  right 
companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to 


244         School  of  the  Battalion— Vart  V. 

•wheel  to  the  ri;;ht  into  line,  the  left  companies  that 
thev  will  have  to  march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the 
fourth  company  will  place  himself  briskly  on  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  column,  face  to 
them,  and  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  last  files  of  his 
company  wiien  in  line  of  battle  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel 
■will  assure  him  in  that  position. 

806.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  all 
the  captains,  the  right  companies  will  form  to  the  right 
into  line  of  battle,  the  left  companies  will  put  them- 
selves in  march  in  order  to  form  on  the  right  into  line 
of  battle:  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  guides 
of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  of  battle  as  they  succes- 
sively come  upon  it. 

Article  Fourteenth. 

Dispositions  against  Cavalry. 

817.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  divisions  to  be  formed;  which  being  done,  he 
will  command: 

1.     To  form  square.      2.    To  half  distance,    close  column. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

818.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close 
to  company  distance,  the  second  division  taking  its 
distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  division. 

819.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division, 
the  file  closers  of  each  company  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed, passing  by  the  outer  flank  of  their  companies, 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank 
opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle,  and 
face  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 


School  of  the  Battalion— TsltI  Y.        245 

820.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the 
major  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  columa 
abreast  with  the  first  division;  the  buglers  formed  in 
two  ranks  will  place  themselves  at  platoon  distance, 
behind  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 

821.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
may,  according  to  circumstances,  put  the  column  in 
march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square;  if  he  wish  to  do  the 
latter,  he  will  command: 

1.  Form  square.     2.  Ei^ht  and  left  into  line,  wheel. 

822.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
facing  to  the  left  guides,  and  the  major,  facing  to  those 
of  the  right,  will  align  them,  from  the  front,  on  the  re- 
spective guides  of  the  fourth  division,  who  will  stand 
fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  inverted,  perpendicu- 
larly; the  right  guides,  in  placing  themselves  on  the 
direction,  will  take  their  exact  distances. 

823.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast;  all  the  captains 
of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves 
before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and 
caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right 
companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the 
left  into  line  of  battle. 

824.  The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line  of 
file  closers,  opposite  to  his  place  in  line  of  battle,  and 
will  be  replaced  by  the  corporal  of  his  file,  who  is  in 
the  rear  rank ;  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  who  is  in 
the  rank  of  file  closers  will  step  into  the  rear  rank. 

825.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  command: 
1.  Fowi.h  dimsion,  forioard;  2.  Guide  left,  and  place 
himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces  outside  of  its  left 
flank. 

826.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

March  (or  double  quick — Maech). 


246         School  of  (he  Battalion^VsiTt  V. 

827.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
division  will  stand  fast;  but  its  right  file  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  its  left  file  to  the  left. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  di- 
visions will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and 
the  buglers  will  advance  a  space  equal  to  the  fropt  of 
a  company. 

829.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the 
square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will 
halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by  the  rear  rank 
upon  the  guides  of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this  pur- 
pose, remain  faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  captain 
will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  and 
the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company  will  place 
himself  behind  him  in  the  front  rank,  become  rear. 
The  file  closers  will,  at  the  same  time,  close  up  a  pace 
on  the  front  rank,  and  the  outer  file  on  each  flank  of 
the  division  will  face  outwards. 

830.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

831.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
fourth  divisions,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  enter  the 
square. 

832.  The  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to 
the  right  into  line,  will  remain  on  the  left  of  their 
companies;  the  left  guide  of  each  of  those  companies 
will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  captain,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  as  a  file  closer 
behind  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  stafi"  will  enter  the  square,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  placing  himself  behind  the  left,  and 
the  major  behind  the  right  of  the  first  division. 

834.  If  the  battalion  present  ten,  instead  of  eight 
companies,  the  fourth  division  will  make  the  same 
movements  prescribed  above  for  the  second  and  third 


School  of  the  Battalion— ?Qxi  V.        247 

divisions,  and  the  fifth,  the  movements  prescribed  for 
the  fourth  division. 

835.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near  the 
enemy's  cavalry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd  company, 
under  that  circumstance,  ought,  when  the  battalion  is 
under  arms,  to  be  consolidated,  for  the  time,  with  the 
other  companies. 

836.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated  as 
follows:    The  first  division  will  always  be  the  jirst 

front;  the  last  division,  the  fourth  front;  the  right 
companies  of  the  other  divisions  will  form  the  second 
front;  and  the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions 
the  third  front. 

843.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is  formed, 
be  in  double  column,  the  two  leading  companies  will 
form  the  first  front,  the  two  rear  companies  the  fourth ; 
the  other  companies  of  the  right  half  battalion  will 
form  the  second,  and  those  of  the  left  half  battalion 
the  third  front. 

844.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  commanded 
by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions ;  each  of 
the  other  two  bj^  its  senior  captain. 

845.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  him- 
self four  paces  behind  its  present  rear  rank,  and  will 
be  replaced  momentarily  in  the  command  of  his  com- 
pany by  the  next  in  rank  therein. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or 
simple,  be  in  mass,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  it  to  take  company 
distance;  to  this  efiect,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  form  square.     2.    By  the  head  of  column,  take  half 

distance. 

849.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment 
the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance.  As  soon 
as  the  column  is  halted,  the  dispositions  indicated, 
No.  819,  will  be  executed,  and  when  these  are  com- 
pleted, the  colonel  may  proceed  to  form  square. 


248         Schcol  of  the  Battalion— Vd^xi  Y. 

854.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  distance 
less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  (such)  fronts  forward.     2.   March. 

855.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  made  by 
the  first  front,  the  chief  of  this  front  will  command: 

1.  First  division,  forward.      2.    Guide  centre. 

856.  The  chief  of  the  second  front  will  face  his  front 
to  the  left.  The  captains  of  the  companies  composing 
this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and  on  the 
right  of  their  left  guides,  who  will  replace  them  in  the 
front  rank ;  the  chief  of  the  third  front  will  face  his 
front  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  in  this  front  will 
place  themselves  outside,  and  on  the  left  of  their  cover- 
ing sergeants  ;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  front  will  face 
his  front  about,  and  command:  1.  Fourth  division, 
forward;  2.  Guide  centre.  The  captain,  who  is  in 
the  centre  of  the  first  front,  will  be  charged  with  the 
direction  of  the  march. 

857.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put 
itself  in  motion ;  the  companies  marching  by  the  flank 
will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances.  The  chief 
of  the  fourth  division  will  cause  his  division  to  keep 
constantly  closed  on  the  flanks  of  the  second  and  third 
fronts. 

857.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

858.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  in 
rear  of  the  file  of  direction,  in  order  to  regulate  his 
march. 

860.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the  square,, 
lie  will  command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 


Sclwol  of  the  Battalion— Tart  V.         249 

861.  At  the  second  command,  the  8qnare  will  halt; 
the  fourth  front  will  face  about  iramediotely,  and  with- 
out further  command  :  the  second  and  third  fronts  will 
face  outwards  ;  the  captains  of  companies  will  resume 
their  places  as  in  square. 

8G2,  In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the  second, 
third  or  f  )urth  fronts,  the  same  rules  will  be  observed. 

863.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater 
distance  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command : 

1.   Form  column. 

864.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command: 
1.  First  division,  forward.     2.    Guide  left. 

865.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  caution 
it  to  stand  fast;  the  commander  of  the  second  front 
will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and  then  command, 
Bi/  company,  by  Jile  left.  The  commander  of  the  third 
front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  then  com- 
mand, By  company,  by  fie  right.  At  the  moment  the 
second  and  third  fronts  face  to  the  left  and  right,  each 
captain  will  cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  lead- 
ing files  of  his  company. 

866.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command ; 

3.  March — (or  double  quick — March). 

867.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march 
forward  ;  its  chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have  ad- 
vanced a  space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and  align  it  by 
the  left. 

868.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second 
and  third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and 
right,  and  march  to  meet  each  other  behind  the  centre 
of  ihe  first  division,  and  the  moment  they  unite,  the 
captain  of  each  company  will  halt  his  company  and 


250         School  of  the  Battalion — Part  Y. 

face  it  to  the  front.     The  division  being  re-formed,  its 
chief  will  ali^n  it  by  the  left. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause 
it  to  ftice  about;  its  file-closers  will  remain  before  the 
front  rank. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel 
may  put  it  in  march ;  the  right  guides  will  preserve 
company  di.><tance  exactly  as  the  directing  guides. 

871.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  square, 
he  will  give  the  necessary  commands. 

872.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat,  the 
colonel  will  first  cause  column  to  be  formed ;  and 
when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face  by  the  rear 
rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.     2.  Face  bi/  the  rear  rank.     3.  Bat- 
talion about — Face. 

873.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
interior  divisions  will  place  themselves,  passing  by  the 
outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies,  behind  the 
front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle; 
the  file  closers  of  the  other  divisions  will  stand  fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  before 
its  rear  rank,  become  front,  passing  through  the  in- 
terval between  its  two  companies;  the  guides  will  step 
into  the  rear  rank,  now  front. 

875.  The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the  colonel 
may  put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square,  as  if 
it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The  square  being 
formed,  its  fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations 
they  had  when  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

876.  The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the  rear  rank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  or 
in  advance,  a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  854  and  following; 
otherwise,  he  will  re-form  the  column  according  to  the 


School  of  tilt  Battalion — Part  Y.         251 

principles  prescribed,  No.  863,  by  marching  forward 
the  fourth  front. 

877.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  a 
distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will 
face  the  column  by  the  front  rank ;  to  this  end,  he 
will  command : 

1.   To  march  in  advance.     2.    Face  hy  the  front  rank. 
3.  Battalion  about — Facb. 

879.  If  the  column  be  marchinp;  in  advance,  and 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will 
command: 

1.   To  march  in  retreat.      2.  Battalion  right  about. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

880.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  them>:elve.s  rapidly 
before  the  front  rank  of  their  respective  divisions.  At 
the  command  mavfJi,  the  column  will  face  about  and 
move  oif  to  the  rear. 

881.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  retreat,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will 
command : 

1.   To  march  in  advance.      2.    Battalion  right  about. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

882.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  before 
the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divisions ;  at  the  third, 
the  column  will  face  by  the  front  rank. 

To  reduce  the  square. 

883.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will 
command : 

1.  Reduce  square.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


252         Sclwol  of  the  Battalion — Part  V. 

884.  Thi'5  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  manner 
indicated,  No.  8G3  and  following  ;  but  the  file-closers 
of  the  fourth  front  will  place  themselves  behind  the 
rear  rank  the  moment  it  faces  about;  the  field  and 
stafi",  the  color-bearer  and  buglers,  will,  at  the  same 
time,  return  to  their  places  in  column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

888.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upon  one  of 
the  flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.  Column  at  half  distance  hy  division. 

3.  On  the  first  (or  fotirth)  division.     4.  Battalion,  right 
{px  left) — Face.     6.  March  (or  c?ou6Z5  ge^/cA; —March). 

889.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  priciples  prescribed. 

890.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  in  a  di- 
rection perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  first  (or  fourth)  division, 
form  column.     3.  Battalion,  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank. 

4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

892.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Double  column  at  half  distance. 
3.  Battalion,  inwards— Face.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March), 

894.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it 
into  double  column  to  form  square,  the  colonel  will 
command :  • 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Form  double  column.  3.  Battalion^ 
by  the  right  and  left  flanks.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 


School  of  the  Battalion— Vari  V.         253 

895.  The  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  halt  hia 
division  at  the  command  march. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  according  to 
the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be  deemed  sufficiently 
strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  square  to  be  formed 
in  four  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  he  will 
first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  which  being  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command: 

1.   To  form  square  in  fdur  ranks.     2.   To  half  distance,  clos^ 
column.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

912.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  the  right  company  to  face  to  the 
left,  and  the  left  company  to  face  to  the  right.  The 
chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  their  divisions 
to  move  forward. 

913.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  company  of 
the  first  division  will  form  into  four  ranks  on  its  left 
file,  and  the  left  company  into  four  ranks  on  its  right 
file.  The  formation  ended,  the  chief  of  this  division 
will  align  it  by  the  left. 

914.  The  otlier  divisions  will  move  forward  and 
double  their  files  marching;  the  right  company  of 
each  division  will  double  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left 
company  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  completed, 
each  chief  of  division  will  command.  Guide  left.  Each 
chief  will  halt  his  division  when  it  shall  have  the  dis- 
tance of  a  company  front  in  four  ranks  from  the  pre- 
ceding one,  counting  from  its  rear  rank,  and  will  align 
his  division  by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the  fourth  di- 
vision is  halted,  the  file-closers  will  move  rapidly 
before  its  front  rank. 

22  \ 


254         School  of  the  Battalion — Part  V. 

915.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-forra  column, 
and  reduce  square  in  four  ranks,  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  prescribed  for  a  battalion  in  two 
ranks. 

91G.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced 
and  at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the 
battalion  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  two  ranks  undouhle  files.     2.  Battalion^  outwards — 
Face.     3.  March. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  step 
before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and 
those  on  the  right  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
rig;ht,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the  left. 

918.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right  and  left. 

919.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will 
undouble  its  files  and  re-form  into  two  ranks  as  indi- 
cated in  the  school  of  the  company.  Each  captain  will 
halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front.  The  forma- 
tion completed,  each  chief  of  division  will  align  his 
division  by  the  left. 

920.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divisions 
formed  in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re- 
form them  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  Guide  centre.      2.  In  two  ranks,  undouble  files. 
3.  March. 

921.  The  captain,  placed  in  the  centre  of  each  divi- 
sion, will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front,  as 
will  also  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  and  the 
right  file  of  the  left  company.  Each  company  will 
then  be  re-formed  into  two  ranks,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company. 

922.  Tlie  battalion  being  formed  into  two  ranks,  the 
colonel  will  command,  Guide  left  (or  riyht). 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  V.         255 

923.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the 
flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at  half  dis- 
tance, hy  division  3.  On  the  first  (or  fourth)  division. 
4.  Battalion,  right  (or  left) — Fack.  5.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

924.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division 
will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division, 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

925.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide  of  the 
first  division  will  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  batta- 
lion will  face  to  the  light. 

92G.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  of  the  first  division  will  face  to  the  front,  re- 
maining doubled.  All  the  other  files  of  four  men 
will  step  ofi"  together,  and  each  in  succession  will 
close  up  to  its  proper  distance  on  the  file  preceding 
it,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  When 
the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will 
command,  Left — Dress.  * 

927.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in 
the  same  manner  as  with  a  battalion  in  two  ranks, 
observing  what  follows:  the  chiefs  of  divisions,  in- 
stead of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file  past  them  on 
entering  the  column,  will  continue  to  lead  them,  and 
as  each  division  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  its  chief  will  halt  the  right 
guide,  who  will  immediately  face  to  the  front ;  the 
first  file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the  same  time 
and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  se- 
cond tile  will  close  on  the  first,  and  when  closed, 
halt,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  All 
the  other  files  will  execute  successively  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  When  the  last  file 
shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  command, 
Left — Dress. 


256         School  of  the  Battalion— Tart  V. 

931.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpen- 
dicular pquare  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column,  he 
will  command : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column,  at 
h'tlf  distance.  3.  Bnttnlion  inwards — Face.  4.  March 
(or  douule  quick — March). 

*932.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  com- 
panies will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their 
respective  companies,  and  caution  those  on  the  right 
to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the 
right.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will  caution 
his  covering  sergeant  to  stand  fas^t. 

933.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  left  and  right ;  at  the  command  march,  the  left 
file  of  the  fourth,  and  the  right  file  of  the  fifth  com- 
pany, will  Aice  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The 
fourth  company  will  close  successively  by  tile  of  fours 
on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth  company,  in  like  manner, 
on  the  right  file;  the  files  will  face  to  the  front,  re- 
maining doubled.  The  formation  completed,  the  chief 
of  division  will  command:  Right  dress.  The  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the 
two  companies. 

934.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed 
for  the  double  column  in  two  ranks,  observing  what 
follows :  each  captain  will  halt  the  leading  guide  of 
his  company  the  moment  the  head  of  his  company 
arrives  on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  column.  In 
the  right  companies,  the  left  guide  will  step  into  the 
line  of  file  closers,  and  the  left  file  of  four  men  will 
face  immediately  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled,  and 
by  the  side  of  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company. 
The  companies  will  each  form  into  four  ranks,  as  pre- 
scribed. No.  926,  the  right  companies  on  the  left  file, 
and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  file.  The  forma- 
tion completed,  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself 


School  of  the  Battalion — Part  V.        257 

between  the  two  companies,  and  the  senior  will  com- 
mand :  Right — dress. 

Column  against  cavalry, 

965.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form 
square,  it  will  begin  by  taking  company  distance  ;  but 
if  so  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry  as  not  to  allow 
time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner : 

906.  The  colonel  will  command: 

1.    Column  against  cavalry.     2.  March. 

967.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast  *and  pass  behind 
the  rear  rank  ;  in  the  interior  divisions  each  captain 
will  promptly  designate  the  number  of  tiles  necessary 
to  close  the  interval  between  his  company  and  the  one 
in  front  of  it.  The  captains  of  the  divisions  next  to 
the  one  in  rear,  in  addition  to  closing  the  interval  in 
front,  will  also  close  up  the  interval  which  separates 
this  division  from  the  last ;  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  face  about,  and  its  file  closers 
will  pass  briskly  before  the  front  rank. 

908.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of  each 
division  will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  the  line  of  tile 
closers.  The  tirst  division  will  stand  fast,  the  fourth 
will  face  about,  the  outer  file  of  each  of  these  divisions 
will  then  face  outwards ;  in  the  other  divisions  the 
files  designated  for  closing  the  intervals  will  form  to 
the  right  and  left  into  line,  but  in  the  division  next  to 
the  rearmost  one,  the  first  files  that  come  into  line  will 
close  to  the  right  or  left  until  they  join  the  rear  divi- 
sion. The  files  of  each  company  which  remain  in 
column  will  close  on  their  outer  files,  formed  into  line, 
in  order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  the  middle  of  the 
column. 


258         School  of  the  BattaUon—V^ri  V. 

9G0.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  against 
caiHtliy  will  ho  formed  hy  the  sftme  communilH  and 
mcuuH.  At  the  ctminjind  tnurch,  tho  first  and  fourth 
divisidHM  will  halt  and  the  latter  divisinn  will  face 
nhout  ;  the  interior  divisions  will  coniorm  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  above. 

OTC  The  Ijattalion  boinpj  no  longer  threatened  by 
cavalry,  the  colonel  will  conunand  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.    March. 

971.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  in  column 
will  close  to  the  left  and  ri;'ht  to  make  room  for  those 
in  line  who  will  retake  tneir  places  in  C(»lumn  by 
stepping  backwards,  except  thoee  closing  the  interval 
between  the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their 
places  in  cidumn  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth 
division  will  face  about,  the  guides  will  resume  their 
places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as  not  to 
have  time  to  order  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  the  men  will 
fix  them,  without  command  or  signal,  at  the  cautionary 
command,  column  wjain-st  cavuln/. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and 
with  decided  advantage,  the  coK)nel  will  frecjuently 
cause  it  to  be  executed  in  order  to  render  it  familiar. 


Article  Fifteenth. 

The  rally, 

974.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  sometimes  cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded,  at 
which  signal,  the  battali(jn  will  break  and  disperse. 

975.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
talion, he  will  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounde<l,  and  at 
the  same  time  place  two  markers  and  the  color-bearer 
in  the  direction  ho  may  wish  to  give  the  battalion. 


School  of  the  Battalion— FslH  V.         259 

976.  Each  captain  will  rally  his  company  about  six 
paces  in  rear  of  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line  of 
battle. 

977.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  color-company  to  be 
promptly  established  against  the  markers,  and  each 
company  by  the  command  of  its  captain  will  be  aligned 
on  the  color-company  according  to  the  principles  here- 
tofore prescribed. 

978.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
talion in  column,  he  will  cause  the  assemhhj  to  be 
sounded,  and  place  two  markers  before  the  position  to 

♦  be  occupied  by  the  first  company  ;  the  captain  of  this 
company  will  rally  his  company  in  rear  of  tlie  two 
markers,  and  each  of  the  other  captains  will  rally  his 
company  at  platoon  distance,  behind  the  one  which 
should  precede  it  in  the  order  in  column. 


END    OF    SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction. 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  subjected 
to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the  means 
of  movinpr  them  in  any  direction  with  the  greatest 
promptitude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should 
be  executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks, 
nor  is  it  desirable,  as  such  exactness  would  materially 
interfere  with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the 
way  for,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of,  the  main  corps, 
their  movements  should  be  so  regulated  by  this  corps, 
as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve, 
the  strength  and  composition  of  which  will  vary  ac- 
cording to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  dis- 
tance of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserve  will  be 
sufficient  for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to 
fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with  cartridges, 
relieve  the  fatigued,  and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for 
the  skirmishers, 

C.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance, 
besides  the  company  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be 
required,  composed  of  entire  companies,  which  will  be 
employed  to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the 
line  as  may  be  warmly  attacked  ;  this  reserve  should 
strong  enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies 
deployed  as  skirmishers. 

7.  The  r3serves  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  261 

of  the  line  of  skirmivshers,  the  company  reserves  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at 
four  hundred  paces.  This  rule,  however,  is  not  inva- 
riable. The  reserves,  while  holdinj:^  themselves  within 
sustainina:;  distance  of  the  line,  should  be,  as  much  as 
possible,  in  a  position  to  afford  each  other  mutual  pro- 
tection, and  must  carefully  profit  by  any  accidents  of 
the  ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the 
enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  bo  executed 
in  quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be 
resorted  to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces 
in  the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by 
the  sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  commands  to 
be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are  given  ;  but  to  avoid 
mistakes,  when  the  signals  are  employed,  they  will 
wait  until  the  last  bugle  note  is  sounded  before  com- 
mencing the  movement. 

12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  rapidly, 
the  oflficers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  see  that 
the  men  economise  their  strength,  keep  cool  and  profit 
by  all  the  advantages  which  the  ground  may  offer  for 
cover.  It  is  only  by  this  continual  watchfulness  on 
the  part  of  all  grades,  that  a  line  of  skirmishers  can 
attain  success. 

18.  This  instruction  will  be  divided  into  five  articles. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the 
movements  are  executed  by  a  company  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the  battalion 
in  order  of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed 
that  each  company  of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  occupies  a  front  of  one  hundred  paces. 
From  these  two  examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for 
all  cases,  whatever  may  be  the  numerical  strength  of 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

the  skirmishers,  and  the  extent  of  ground  they  ought 
to  occupy. 

Article  First. 

Deployments. 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in 
two  ways :  forward,  and  by  the  finnk. 

IG.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when 
the  company  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be 
established  as  skirmishers:  it  will  be  deployed  by  the 
flank,  when  it  finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each 
platoon  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections;  the  com- 
rades in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  men,  will  bo 
careful  to  know  and  to  sustain  each  other.  The  cap- 
tain will  assure  himself  that  the  files  in  the  centre  of 
each  platoon  and  section  are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on 
its  right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other  named 
file  whatsoever.  In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may  bo 
thrown  forward  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  on 
any  ground  they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 

19.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  pre- 
serve their  alignment,  but  no  advantages  which  the 
ground  may  present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain  this 
regularity. 

20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on 
the  extent  of  ground  to  be  covered  ;  but  in  general,  it 
is  not  proper  that  groups  of  four  men  should  be  re- 
moved more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
habitual  distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in 
open  grounds  will  be  five  paces ;  in  no  case  will  they 
lose  sight  of  each  other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion 
comprehends  its  front  and  the  half  of  each  interval 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  263 

which  separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right  and 
left.  If  a  line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported, 
should  be  covered  by  skirmishers,  it  will  be  necessary 
either  to  protect  the  flanks  with  skirmishers,  or  to  ex- 
tend them  in  front  of  the  line  so  far  beyond  the  wings 
as  effectually  to  oppose  any  attempt  which  might  be 
made  by  the  enemy's  skirmishers  to  disturb  the  flanks. 

To  deploy  forward. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when 
the  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left 
file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  platoon  in 
reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  First  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind 
the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of  the  first 
platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself 
between  the  two  sections  in  the  front  rank  as  soon  as 
the  movement  begins;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  on  the  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  same 
platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass.  The  captain  will  indi- 
cate to  this  sergeant  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him 
to  direct  his  march.  The  first  lieutenant,  placing  liimself 
before  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon,  will  command  : 

Second  platoon  backward — March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step 
three  paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the  flank  of 
the  first  platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted  by  its  chief, 
and  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left, 


264  Instruction  for   S/cirmi^hers. 

and  tho  third  sergeant  on  tlie  right  flank  of  this 
platoon. 

25.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four 
men,  conducted  by  the  fourth  sergeant,  will  direct 
iiself  on  the  point  indicated  ;  all  tiie  other  groups  of 
fours  throwing  furward  bri.>kly  the  left  shoulder,  will 
move  diagonally  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so 
as  to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  twenty  paces, 
"which  shall  be  the  distance  between  each  group  and 
that  immediately  on  its  left.  "When  the  second  group 
from  the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with,  and  twenty 
paces  from  the  first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front, 
conforming  to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  first,  keep- 
ing constantly  on  the  same  alignment  and  at  twenty 
paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others, 
conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second  ;  they  will  arrive  successively  on  the  line.  The 
right  guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

2G.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where 
the  left  of  the  line  should  rest,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand the  skirmishers  to  halt  ;  the  men  composing 
each  group  of  fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at 
five  paces  from  each  other,  and  to  the  right  and  left  of 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  tile  in  each  group,  the 
rear  rank  men  placing  themselves  on  the  left  of  their 
file  leaders.  If  any  groups  be  not  in  line  at  the  com- 
mand half,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conforming  to 
what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be 
fired  ftpon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the 
groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their  proper 
distances. 

28.  The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned 
oflBcors  on  the  right,  left  and  centre  of  the  platoon 
will  place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and 
opposite  the  positions  they  respectively  occupied.  The 
chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregular- 
ities, and  then  place  themselves  twenty-tive  or  thirty 


Instruction  for  Shirmisliers.  265 

paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  each 
having  with  him  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve, 
and  also  a  bugler,  -who  will  repeat,  if  necessary,  the 
signals  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed  to 
take  advantage  of  any  cover  which  the  ground  may 
offer,  and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever  such 
a  movement  is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  fire 
of  the  enemy.  Kegularity  in  the  alignment  should 
yield  to  this  important  advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  face  the  second  platoon  about,  and  march  it 
promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line. 
He  will  hold  it  always  at  this  distance,  unless  ordered 
to  the  contisiry. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  line.     Tins  rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually 
in  the  soal»bard,  and  this  rule  applies  equally  to  the 
skirmisliers  and  the  reserve  ;  whenever  bayonets  are 
required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be  given. 
The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the 
whole  deployment,  and  then  promptly  place  himself 
about  eijzhty  |>aces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line. 
He  Avill  have  with  him  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken 
from  the  reserve. 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or 
the  centre  of  the  platoon,  by  the  same  commands, 
substituting  the  indication  right  or  centre  for  that  of  left 
file. 

34.  The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will 
be  made  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above; 
in  this  latter  ca-^e.  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  be 
marked  by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  eeo* 
tion  ;  the  filth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  right 
of  this  group,  and  serve  as  the  guide  of  the  platoon, 
during  the  «h'pl()ymenfc. 

23 


266  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made, 
on  the  ri^ht,  left,  or  centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of 
foars  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other, 
and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered 
file.  The  deployments  will  habitually  be  made  at 
twenty  paces  interval;  but  if  a  greater  interval  be  re- 
quired, it  will  be  indicated  in  the  command, 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so 
near  the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary, 
the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the  same  man- 
ner, and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the 
deployment  of  a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third  lieu- 
tenant will  command  the  fourth  section,  and  a  non- 
commissioned officer  designated  for  that  purpose,  the 
eecond  section  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as  centre 
guide;  the  file  closers  will  place  themselves  ten  paces 
m  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line  of 
battle.  The  first  and  second  lieutenant  will  each  have 
a  bugler  near  him. 

To  deploy  hy  the  Jiank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain 
ehall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  flank,  holding  the  first 
platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command: 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.   By  the  right  flank — 
take  intervals.     3.   M\Rca  [or  double  quick — March). 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces 
behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and  second  sections  of 
the  second  platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
eelf  one  pac^  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  pla- 
toon ;  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will 
place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
same  platoon.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  him  the 
point  on  which  he  wishes  hira  to  direct  his  march. 
The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  267 

been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
Nos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
Belf  on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant 
•will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind  the 
left  group  of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement;  the 
left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  as 
soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what 
has  been  prescribed,  No.  26  ;  the  third  sergeant  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  group,  to  con- 
duct it;  the  second  group  will  halt  at  twenty  paces 
from  the  one  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at  twenty  paces 
from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the  right.  As  the  groups 
halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy  as  has 
been  explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  successive  deployments  of  the  groups, 
keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as  to  rectify 
any  errors  which  may  be  committed.  When  the  de- 
ployment is  completed,  they  will  place  themselves 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  as 
has  been  heretofore  prescribed.  The  non-commis- 
sioned officers  will  also  place  themselves  as  previously 
indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move 
it  as  indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank 
according  to  the  same  principles,  substituting  leftjlank 
for  right  Jiank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  com- 
pany upon  the  centre  of  one  of  the  platoons,  ho  will 
command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right  and  left 
flanks — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


268  Instruction  for  SJcirmuhers. 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non-com- 
missioned officens  will  conform  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed, No.  3S. 

46.  At  tlu'  soonnd  command,  the  first  lientonant  will 
place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  the  right  section 
of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant  behind  the 
right  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to  the  left, 
the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will  stand 
fast.  The  two  sections  will  move  off  in  opposite  direc- 
tions :  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  right  file  to  conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant  on 
the  right  of  the  left  tile.  The  two  groups  nearest  that 
which  stands  fast,  will  each  halt  at  twenty  paces  from 
this  group,  and  each  of  the  other  groups  will  halt  at 
twenty  paces  from  the  group  which  is  in  rear  of  it. 
Each  group  will  deploy  as  heretofore  prescribed.  No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the 
movement,  holding  themselves  always  abreast  of  the 
group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  Tiie  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be 
made  on  any  named  group  whatsoever;  in  this  case, 
the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group 
indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  bo  made  according 
to  the  principles  heretofore  prescribed. 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles. 

To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a 
line  of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  deployments. 

52.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is 
at  a  halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to 
the  left,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  the  If  I  Jl'ink  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals.     2. 
Mauch  (or  double  quick — March). 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  269 

53.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right 
will  stand  fast,  all  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the 
left,  and  each  group  will  extend  its  interval  to  the  pre- 
scribed distance  hy  the  means  indicated  No.  40. 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to 
preserve  between  each  other  the  distance  of  five  pacee, 
unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render  it  ne- 
cessary that  they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep 
in  sight  of  each  other.  The  intervals  refer  to  the 
spaces  between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the  distances 
between  the  men  in  each  group.  The  intervals  will 
be  taken  from  the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neighboring 
group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the 
front,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the 
right,  he  will  command  : 

1.    On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals.     2. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

5G.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  march  on  the  point  of  direction  ;  the  other 
groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and  taking 
the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals  to  the 
prescribed  distance,  by  the  means  indicated  No.  25, 
conforming  also  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the 
line,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that 
one  company  or  platoon  should  occupy  a  line  which 
had  been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  of  the 
company  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  succee- 
sively  to  the  rear  as  they  are  relieved  by  the  extension 
of  the  intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  deployments. 


270  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

60.  If  tlic  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the  cap- 
tain Rhould  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the  left,  he  will 
command: 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  pacts)  close   intervals.     2. 
March  (or  double  quick— "SI \ViC\i). 

01.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  ^roup  -will 
stand  fast,  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left  and 
close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to 
the  enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain 
will  command : 

1.    On   the  left  group  [so  many  paces)   close  intervals.     2. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously  indi- 
cated ;  the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right  shoulder, 
will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to 
the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the 
centre,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to 
reinforce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two 
companies  to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  previ- 
ously occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy 
80  as  to  finish  its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of 
the  line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men  will  successively 
move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall  be  unmasked  by 
the  men  of  the  old  company.  The  reserves  of  the 
two  companies  will  unite  behind  the  centre  of  the 
line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  sicirmishei's. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  re- 
lieved, the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  intention. 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  271 

which  he  will  immediately  communicate  to  his  first 
and  second  lieutenants. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment 
forward,  so  as  to  finish  the  movement  at  about  twenty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new 
company,  by  command  of  their  captain,  will  advance 
rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt;  the 
new  line  being  established,  the  old  company  will  as- 
semble on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get  into  groups 
of  fours  until  they  are  beyond  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

69.  If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching 
in  retreat,  the  company  thrown  out  to  relieve  them 
will  deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed  No.  38  and  fol- 
lowing. The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire 
with  order,  and  having  passed  the  new  line,  they  will 
form  upon  the  reserve. 

Article   Second. 

To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70.  "When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers is  marching  by  the  front,  the  guide  will  be 
habitually  in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication  to 
this  effect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  on 
the  contrary  it  be  intended  that  the  directing  guide 
should  be  on  the  right  or  left,  the  command  guide 
right,  or  guide  left,  will  be  given  immediately  after 
that  of  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to 
advance,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  g-uic^— March.) 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  great- 


272  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

est  rapidity  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  in  case  of 
need,  l)y  the  serpjoants.  This  rule  is  p;eneral.  Avliether 
the  skirini.-hers  march  l)y  the  front  or  by  the  flank. 

73.  At  the  lirst  command,  three  seri^eants  will 
move  briskly  on  the  line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the 
second  on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  move  to 
the  front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction  will 
move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skirmishers 
will  hold  themselves  aligned  on  this  guide,  and  pre- 
serve their  intervals  towards  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately 
behind  their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their  movements. 

70.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence 
to  the  movement. 

77.  "When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he 
will  command : 

Halt. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will 
halt.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify  any 
irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals,  and  after 
taking  every  possible  advantage  which  the  ground 
may  offer  for  protecting  the  men,  the}',  with  the  three 
sergeants  in  the  line,  will  retire  to  their  proper  places 
in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers 
in  retreat,  will  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  Marcu  (or  double  quick — March). 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
move  on  the  line  as  prescribed  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will 
face  about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear,  con- 
furniing  to  tlie  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exer- 
tion to  preserve  order. 


Instruction  for  Shirmiahers.  273 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat, 
the  captain  will  command  : 

Halt. 

84.  At  this  command  the  skirmishers  will  halt,  and 
immediately  face  to  the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides  will 
each  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  78. 

To  change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Right  wheel.      2.  March  (or  double   quick — March). 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
mark  time  in  his  place  ;  the  left  guide  will  move  in  a 
circle  to  tlie  right,  and  that  he  may  properly  regulate 
his  movements,  will  occasionally  cast  his  eyes  to  the 
right,  so  as  to  observe  the  direction  of  the  line,  and 
the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  passed  over.  The  cen- 
tre guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and 
in  order  to  conform  his  movements  to  the  general  di- 
rection, will  take  care  that  his  steps  are  only  half  the 
length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on  the  left. 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of 
their  steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank, 
being  less  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as 
they  are  removed  from  it ;  they  will  often  look  to  the 
marching  flank,  so  as  to  preserve  the  direction  and 
their  intervals. 

89.  "When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to 
resume  the  direct  march,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to 


274  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

"wheel,  and  the  skirmishors  will  move  direct  to  the 
front;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point  which 
will  be  indicated  to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in 
place  of  moving  it  to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command,  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by  the  same 
commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance;  for  exam- 
ple, if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left,  now 
become  the  right,  he  will  command:  1.  Lejt  wheel. 
2.  March.  At  the  command  halt^  the  skirmishers  will 
face  to  the  enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain 
should  wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will, 
when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently,  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  Makch. 

To  march  hy  the  Jlank. 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  march 
by  the  right  flank,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

97.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
place  themslves  on  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will 
face  to  the  right  and  move  off;  the  right  guide  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  on  the 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  275 

right  to  conduct  him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  in- 
dicated ;  each  skirmisher  will  take  care  to  follow  ex- 
actly in  the  direction  of  the  one  immediately  preceding 
him,  and  to  preserve  his  distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left 
flank,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right;  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading 
man  to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  them,  he  will 
command: 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt 
and  face  to  the  enemy.  The  officers  and  sergeants 
will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed,  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements 
of  the  line,  and  be  held  always  about  one  hundred 
and  fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  the  position  to 
second  its  operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command  :  1.  Platoon 

forioard ;  2.  Guide  left;  3.  March.  If  he  should 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command.:  1.  /n 
retreat;  2,  March;  3.  Guide  right.  At  the  command 
halt,  it  will  re-fiice  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that 
the  signals  or  commands,  such  a^  foricard,  mean  that 
the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy  ;  in  retreat^ 
that  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  fank, 
that  the  men  must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever 
may  be  their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the 
right  (or  left),  he  will  command  :  1.  By  file  right  (or 
left);  2.  March.  These  movements  will  also  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  signals,  Nos.  14  and  15. 


276  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

Article  Third. 
The  firings. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  march- 
ing. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  captain 
"will  command : 

Commence — Firing. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men  of 
the  front  rank  will  commence  firinn;  ;  they  will  reload 
rapidly  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  fire  again. 
During  this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  come 
to  a  ready,  and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file-leaders 
have  loaded,  they  will  also  fire  and  reh)ad.  The  men 
of  each  file  will  thus  continue  the  firing,  conforming 
to  this  principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other  shall  always 
have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to 
aim  with  accuracy  ;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor 
to  estimate  correctly  the  distances  between  themselves 
and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  de- 
liver their  fire  with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  reloading,  unless  protected  by  accidents  in  the 
ground. 

To  fire  marching. 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands as  the  fire  at  a  halt. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing,  if  the  line 
be  advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will 
halt,  fire,  and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward. 


Instruction  for  Shii-mishers.  277 

The  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to 
march,  an;!  after  passinj^  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond 
his  front  rank  man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select 
his  object,  and  tire  when  his  front  rank  man  has 
loaded  ;  the  fire  will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by 
each  tile ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and  en- 
deavor, as  much  as  possible,  to  preserve  the  general 
direction  of  the  alij^nment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  com- 
mand commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
file  will  halt,  fjice  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and  then  re-load 
whilst  moving  to  the  rear;  the  rear  lank  man  of  the 
eamc  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  halt  ten  or 
twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  face  about, 
come  to  a  ready,  and  fire,  when  his  front  rank  man 
has  passed  him  in  retreat  and  loaded  ;  after  which,  he 
will  move  to  the  rear  and  reload  ;  the  front  rank  man 
in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to  the  rear,  will 
halt  at  ten  or  twelve  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to 
the  enemy,  load  his  piece  and  fire,  conforming  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  ;  the  firing  will  thus  be  con- 
tinued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
at  the  command,  commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  file  will  face  <o  the  enemy,  step  one  pace  for- 
ward, halt,  and  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue 
to  move  forward.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has 
fired,  he  will  place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear 
rank  man  and  reload  whilst  marching.  When  he  has 
loaded,  the  rear  rank  man  v>\\\,  in  his  turn,  step  one 
pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire,  and  returning  to  the  ranks, 
will  place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  man  ;  the 
latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner,  observ- 
ing the  same  principles.  At  the  command,  cease  firing, 
the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake  their  original 
positions,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
the  fire  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 

24 


278  Instruction  for  Skirmiahers. 

plea,  hut  in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear  rank  men  who 
will  fire  Hist. 

116.  The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in  the 
cases  to  which  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  march- 
ing Ity  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Forioard — March, 
it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded,  without 
regard  to  the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong, 
who  will  move  to  the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces 
have  V)Pen  discharged,  will  remain  in  their  ])lace8  to 
load  them  before  moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will 
be  continued  agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
No.  112. 

118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing, 
or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  In 
retreat — March,  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will 
remain  iaced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  tire  in  this  posi- 
tion ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat 
loading  them,  and  the  fire  will  be  continued  agreeably 
to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a 
halt,  advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  Bi/ the 
ri(jht  (or  left)  flank — Marcu,  the  men  whose  pieces 
are  Inaded  will  step  one  pace  out  of  the  general  align- 
ment, face  to  the  enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position  ;  the 
men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face  to  the  right 
(or  left)  and  march  in  the  direction  indicated.  The 
men  who  stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place  them- 
selves, immediately  after  firin};,  upon  the  general 
direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank  men, 
as  the  ca^e  may  be.  The  fire  will  be  continued  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  N<t.  114. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  hnbituated  to  load  their 
pieces  whilst  marching;  but  they  will  be  enjoined  to 
halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charging 
cartridge,  and  priming. 

121.  They  should  be  practised  to  fire  and  load  kneel- 
ing, lying  down,  and  sitting,  and  much  liberty  should 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  279 

be  allowed  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that  they  may 
be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be  most  convenient. 
Skirmishers  should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in 
whatever  position  they  may  load,  it  is  important  that 
the  piece  should  be  placed  upright  before  ramming,  in 
order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder  may  reach  the 
bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same 
rank  should  not  all  fire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the 
same  file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the  other  of 
them  be  always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skir- 
mishers should  seize  on  every  advantage  which  the 
ground  may  present,  for  arresting  the  enemy  as  long 
as  possible. 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cease  Jiring,  the  captain  will 
Bee  that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed  ;  but  the  men 
who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the  line  be 
marching,  it  will  continue  the  movement;  but  the  man 
of  each  file  who  happens  to  he  in  front,  will  wait  until 
the  man  in  rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing,  at 
the  comirand  halt,  the  line  will  re-form  upon  the  skir- 
mishers who  are  in  front ;  when  the  line  is  retreating, 
upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

126.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possible 
vigilance  over  a  line  of  skirmishers  ;  in  battle,  they 
should  neither  carry  a  rifle  or  fowling  piece.  In  all 
the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  see 
that  order  and  silence  are  preserved,  and  that  the 
skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently ;  they  should 
especially  caution  them  to  be  calm  and  collected  ;  not 
to  fire  until  they  distinctly  perceive  the  objects  at 
which  they  aim,  and  are  sure  that  those  objects  are 
within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take  advan- 
tage promptly,  and  with  intelligence,  of  all  shelter,  and 
of  all  accidents  of  the  ground,  to  conceal  thenjselves 
from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  protect  themselvea 


280  Instruction  for   JS/iU'mishcrs. 

from  his  firo.  It  may  often  happen,  tliat  intervals  are 
momentarily  lost  when  several  men  near  each  other 
find  a  cimimon  shelter;  but  when  they  quit  this  posi- 
tion, they  sIkkiIcI  immediately  resume  their  intervals 
and  their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may  not,  by 
crowd inf!;,  needlessly  expose  themselves  to  the  fire  of 
the  enemy. 


Article  Fourth.  * 

tue  rally. 
To  form  column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied 
in  order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success  ;  the 
rallies  are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets  fixed  ; 
when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix  bayonets 
without  command. 

12.S.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallyinor.  which  the 
chief  of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely 
disturbed  V)y  scattered  horsemen,  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the  captain  will 
cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should, 
however,  advance  to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the  cap- 
tain will  command,  ralli/  by  Jours.  The  line  will  halt 
if  marching,  and  the  four  men  of  each  group  will 
execute  thi^  rally  in  the  following  manner:  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file  will  take  the  posi- 
tion of  guard  against  cavalry ;  the  rear  rank  man  of 
the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take  the  position  of 
guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to  him,  his 
right  fo(jt  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of  the 
former,  and  parallel  to  it;  the  front  rank  man  of  the 
odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file,  will 
also  place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  posi- 


Instruction  for  Shirmisliers.  281 

tion,  and  between  the  two  men  already  established, 
facing  ti)  the  right  and  left ;  the  right  feet  of  the  four 
men  will  be  brought  together,  forming  a  square,  and 
serving  for  mutual  support.  The  fuur  men  in  each 
group  will  come  to  a  ready,  fire  as  occasion  may  offer, 
and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

130.  The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each 
cause  the  four  men  who  constitute  his  guard  to  form 
square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him  and 
the  bugler  to  place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The 
three  sergeants  will  each  promptly  phice  himself  in 
the  group  nearest  him  in  the  line  of  skirmishers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares 
too  weak,  but  should  wish  to  hold  his  position  by 
strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  by  sections. 

132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
move  rapidly  on  the  centre  group  of  their  respective 
sections,  or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose  position 
might  offer  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  advantage  ; 
the  skirmishers  will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run  on  this 
group,  and  without  distinction  of  numbers.  The  men 
composing  the  group  on  which  the  formation  is  made, 
will  immediately  form  square,  as  heretofore  explained, 
and  elevate  their  pieces,  the  bayonets  uppermost,  in 
order  to  indicate  the  point  on  which  the  rally  is  to  be 
made.  The  other  skirmishers,  as  they  arrive,  will  oc- 
cupy and  fill  the  open  angular  spaces  between  these  four 
men,  and  successively  rally  around  this  first  nucleus, 
and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact  circle. 
The  skirmishers  will  take  as  they  arrive,  the  position 
of  charge  bayonet,  the  point  of  the  bayoriet  more  ele- 
vated, and  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  position.  The 
movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior  ranks  will  fire 
as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving  their 
feet. 


282  '  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard 
wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to 
observe  that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence,  and  with 
promptitude  and  order;  that  some  pieces  in  each  of 
their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the 
fire  is  directed  on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be 
most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will 
form  into  a  circle  around  its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  cr  commander  of  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers formed  of  many  platoons  should  judge  that 
the  rally  by  sections  does  not  offer  sufficient  resistance, 
he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed,  and 
for  this  purpose,  will  command : 

Rally  by  platoons. 

137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  means  as  the 
rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform 
to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers 
on  the  reserve,  will  command : 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  tliis  command,  the  captain  will  move  briskly 
on  the  reserve  ;  the  officer  who  commands  it  will  take 
immediate  steps  to  form  square ;  for  this  purpose,  he 
will  cause  the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to  be  thrown 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear;  he  will  order  the  men  to 
come  to  a  ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the 
run,  will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon  that 
man  of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the 
section.  These  groups  will  direct  themselves  diago- 
nally towards  each  other,  and  in  such  manner  as  to 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  283 

form  into  sections  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity 
while  moving  to  the  rear;  the  oflScers  and  sergeants, 
will  see  that  this  formation  is  made  in  proper  order, 
and  the  chiefs  will  direct  their  sections  upon  the  re- 
serve, taking  care  to  unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left. 
As  the  skirmishers  arrive,  they  will  continue  and  com- 
plete the  formation  of  the  square  begun  by  the  re- 
serve, closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without 
regard  to  their  places  in  line  ;  they  will  come  to  a 
ready  without  command,  and  fire  upon  the  enemy; 
which  will  also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is 
unmasked  by  the  skirmishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cav- 
alry while  retreating,  its  chief  will  command  halt; 
at  this  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a 
compact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his 
section  and  resume  the  march,  the  moment  he  can  do 
so  with  safety. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and 
efficient  manner  requires  coolness  and  activity  on  the 
part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment 
of  respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him  ; 
as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself 
beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a 
position  where  he  may  defend  himself  with  advan- 
tage, or  by  returning  to  the  corps  to  which  he  belongs. 
For  this  purpose,  being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the 
company  to  break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half 
distance ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command ; 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  will 
dress  on  its  centre,  and  the  platoon  which  was  facing 
to  the  rear  will  face  about  without  command.  The 
guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of 
their  respective  platoons  ;  those  of  the  second  platoon 


284  Instruction  /or  S/Lirmishers. 

will  place  themselves  at  half  distance  from  those  of 
the  first,  countin;^  from  the  rear  rank.  These  dispo- 
eitiiins  bein;];  made,  the  CHptain  can  move  the  column 
in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will 
command: 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (ot  double  quick — March.) 

146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  im- 
mediately face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the 
opposite  direction.  As  soon  as  the  columa  is  in  mo- 
tion, the  captain  will  command  : 

3.    Guide  right  (or  left.) 

147.  lie  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading 
guide;  the  guides  will  march  at  their  proper  dis- 
tances, and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain 
will  command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

140.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt; 
the  first  platoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer 
half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  bo  thrown  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and 
third  fronts  of  the  square.  The  officers  and  sergeants 
will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularties  which  may  be 
committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  ad- 
vance, the  captain  will  command: 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  No. 
144. 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  285 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will 
command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Mabch  (or  douhle  quick — March). 
3.    Guide  left  (or  right). 

153.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move 
forward,  and  at  the  third  command,  the  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain 
ground  to  the  right  or  left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid 
wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and  for  this  pur- 
pose, will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  neces- 
sary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half 
distance,  right  in  front,  the  captain  can  deploy  the 
first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already 
explained  ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the 
second  platoon  forward  on  the  centre  file,  leaving  the 
first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.    On  the  centre  file — 
take  intervals.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
plato(m  will  caution  his  platoon  to  stand  fast  ;  the 
chiefs  of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sections  ;  the 
fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right 
section,  second  platoon,  will  command  :  Section  right 
face;  the  chief  of  the  left  section:   Section  left  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will 
move  off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having 
unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
respectively  command:  By  the  left  fank — March, 
and  By  the  right  jlank — March  ;  and  as  soon  as  these 
sections  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon, 


286  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

they  will  command,  As  skirmishers — MARcn.  The 
groups  will  then  deploy  acoDrdinj^  to  prescribod  prin- 
ciples, (in  the  rij^ht  p;roup  uf  the  left  section,  which  will 
1)0  diroctod  by  the  filth  sergeant  on  the  point  indicated. 

ir)0.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deploynient 
made  by  the  Hank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved 
to  the  front  by  the  means  above  Htated,  and  halted 
after  passing  some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the 
first  platoon  ;  the  deployment  will  then  be  made  by 
the  flank,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed. 

IGO.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  rally  them 
on  the  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

161.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  re- 
serve, no  matter  what  position  the  company  to  which 
they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will  ra- 
pidly unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing 
themselves  in  a  run  towards  its  nearest  flank,  and 
then  form  in  its  rear. 

1G2,  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond 
the  line  of  file-closers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick 
step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  re- 
form his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column  behind 
the  wing  on  which  it  is  rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from 
the  rank  of  file-closers.  These  subdivisions  will  not  be 
moved  except  l)y  order  of  the  commander  of  the  bat- 
talion, who  may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them  into 
line  of  battle  at  the  extremities  of  the  line,  or  in  the 
intervals  between  the  battalions. 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the 
same  wing  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter  what- 
Boever,  they  should  bo  formed  always  into  close 
column,  or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

1G4.  When  Ihe  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of 
ekirmishers,  shall  be  formed  into  square,  the  platoons 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  287 

and  pections  of  the  covering  company  will  be  directed 
by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will 
be  opened  at  the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers, 
who  will  be  then  formed  into  close  column  by  platoons 
in  rear  of  the  first  front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of 
the  square  from  being  opened,  the  skirmishers  will 
throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank  men, 
the  right  knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece 
resting  on  the  thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  po- 
sition, A  part  may  also  place  themselves  about  the 
angles,  where  they  can  render  good  service  by  defend- 
ing the  sectors  without  fire. 

16G  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are 
rallied  be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the  skir- 
mishers will  be  formed  into  close  column  by  platoon, 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the 
command.  Form  square — March,  they  will  move  for- 
ward and  close  on  the  buglers. 

107.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  pla- 
toon or  section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it 
be  wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will 
be  marched  by  the  flank  towards  the  intervals  on  the 
wings,  and  be  then  deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front 
of  the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  inte- 
rior of  squares  or  columns,  are  to  be  deployed,  they 
will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then  thrown 
forward,  as  is  prescribed.  No.  l-VJ  -,  as  soon  as  they 
shall  have  unmasked  the  column  or  square,  they  will 
be  deployed,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left 
file. 

The  assembly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be 
assembled  when  there  is  no  h)nger  danger  of  its  being 
disturbed  ;  the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  ia 
quick  time. 


288  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

170.  Tho  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmish- 
ers on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 

Assemble  on  the  reserve. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  assem- 
ble by  groups  of  fours  ;  the  front  rank  men  will  place 
themselves  behind  their  rear  rank  men  ;  and  each 
group  of  fours  will  direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where 
each  will  take  its  proper  place  in  the  ranks.  Wheo 
the  company  is  re-formed,  it  will  rejoin  the  battalion 
to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skir- 
mishers on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
line,  either  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them 
on  the  centre  while  marching,  he  will  command: 

Assemble  on  the  centre. 

174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  con- 
tinue to  march  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  indi- 
cated ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing  tile  will 
follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank  man ; 
the  other  two  comrades  of  this  group,  and  likewise 
those  on  their  left,  will  march  diagonally,  advancing 
the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the  gait,  so  as  to  re- 
form the  groups  while  drawing  nearer  and  nearer  the 
directing  tile  ;  the  men  of  the  right  section  will  unite 
in  the  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then  upon  the 
directing  tile,  throwing  forward  the  right  shoulder. 
As  they  successively  unite  on  the  centre,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  (vill  be  ex- 
ecuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat 
will  also  be  executed  according  to  tho  same  principles, 
the  front  rank  men  marching  behind  their  rear  rank 
men. 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  289 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt, 
and  on  the  line  they  occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the 
same  commands  ;  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right 
or  left,  according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right  or 
left  flank,  re-form  the  groups  while  marching,  and 
thus  arrive  on  the  file  which  served  as  the  paint  of 
formation.  As  they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmish- 
ers will  support  arms. 


Article  Fifth. 

To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers^  and  to  rally 
this  battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  com- 
mander should  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  companies  in 
reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  adjutant,  and  also  to  the  major,  who  will 
be  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will 
point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  the  direction  he 
wishes  to  give  the  line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  he 
wishes  the  right  of  the  sixth  company  to  rest,  and  to 
the  commander  of  the  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish 
it  established. 

179.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly  ia 
front  of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and  the  adju- 
tant in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  company.  The 
commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the 
manner  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command : 

1.  First  {or  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — take  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

25 


290  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the 
fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  prepare  to  deploy  the 
first  platoons  of  their  respective  companies,  the  sixth 
on  its  rip;ht,  the  fifth  on  its  left  file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face  it 
to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh  and 
eighth  companies  will  face  their  respective  companies 
to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence.  The  platoons  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  com- 
panies will  deploy  forward  ;  the  right  guide  of  the 
sixth  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated 
to  him  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

184.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and 
abo  the  companies  which  have  faced  to  the  left,  will 
march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  company  will 
take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from 
the  left  of  the  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its  first 
platoon  on  its  left  file.  The  seventh  and  eighth  com- 
panies will  each  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces, 
counting  from  the  first  file  of  the  company,  which 
is  immediately  on  its  right;  and  the  chiefs  of  these 
companies  will  afterwards  deploy  their  first  platoons 
on  the  right  file. 

185.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the 
deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  them- 
selves towards  the  outer  man  of  the  neighboring  com- 
pany, already  deployed  as  skirmishers  ;  or  if  the 
company  has  not  finished  its  deployment,  they  will 
judge  carefully  the  distance  which  may  still  be  re- 
quired to  place  all  these  files  in  line,  and  will  then 
march  on  the  point  thus  marked  out.  The  compa- 
nies, as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  themselves 
on  those  already  deployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow 
the  deployment,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the 
left;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will  place  ihem- 
eelves  near  the  colonel. 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  291 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  estab- 
lished in  echellon  in  the  following  manner:  there- 
serve  of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  one  hundred 
and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company  ; 
the  reserves  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united, 
opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and 
thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth 
company ;  the  reserves  of  the  seventh  and  eighth 
companies,  also  united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their 
line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  farther  to  the 
rear  than  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  com- 
posing the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the 
colonel  to  that  efiect,  will  march  these  companies 
thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them  into 
column  by  company,  at  half  distance  ;  after  which,  he 
will  conduct  the  column  to  the  point  which  shall  have 
been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintend- 
ence of  the  movement ;  and  when  it  is  finished,  will 
move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his  view 
may  best  embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order  to  direct  their 
movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired 
to  deploy  by  the  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth  companies 
will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve  paces,  halted, 
and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  the 
other  on  the  left  file,  by  the  means  already  indicated. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the 
flank;  and  as  soon  as  the  last  file  of  the  company, 
next  towards  the  direction,  shall  have  taken  its  inter- 
val, it  will  be  moved  upon  the  line  established  by  the 
fifth  and  sixth  companies,  halted,  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  battalion  was  in  order  of  battle;  but  if  in 
column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  by  the 
same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  forward^  the 


292  Instruction  for  Skirmishers. 

directing  company,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  "be 
moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indica- 
ted. Each  of  the  other  companies  will  take  its  inter- 
val to  the  right  or  left,  and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is 
taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank, 
the  directing  company  will  be  moved  in  the  same 
manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and 
will  then  be  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank  on  the 
file  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank,  and  when  its  interval  is  taken, 
will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted  and  deployed  as  soon 
as  the  company  next  towards  the  direction  shall  have 
finished  its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves  in 
echellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a 
rally,  be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  injuring 
each  other ;  and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  com- 
panies have  been  united,  in  order  to  diminish  the 
number  of  the  echellons,  and  to  increase  their  capacity 
for  resisting  cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend 
from  right  to  left,  but  they  may,  on  an  indication  from 
the  colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted  on  the  same  prin- 
ciple, so  as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

196.  When  the  color-company  is  to  be  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  the  color,  without  its  guard,  will  be  de- 
tached, and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally, 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  move- 
ments prescribed  for  a  company,  to  be  executed  by  the 
battalion,  and  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same 
signals.  When  he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he 
will  cause  the  rally  on  the  battalion  to  be  sounded, 


Instruction  for  Skirmishers.  293 

and  will  so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to  protect  this  move- 
ment. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will 
be  rallied  in  squares  on  their  respective  reserves; 
each  reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form 
the  first  front  of  the  square,  throwino;  to  the  rear  the 
sections  on  the  flanks ;  the  skirmishers  who  arrive 
first  will  complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the 
fourth  front.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  superin- 
tend the  rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will 
form  them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard  to  height, 
and  cause  them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of 
squares  will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry 
may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by  march- 
ing upon  the  battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing  an  ad- 
vantageous position  ;  to  this  end,  each  of  the  squares 
will  be  formed  into  column,  and  march  in  this  order; 
and  if  threatened  anew,  it  will  halt,  and  again  form 
itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the 
battalion  reserve,  each  will  re-form  as  promptly  as 
possible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or  num- 
ber, take  place  in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  com- 
panies already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion-reserve  will  also  form  square,  if 
itself  threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  com- 
panies marching  towards  it  will  place  themselves 
promptly  in  the  sector's  without  fire,  and  thus  march 
on  the  squares. 


ARTICLE    XII.* 

HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS— INSPEC- 
TIONS—REVIEWS.    Etc. 

Honors  to  he  paid  hy  the  troops. 

730.  Whenever  a  person  entitled  to  compliments 
from  the  troops,  visits  any  tamp  or  military  post,  and 
the  commanding  officer  has  official  notice  of  his  pre- 
sence, the  troops  are  paraded  to  salute  him. 

The  President  or  Vice-President  of  the  Confederate 
States,  and  the  Governor  of  the  State  to  which  the 
troops  belong,  are  to  be  saluted  with  the  highest  hon- 
ors— all  standards  and  colors  drooping,  officers  and 
troops  saluting,  drums  beating  and  trumpets  sounding. 

A  General  commanding-in-chief  is  to  be  received— 
by  cavalry,  with  sabres  presented,  trumpets  sounding 
the  march,  and  all  the  officers  saluting,  standards 
dropping  ;  by  infantry,  with  drums  beating  the  march, 
colors  dropping,  officers  saluting  and  arms  presented. 

A  Major-General  is  to  be  received — by  cavalry,  with 
Babres  presented,  trumpets  sounding  twice  the  trum- 
pet-flourish, and  officers  saluting ;  by  infantry,  with 
three  ruffles,  colors  dropping,  officers  saluting,  and 
arms  presented. 

A  Brigadier-General  is  to  be  received — by  cavalry, 
with  sabres  presented,  trumpets  sounding  once  the 
trumpet-flourish,  and  officers  saluting  ;  by  infantry, 
with  two  ruffles,  colors  dropping,  officers  saluting,  and 
arms  presented. 

♦Gilham's  Manual. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc.         295 

An  Adjutant-General  or  Inspector  General,  if  un- 
der the  rank  of  a  general  officer,  is  to  be  received  at  a 
review  or  inspection  of  the  troops  under  arms — by 
cavalry,  w^ith  sabres  presented,  ofl&cers  saluting  ;  by 
infantry,  officers  saluting  and  arms  presented.  The 
same  honors  to  be  paid  to  any  JBeld  officer  authorized  to 
review  and  inspect  the  troops.  When  the  inspecting 
officer  is  junior  to  the  officer  commanding  the  parade, 
no  compliments  will  be  paid:  he  will  be  received  only 
with  swords  drawn  and  arms  shouldered. 

All  guards  are  to  turn  out  and  present  arms  to  gen- 
eral officers  as  often  as  they  pass  them,  except  the  per- 
sonal guards  of  general  officers,  which  turn  out  only 
to  the  generals  whose  guards  they  are,  and  to  officers 
of  superior  rank. 

To  commanders  of  regiments,  garrison  or  camp, 
their  own  guard  turn  out,  and  present  arms  once  a 
day  ;  after  which  they  turn  out  with  shouldered  arms. 

To  the  members  of  the  Cabinet ;  to  the  Chief  Jus- 
tice, the  President  of  the  Senate,  and  Speaker  of  the 
House  of  Representatives  of  the  Confederate  States ; 
and  to  Governors  within  their  respective  States  and 
Territories,  the  same  honors  will  be  paid  as  to  a  gene- 
ral commanding-in-chief. 

Officers  of  a  foreign  service  may  be  complimented 
with  the  honors  due  to  their  rank. 

Confederate  and  foreign  Envoys  or  Ministers  will 
be  received  with  the  compliments  due  to  a  major- 
general. 

731.  The  colors  of  a  regiment  passing  a  guard  are 
to  be  saluted,  the  trumpets  sounding,  and  the  drums 
beating  a  march. 

When  general  officers,  or  persons  entitled  to  salute, 
pass  in  the  rear  of  a  guard,  the  officer  is  only  to  make 
his  men  stand  shouldered,  and  not  to  face  his  guard 
about,  or  beat  his  drum. 

When  general  officers,  or  persons  entitled  to  a  sa- 
lute, pass  guards  while  in  the  act  of  relieving,  both 


296         Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troopsj  etc. 

guards  are  to  salute,  receiving  the  word  of  command 
from  the  senior  officer  of  the  whole. 

All  guards  are  to  be  under  arms  when  armed 
parties  approach  their  posts  ;  and  to  parties  com- 
manded by  commissioned  officers,  they  are  to  present 
their  arms,  drums  beating  a  march,  and  officers  sa- 
luting. 

No  compliments  by  guards  or  sentinels  will  be  paid 
"between  retreat  and  reveille,  except  as  prescribed  for 
grand  rounds. 

All  guards  and  sentinels  are  to  pay  the  same  com- 
pliments to  the  officers  of  the  navy,  marines  and  mi- 
litia, in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States,  as  are 
directed  to  be  paid  to  the  officers  of.  the  army,  accord- 
ing to  their  relative  ranks. 

It  is  equally  the  duty  of  non-commissioned  officers 
and  soldiers,  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations,  to  pay 
the  proper  compliments  to  officers  of  the  oavy  and 
marines,  and  to  officers  of  other  regiments,  when  in 
uniform,  as  to  officers  of  their  own  particular  regiments 
and  corps. 

Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to 
discipline.  Respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined 
to  obedience  on  duty,  but  will  be  extended  to  all  occa- 
sions. It  is  always  the  duty  of  the  inferior  to  accost 
or  to  offer  first  the  customary  salutation,  and  of  the 
superior  to  return  such  complimentary  notice. 

Sergeants,  with  swords  drawn,  will  salute  by  bring- 
ing them  to  a  present ;  with  muskets,  by  bringing  the 
left  hand  across  the  body,  so  as  to  strike  the  musket 
near  the  right  shoulder.  Corporals  out  of  the  ranks, 
and  privates  not  sentries,  will  carry  their  muskets  at  a 
shoulder  as  sergeants,  and  salute  in  like  manner. 

When  a  soldier  without  arms,  or  with  side-arms 
only,  meets  an  officer,  he  is  to  raise  his  hand  to  the 
right  side  of  the  visor  of  his  cap,  palm  to  the  front, 
elbow  raised  as  high  as  the  shoulder,  looking  at  the 
same  time  in  a  respectful  and  soldier-like  manner  at 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc.         297 

the  officer,  who  will  return  the  compliment  thus  of- 
fered. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  being  seated, 
and  without  particular  occupation,  will  rise  on  the 
approach  of  an  officer,  and  make  the  customary  salu- 
tation. If  standing,  he  will  turn  toward  the  officer 
for  the  same  purpose.  If  the  parties  remain  in  the 
same  place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such  compliment 
need  not  be  repeated. 

Artillery  Salutes, 

732.  The  President  of  the  Confederate  States  and 
the  Governor  of  the  State  to  which  the  troops  belong, 
to  receive  a  salute  of  twenty-one  guns. 

The  Vice-President  is  to  receive  a  salute  of  seven- 
teen guns. 

The  Heads  of  the  great  Executive  Departments  of 
the  National  Government;  the  General  commanding 
the  army;  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  the  State  to 
which  the  troops  belong ;  the  Governors  of  other 
States  and  Territories,  fifteen  guns. 

A  Major-General,  thirteen  guns. 

A  Brigadier-General,  eleven  guns. 

Foreign  ships-of-war  will  be  saluted  in  return  for  a 
similar  compliment,  gun  for  gun,  on  notice  being 
officially  received  of  such  intention.  If  there  be  sev- 
eral posts  in  sight  of,  or  within  six  miles  of  each  other, 
the  principal  only  shall  reciprocate  compliments  with 
ships  passing. 

Officers  of  the  Navy  will  be  saluted  according  to 
relative  rank. 

Foreign  Officers  invited  to  visit  a  fort  or  post  may 
be  saluted  according  to  their  relative  rank. 

Envoys  and  Ministers  of  the  Confederate  States 
and  foreign  Powers,  are  to  be  saluted  with  thirteen 
guns. 

A  general  officer  will  be  saluted  but  once  in  a  year 


298         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc. 

at  each  post,  and  only  when  notice  of  his  intention  to 
visit  the  post  has  been  given. 

Salutes  to  individuals  are  to  be  fired  on  their  arri- 
val only. 

Escorts  of  Honor. 

733.  Eacorts  of  honor  may  be  composed  of  cavalry 
or  infantry,  or  both,  according  to  circumstances.  They 
are  guards  of  honor  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  and 
escorting  personages  of  high  rank,  civil  or  military. 
The  troops,  for  this  purpose,  will  be  selected  for  their 
soldierly  appearance  and  superior  discipline. 

The  escort  will  be  drawn  up  in  line,  the  centre  op- 
posite to  the  place  where  the  personage  presents  him- 
self, with  an  interval  between  the  wings  to  receive 
him  and  his  retinue.  On  his  appearance,  he  will  bo 
received  with  the  honors  due  to  his  rank.  When  he 
has  taken  his  place  in  the  line,  the  whole  will  be 
wheeled  into  platoons  or  companies,  as  the  case  may 
be,  and  take  up  the  march.  The  same  ceremony  will 
be  observed,  and  the  same  honors  paid,  on  his  leaving 
the  escort. 

When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable 
distance  from  the  point  where  he  is  expected  to  be  re- 
ceived, as,  for  instance,  where  a  court-yard  or  wharf 
intervenes,  a  double  line  of  sentinels  will  be  posted 
from  that  point  to  the  escort,  facing  inward,  and  the 
sentinels  will  successively  salute  as  he  passes. 

An  oflBcer  will  be  appointed  to  attend  him,  to  bear 
such  communications  as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the 
commander  of  the  escort. 

Funeral  Honors. 

734.  The  funeral  escort  of  a  General  conimanding- 
in-chief,  shall  consist  of  a  regiment  of  infantry,  a 
squadron  of  cavalry,  and  six  pieces  of  artillery. 


Honors  Paid  hy  ihe  Troopsj  etc.         299 

That  of  a  Mojor-General,  a  regiment  of  infantry, 
a  squadron  of  cavalry,  and  four  pieces  of  artillery. 

That  of  a  Brigadier-General,  a  regiment  of  infan- 
try, one  company  of  cavalry,  and  two  pieces  of  ar- 
tillt^ry. 

That  of  a  Colonel,  a  regiment. 

That  of  a  Lieutenant-Colonel,  six  companies. 

That  of  a  Major,  four  companies. 

That  of  a  Captain,  one  company. 

That  of  a  Subaltern,  half  a  company. 

The  funeral  escort  shall  alwaj's  be  commanded  by 
an  oflBcer  of  the  same  rank  with  the  deceased  ;  or,  if 
none  such  be  present,  by  one  of  the  next  inferior 
grade. 

The  funeral  escort  of  a  non-commissioned  staff  offi- 
cer shall  consist  of  sixteen  rank  and  file,  commanded 
by  a  sergeant. 

That  of  a  sergeant,  of  fourteen  rank  and  file,  com- 
manded by  a  sergeant. 

That  of  a  corporal,  of  twelve  rank  and  file,  com- 
manded by  a  corporal;  and, 

That  of  a  private,  of  eight  rank  and  file,  com- 
manded by  a  corporal. 

The  escort  will  be  formed  in  two  ranks,  opposite  to 
the  quarters  or  tent  of  the  deceased,  with  shouldered 
arms  and  bayonets  unfixed  ;  the  artillery  and  cavalry 
on  the  right  of  the  infantry. 

On  the  appearance  of  the  corpse,  the  officer  com- 
manding the  escort  will  command : 

Present — Arms  ; 

when  the  honors  due  to  the  deceased  will  be  paid  by 
the  drums  and  trumpets.  The  music  will  then  play 
an  appropriate  air,  and  the  coffin  will  then  be  taken 
to  the  right,  where  it  will  be  halted.  The  commander 
will  next  order : 


300         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.  2.  Bj/  company  (or  platoon)  left 
wheel.  3.  March.  4.  Eeverse — Arms.  5.  Column, 
forward.     6.   Guide  right.     7.  March. 

The  arms  will  be  reversed  at  the  order  by  bringing 
the  firelock  under  the  left  arm,  butt  to  the  front,  bar- 
rel downward,  left  hand  sustaining  the  lock,  the  right 
steadying  the  firelock  behind  the  back  ;  swords  are 
reversed  in  a  similar  manner  under  the  right  arm. 

The  column  will  be  marched  in  slow  time  to  solemn 
music,  and,  on  reaching  the  grave,  will  take  a  direc- 
tion so  that  the  guides  shall  be  next  to  the  grave. 
When  the  centre  of  the  column  is  opposite  the  grave, 
the  commander  will  order ; 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt.     3.  Right  into  line,  wheel. 
4.  March. 

The  cofi&n  is  then  brought  along  the  front,  to  the 
opposite  side  of  the  grave,  and  the  commander  then 
orders : 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.     2.  Present — Arms. 

And  when  the  coffin  reaches  the  grave,  he  adds : 
1.  Shoulder— A-Riis.     2.  Rest  on — Arms. 

The  rest  on  arms  is  done  by  placing  the  muzzle  on 
the  left  foot,  both  hands  on  the  butt,  the  head  on  the 
hands  or  bowed,  right  knee  bent. 

After  the  funeral  service  is  performed,  and  the 
coffin  is  lowered  into  the  grave,  the  commander  will 
order : 

1,  Attention.     2.  Shoulder — Arms.     8.  Load  at  will. 
4.  Load. 

When  three  rounds  of  small  arms  will  be  fired  bj 
the  escort,  taking  care  to  elevate  the  pieces. 


I 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troopsy  etc,         301 
This  being  done,  the  commander  will  order: 

1.  By  company    (or  platoon),   rigJU  wheel.      2.    March. 
3.    Colu7nn,  forward.     4.   Guide  left.     5.   Quick— March. 

The  music  will  not  begin  to  play  until  the  escort  is 
clear  of  the  enclosure. 

^  When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  con- 
siderable, the  escort  may  march  in  common  time  and 
in  column  of  route,  after  leaving  the  camp  or  garri- 
son, and  till  it  approaches  the  burial-ground. 

The  pall-bearers,  six  in  number,  will  be  selected 
from  the  grade  of  the  deceased,  or  from  the  grade  or 
grades  next  above  or  below  it. 

At  the  funeral  of  an  officer,  as  many  in  commission 
of  the  army,  division,  brigade,  or  regiment,  according 
to  the  rank  of  the  deceased,  as  can  conveniently  be 
spared  from  other  duties,  will  join  in  procession,  in 
uniform,  and  with  side-arms.  The  funeral  of  a  non- 
commissioned officer  or  private  will  be  attended,  in 
like  manner,  by  the  non-commissioned  officers  or 
privates  of  the  regiment  or  company,  according  to  the 
rank  of  the  deceased,  with  side-arms  only. 

Persons  joining  in  the  procession  follow  the  coffin 
in  the  inverse  order  of  their  rank. 

The  usual  badge  of  military  mourning  is  a  piece  of 
black  crape  around  the  left  arm,  above  the  elbow,  and 
also  upon  the  sword-hilt;  and  will  be  worn  when  in 
full  or  in  undress. 

As  family  mourning,  crape  will  be  worn  by  officers 
(when  in  uniform)  only  around  the  left  arm. 

The  drums  of  a  funeral  escort  will  be  covered  with 
black  crape,  or  thin  black  serge. 

Funeral  honors  will  be  paid  to  deceased  officers 
without  military  rank  according  to  their  assimilated 
grades. 

26 


302         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc. 

Inspections  of  the  Troops. 

735.  Tho  inspection  of  troops,  as  a  division,  regi- 
ment, or  other  body  composing  a  garrison  or  command, 
not  less  than  a  company,  will  generally  be  preceded 
by  a  review. 

Form  of  inspection  for  infantry. 

The  present  example  embraces  a  battalion  of  infan- 
try. The  inspecting  oflScer  and  the  field  and  staff 
officers  will  be  oa  foot. 

The  battalion  being  in  the  order  of  battle,  the  colo- 
nel will  cause  it  to  break  into  open  column  of  compa- 
nies, right  in  front.  He  will  next  order  the  ranks  to 
be  opened,  when  the  color-rank  and  color-guard,  under 
the  direction  of  the  adjutant,  will  take  post  ten  paces 
in  front,  and  the  band  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  column. 

The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command  : 

1.   Officers  and  sergeants,   to  the  front  of  your  companies. 
2.  March. 

The  officers  will  form  themselves  in  one  rank,  eight 
paces,  and  the  non-commissioned  officers  in  one  rank, 
six  paces,  in  advance,  along  the  whole  fronts  of  their 
respective  companies,  from  right  to  left,  in  the  order 
of  seniority  ;  the  pioneers  and  music  of  each  company, 
in  one  rank,  two  paces  behind  the  non-commissioned 
officers. 

The  colonel  will  next  command : 

Field  and  staff,  to  the  front — March. 

The  commissioned  officers  thus  designated  will  form 
themselves  in  one  rank,  on  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of 
the  column,  six  paces  in  front  of  the  colors,  from  right 
to  left,  in  the  order  of  seniority;  and  the  non-commis- 
eioned  staff,  in  a  similar  manner,  two  paces  in  rear  of 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc.         303 

the  preceding  rank.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  move- 
ment executed,  will  take  post  on  the  right  of  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  and  wait  the  approach  of  the  in- 
specting officer.  But  such  of  the  field  officers  as  may 
be  superior  in  rank  to  the  inspector  will  not  take  post 
in  front  of  the  battalion. 

The  inspector  will  commence  in  front.  After  in- 
specting the  dress  and  general  appearance  of  the  field 
and  commissioned  stafi"  under  arms,  the  inspector, 
accompanied  by  these  officers,  will  pass  down  the  open 
column,  looking  at  every  rank  in  front  and  rear. 

The  colonel  will  now  command  : 

1.   Order — Arms.     2.  Rest; 

when  the  inspector  will  proceed  to  make  a  minute 
inspection  of  the  several  ranks  or  divisions,  in  succes- 
sion, commencing  in  front. 

As  the  inspector  approaches  the  non-commissioned 
staff,  color-rank,  the  color-guard,  and  the  band,  the 
adjutant  will  give  the  necessary  orders  for  the  inspec- 
tion of  arms,  boxes,  and  knapsacks.  The  colors  will 
be  planted  firm  in  the  ground,  to  enable  the  color- 
bearers  to  display  the  contents  of  their  knapsacks. 
The  non-commissioned  staff  may  be  dismissed  as  soon 
as  inspected  ;  but  the  color-rank  and  color-guard  will 
remain  until  the  colors  are  to  be  escorted  to  the  place 
from  which  they  were  taken. 

As  the  inspector  successively  approaches  the  compa- 
nies, the  captains  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Company.     3.  Inspection — Arms. 

The  inspecting  officer  will  then  go  through  the 
whole  company,  and  minutely  inspect  the  arms,  accou- 
trements, and  dress  of  each  soldier.  After  this  is 
done,  the  captain  will  command: 

Open — Boxes  ; 

when  the  ammunition  and  the  boxes  will  be  examined. 


304         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

The  captain  ■will  then  command : 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.  2.  Close  order.  3.  March.  4. 
Order — Arms.  6,  Slack — Arms.  6.  7b  the  rear,  open 
order.  7.  March.  8.  Front  rank — About — Fack. 
9.    Unsling — Knapsacks.     10.   Open — Knapsacks. 

The  sergeants  will  face  inward  at  the  second  com- 
mand, and  close  upon  the  centre  at  the  third,  and  stack 
their  arms  at  the  fifth  command  ;  at  the  sixth  com- 
mand they  face  outward,  and  resume  their  positions  at 
the  seventh.  When  the  ranks  are  closed,  preparatory 
to  take  arms,  the  sergeants  will  also  close  upon  the 
centre,  and  at  the  word,  take  their  arms  and  resume 
their  places. 

The  knapsacks  will  be  placed  at  the  feet  of  the  men, 
the  flaps  from  them,  with  the  great-coats  on  the  flaps, 
and  the  knapsacks  leaning  on  the  great-coats.  In  this 
position  the  inspector  will  examine  their  contents,  or 
so  many  of  them  as  he  may  think  necessary,  com- 
mencing with  the  non-commissioned  officers,  the  men 
standing  at  attention. 

When  the  inspector  has  passed  through  the  com- 
pany, the  captain  will  command  : 

Repack — Knapsacks  ; 

when  each  soldier  will  repack  and  buckle  up  his  knap- 
sack, leaving  it  on  the  ground,  the  number  upward, 
turned  from  him,  and  then  stand  at  rest. 
The  captain  will  then  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.    Company.     3.  Sling — Knapsacks. 

At  the  word  sling,  each  soldier  will  take  his  knap- 
sack, holding  it  by  the  inner  straps,  and  stand  erect; 
at  the  last  word  he  will  replace  it  on  his  back.  The 
captain  will  continue : 

4.  Front  rank — About — Face.  5.  Close  order.  6.  March. 
7.  Take — Arms.  8.  Shoulder — Arms.  9.  Officers  and 
Sergeants  to  your  posts.     10.  March. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops ^  etc.         305 

And  will  cause  the  company  to  file  oflf  to  their  tents  or 
quarters,  except  the  company  that  is  to  re-escort  the 
colors,  which  will  await  the  further  orders  of  the 
colonel. 

In  an  extensive  column,  some  of  the  rearmost  com- 
panies may,  after  the  inspection  of  dress,  and  general 
appearance,  be  permitted  to  stack  anns  until  just  before 
the  inspector  approaches  them,  when  thej  will  be  di- 
rected to  take  arms  and  resume  their  position. 

The  inspection  of  the  troops  being  ended,  the  field 
and  staff  will  next  accompany  the  inspector  to  the 
hospital,  magazine,  arsenal,  quarters,  sutler's  shop, 
guard-house,  and  such  other  places  as  he  may  think 
proper  to  inspect.  The  captains  and  subalterns  repair 
to  their  companies  and  sections  to  await  the  inspector. 

The  hospital  being  at  all  times  an  object  of  particular 
interest,  it  will  be  critically  and  minutely  inspected. 

The  men  will  be  formed  in  the  company  quarters  in 
front  of  their  respective  bunks,  and  on  the  entrance  of 
the  inspector  the  word  attention  will  be  given  by  the 
senior  non-commissioned  officer  present,  when  the 
whole  will  salute  with  the  hand  without  uncovering. 

The  inspector,  attended  by  the  company  officers, 
will  examine  the  general  arrangement  of  the  interior 
of  the  quarters,  the  bunks,  bedding,  cooking,  and 
table  utensils,  and  such  other  objects  as  may  present 
themselves  ;  and  afterwards  the  exterior. 

The  adjutant  will  exhibit  to  the  inspector  the  regi- 
mental books  and  papers,  including  those  relating  to 
the  transactions  of  the  Council  of  Administration. 
The  company  books  and  papers  will  also  be  exhibited, 
the  whole  together,  generally  at  the  adjutant's  office, 
and  in  the  presence  of  the  officers  not  otherwise  par- 
ticularly engaged. 

The  inspector  will  examine  critically  the  books  and 
accounts  of  the  administrative  and  disbursing  officers 
of  the  command,  and  the  money  and  property  in  their 
keeping. 


306         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc. 


FORMS    OF    PARADE. 

737.  On  all  parades  of  ceremony,  such  as  Reviews, 
Guard-mounting,  at  Trooj)  or  Retreat  parades,  instead 
of  the  word  rest^  which  allows  the  men  to  move  or 
change  the  position  of  their  bodies,  the  command  will 
hQ  parade — rest.  At  the  last  word  of  this  command, 
the  soldier  will  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  in  the 
rear  of  the  left  heel,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent,  the 
body  upright  upon  the  right  leg;  the  musket  resting 
against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  the  hands 
crossed  in  front,  the  backs  of  them  outward,  and  the 
left  hand  uppermost.  At  the  word  attention,  the  sol- 
dier will  resume  the  correct  position  at  ordered  arms. 
In  the  positions  here  indicated,  the  soldier  will  remain 
silent  and  motionless  ;  and  it  is  particularly  enjoined 
upon  all  officers  to  cause  the  commands  above  given, 
on  the  part  of  the  soldier,  to  be  executed  with  great 
briskness  and  spirit. 

Officers  on  all  duties  under  arms  are  to  have  their 
swords  drawn,  without  waiting  for  any  words  of  com- 
mand for  that  purpose. 

*  To  form  the  regiment  or  battalion. 

297.  At  the  signal,  called  the  Adjutant's  call,  the 
companies  are  marched  from  the  company  parades  by 
their  captains,  the  music  playing.  The  color-company 
serves  as  the  basis  of  the  formation,  and  is  the  first  to 
form  ;  the  color-guard  being  at  the  point  where  the 
centre  of  the  line  is  to  rest,  one  marker  is  placed  in 
front  of  it,  his  right  elbow  touching  the  right  corporal 
of  the  color-guard,  and  another  on  the  line  at  a  little 
less  than  company  distance  from  him,  on  his  right,  and 
facing  towards  him  ;  the  color-company  is  halted  three 

*  From  Gilham's  Manual.    See  School  of  the  Battalion,  No.  297. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc.         307 

paces  behind  this  line,  faced  to  the  front  and  dressed 
up  upon  the  line  by  the  captain,  who  aligns  it  to  the 
left. 

The  company  on  the  left  of  the  color  is  the  next  to 
take  its  post;  it  is  halted  three  paces  behind  the  line, 
its  right  nearly  behind  the  left  file  of  the  color-guard, 
and  faced  to  the  front ;  as  soon  as  it  halts  the  left 
guide  of  the  company  throws  himself  out,  so  as  to  be 
opposite  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  company, 
faces  to  the  right,  and  aligns  himself  upon  the  two 
markers  ;  the  captain  then  places  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  color-guard,  on  a  line  with  its  front  rank,  and 
aligns  the  company  to  the  right.  The  company  on 
the  right  of  the  colors,  forms  next,  upon  the  same 
principles  ;  the  right  guide  posts  himself  upon  the 
line  opposite  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  the  com- 
pany, and  faces  to  the  left ;  the  captain  places  himself 
on  the  right  of  the  color-company,  and  aligns  his  com- 
pany to  the  left. 

The  remaining  companies  take  their  posts  on  the 
left  and  right  in  succession,  and  when  the  formation 
is  complete,  the  adjutant  commands:  Guides  iiosts  ; 
at  this  command,  the  guides  on  the  line  retire  to  their 
places  by  passing  through  the  intervals  between  com- 
panies, and  those  captains  who  are  on  the  left  of  their 
companies,  shift  to  the  right. 

Dress  'parade. 

738.  There  shall  be  daily  one  dress  parade,  at  troop 
or  retreat,  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 

A  signal  will  be  beat  or  sounded  half  an  hour  before 
troop  or  retreat,  for  the  music  to  assemble  on  regimental 
parade,  and  each  company  to  turn  out  under  arms  on 
its  own  parade,  for  roll-call  and  inspection  by  its  own 
oflBcers. 

Ten  minutes  after  that  signal,  the  Adjutant's  call 
will  be  given,  when  the  captains  will  march  their  com- 


308         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

panies  (the  band  playing)  to  the  regimental  parade, 
where  they  take  their  positions  in  line  as  directed,  No. 
297.  When  the  line  is  formed,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company,  on  notice  from  the  adjutant,  steps  one  pace 
to  the  front,  and  gives  to  his  company  the  command, 
order  arms;  parade — rest ;  which  is  repeated  by  each 
captain  in  succession  to  the  left.  The  adjutant  takes 
post  two  paces  on  the  right  of  the  line  ;  the  sergeant- 
major  two  paces  on  the  left.  The  music  will  be  formed 
in  two  ranks  on  the  right  of  the  adjutant.  The  senior 
officer  present  will  take  the  command  of  the  parade, 
and  will  take  post  at  a  suitable  distance  in  front,  oppo- 
site the  centre,  facing  the  line. 

When  the  companies  have  ordered  arms,  the  adju- 
tant will  order  the  music  to  beat  off,  when  it  will  com- 
mence on  the  right,  beat  in  front  of  the  line  to  the 
left,  and  back  to  its  place  on  the  right. 

When  the  music  has  ceased,  the  adjutant  will  step 
two  paces  to  the  front,  face  to  the  left,  and  command : 

1.  Attention.  2.  Battalion.  3.  Shoulder — Arms.  4.  Pre- 
pare to  open  ranks.     5.  To  the  rear  open  order.    6.  March. 

At  the  sixth  command,  the  ranks  will  be  opened 
according  to  the  system  laid  down  in  the  Infantry 
Tactics,  the  commissioned  officers  marching  to  the 
front,  the  company  officers  four  paces,  field  officers  six 
paces,  opposite  to  their  positions  in  the  order  of  battle, 
where  they  will  halt  and  dress.  The  adjutant,  seeing 
the  ranks  aligned,  will  command  : 

Front, 

and  march  along  the  front  to  the  centre,  face  to  the 
right,  and  pass  the  line  of  company  officers  eight  or 
ten  paces,  when  he  will  come  to  the  right  about,  and 
command : 

Present — Arms  ; 

when  arms  will  be  presented,  officers  saluting. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc.         309 

Seeing  this  executed,  he  will  face  about  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  salute,  and  report,  "  Sir,  the  parade 
•is  formed.^'  The  adjutant  will  then,  on  intimation  to 
that  effect,  take  his  station  three  paces  on  the  left  of 
the  commanding  officer,  one  pace  retired,  passing 
round  his  rear. 

The  commanding  officer,  having  acknowledged  the 
salute  of  the  line  by  touching  his  hat,  will,  after  the 
adjutant  has  taken  his  post,  draw  his  sword,  and  com- 
mand : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Shoulder — Arms  ; 

and  add  such  exercises  as  he  may  think  proper,  con- 
cluding with : 

Order — Arms  ; 

then  return  his  sword,  and  direct  the  adjutant  to  re- 
ceive the  reports. 

The  adjutant  will  now  pass  round  the  right  of  the 
commanding  officer,  advance  upon  the  line,  halt  mid- 
way between  him  and  the  line  of  company  officers, 
and  command : 

1.  First  sergeants^  to  the  front  and  centre.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  they  will  shoulder  arms  as 
sergeants,  march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and  face  in- 
ward. At  the  second  command,  they  will  march  to 
the  centre,  and  halt.     The  adjutant  will  then  order: 

1.  Front — Face.     2.  Report. 

"  At  the  last  word,  each  in  succession,  beginning  on 
the  right,  will  salute  by  bringing  the  left  hand  smartly 
across  the  breast  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  report  the 
result  of  the  roll-call  previously  made  on  the  company 
parade. 

The  adjutant  again  commands : 


310         Honors  Paid  hy  the   TroojjSj  etc. 

1.  First  sergeants,   outward — Face.     2.  To  your  posts — 
March  ; 

* 
■when  they  will  resume  their  places,  and  order  arms. 
The  adjutant  will  now  face  to  the  commanding  officer, 
salute,  report  absent  officers,  and  give  the  result  of 
the  first  sergeant's  reports.  The  commanding  officer 
will  next  direct  the  orders  to  be  read,  when  the  adju- 
tant will  face  about,  and  announce : 

Attention  to  Orders. 

He  will  then  read  the  orders. 

The  orders  having  been  read,  the  adjutant  will  face 
to  the  commanding  officer,  salute,  and  report;  when, 
on  an  intimation  from  the  commander,  he  will  face 
again  to  the  line,  and  announce  : 

Parade  is  dismissed. 

All  the  officers  will  now  return  their  swords,  face 
inward,  and  close  on  the  adjutant,  he  having  taken 
position  in  their  line,  the  field  officers  on  the  flanks. 
The  adjutant  commands: 

1.  Front — Face.     2.  Forward — March  ; 

when  they  will  march  forward,  dressing  on  the  centre, 
the  music  playing,  and  when  within  six  paces  of  the 
commander,  the  adjutant  will  give  the  word: 

Halt. 

The  officers  will  then  salute  the  commanding  officer  by 
raising  the  hand  to  the  cap,  and  there  remain  until  he 
shall  have  communicated  to  them  such  instructions  as 
he  may  have  to  give,  or  intimates  that  the  ceremony  is 
finished.  As  the  officers  disperse,  the  first  sergeants 
will  close  the  ranks  of  their  respective  companies,  and 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops ^  etc.         311 

march  them  to  the  company  parades,  where  they  will 
be  dismissed,  the  band  continuing  to  play  until  the 
companies  clear  the  regimental  parade. 

All  field  and  company  officers  and  men  will  be 
present  at  dress  parades,  unless  especially  excused,  or 
on  some  duty  incompatible  with  such  attendance. 

A  dress  parade  once  a  day  will  not  be  dispensed 
with,  except  on  extraordinary  and  urgent  occasions. 

Review  of  a  battalion  of  infantry. 

739.  Preparatory  to  a  review,  the  adjutant  will  cause 
a  camp  color  to  be  placed  80  or  100  paces,  or  more, 
according  to  the  length  of  the  line,  in  front  of,  and 
opposite  to,  where  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  rest, 
where  the  reviewing  ofl5cer  is  supposed  to  take  his  sta- 
tion ;  and,  although  he  may  choose  to  quit  that  posi- 
tion, still  the  color  is  to  be  considered  as  the  point  to 
which  all  the  movements  and  formations  are  relative. 

The  adjutant  will  also  cause  points  to  be  marked  at 
suitable  distances,  for  the  wheelings  of  the  divisions ; 
so  that  their  right  flanks,  in  marching  past,  shall  only 
be  about  four  paces  from  the  camp-color,  where  it  is 
supposed  the  reviewing  officer  places  himself  to  receive 
the  salute. 

The  battalion  being  formed  in  the  order  of  battle,  at 
sJiouldered  arms,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Battalion,  prepare  for  review.     2.   To  the  rear  open  order. 
3.  March. 

At  the  word  march,  the  field  and  stafi"  officers  dis- 
mount;  the  company  officers  and  the  color-rank  ad- 
vance four  paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank,  and  place 
themselves  opposite  to  their  respective  places,  in  the 
order  of  battle.  The  color-guard  replace  the  color- 
rank.  The  staff  officers  place  themselves,  according 
to  rank,  three  paces  on  the  right  of  the  rank  of  com- 
pany officers,  and  one  pace  from  each  other ;  the  music 


312         Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc. 

takes  post  as  at  a  parade.  The  non-commissioned  staff 
take  post  one  pace  from  each  other,  and  three  paces  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

AVhen  the  ranks  are  aligned,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Feont ; 

and  place  himself  eight  paces,  and  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  two  paces,  in 
front  of  the  rank  of  company  officers,  and  opposite  to 
their  respective  places  in  the  order  of  battle,  all  facing 
to  the  front. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  presents  himgfelf  before 
the  centre,  and  is  fifty  or  sixty  paces  distant,  the  col- 
onel will  face  about,  and  command : 

Present — Arms  ; 

and  resume  his  front.  The  men  present  arms,  and  the 
officers  salute,  so  as  to  drop  their  swords  with  the  last 
motion  of  the  firelock.  The  non-commissioned  staff 
salute  by  bringing  the  sword  to  a  poise,  the  hilt  rest- 
ing on  the  breast,  the  blade  in  front  of  the  face,  inclin- 
ing a  little  outward.  The  music  will  play,  and  all  the 
drums  beat,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  reviewing 
officer.  The  colors  only  salute  such  persons  as,  from 
their  rank,  and  by  regulation  (see  No.  730),  are  enti- 
tled to  that  honor.  If  the  reviewing  officer  be  junior 
in  rank  to  the  commandant  of  the  parade,  no  compli- 
ment will  be  paid  to  him,  but  he  will  be  received  with 
arms  carried,  and  the  officers  will  not  salute  as  the 
column  passes  in  review. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  halted,  and  acknow- 
ledged the  salute  of  the  line  by  touching  or  raising 
his  cap  or  hat,  the  colonel  will  face  about  and  com- 
mand : 

Shoulder — Aems  ; 

when  the  men  shoulder  their  pieces  ;  the  officers  and 


Honors  Paid  hi/  the   Troops,  etc.         313 

non-commissioned  staff  recover  their  swords  with  the 
last  motion,  and  the  colonel  Aices  to  the  front. 

The  reviewing  officer  will  then  go  towards  the  right, 
the  whole  remaining  perfectly  steady,  without  paying 
any  further  compliment,  while  he  passes  along  the 
front  of  the  battalion,  and  proceeds  round  the  left 
flank,  and  along  the  rear  of  the  file-closers  to  the  right. 
While  the  reviewing  officer  is  going  round  the  battalion, 
the  band  will  play,  and  will  cease  when  he  has  returned 
to  the  right  flank  of  the  troops. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  turns  off,  to  place  him- 
self by  the  camp-color  in  front,  the  colonel  will  face 
to  the  line  and  command  : 

1.   Close  order.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  field  and  company  officers 
will  face  to  the  right  about,  and  at  the  second  com- 
mand, all  persons,  except  the  colonel,  will  resume 
their  'places  in  the  order  of  battle  ;  the  field  and  staff 
officers  mount. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  taken  his  position  near 
the  camp-color,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Bt/  company,  right  toheel.  2.  Quicl< — Mapcht.  3.  Pass 
in  review.  4.  Column,  forward.  5.  Guide  right.  6. 
March. 

The  battalion,  in  column  of  companies,  right  in 
front,  will  then,  in  common  time,  and  at  shouldered 
arms,  be  put  in  motion  ;  the  colonel  four  paces  in 
front  of  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  ;  the 
lieutenant-colonel  on  a  line  with  the  leading  company  ; 
the  major  on  a  line  with  the  rear  company ;  the  adju- 
tant on  a  line  with  the  second  company  ;  the  sergeant- 
major  on  a  line  with  the  company  next  preceding  the 
rear;  each  six  paces  from  the  flank  (left)  opposite  to 
the  reviewing  officer ;  the  staff  officers  in  one  rank, 
according  to  the  order  of  precedency,  from  the  right, 
four  paces  in  rear  of  the  column  ;  the  music,  preceded 
by  the  principal  musician,  six  paces  before  the  colo- 
27 


314         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc. 

nel ;  the  pioneers,  preceded  by  a  corporal,  four  paces 
before  the  principal  musician  ;  and  the  quartermaster- 
sergeant  two  paces  from  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides, 
and  in  line  with  the  pioneers. 

All  other  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will 
march  past  in  the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  the 
march  of  an  open  column.  The  guides  and  soldiers 
will  keep  their  heads  steady  to  the  front  in  passing  in 
review. 

The  color-bearer  will  remain  in  the  ranks  while 
passing  and  saluting. 

The  music  will  begin  to  play  at  the  command  to 
march,  and  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  wheel 
to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  and  take  a  position  op- 
posite and  facing  him,  and  will  continue  to  play  until 
the  rear  of  th€  column  shall  have  passed  him,  when 
it  will  cease,  and  follow  in  the  rear  of  the  battalion, 
unless  the  battalion  is  to  pass  in  qiiick  time  also,  in 
which  case  it  will  keep  its  position. 

The  officers  will  salute  the  reviewing  officer  when 
they  arrive  within  six  paces  of  him,  and  recover  their 
swords  when  six  paces  past  him.  All  officers,  in  sa- 
luting, will  cast  their  eyes  towards  the  reviewing 
officer. 

The  colonel,  when  he  has  saluted  at  the  head  of  the 
battalion,  will  place  himself  near  the  reviewing  officer, 
and  will  remain  there  until  the  rear  has  passed,  when 
he  will  rejoin  the  battalion. 

The  colors  will  salute  the  reviewing  officer,  if  enti- 
tled to  it,  when  within  six  paces  of  him,  and  be  raised 
when  they  have  passed  by  him  an  equal  distance. 
The  drums  will  beat  a  march,  or  ruffle,  according  to 
the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer,  at  the  same  time 
that  the  colors  salute. 

When  the  column  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer, 
the  colonel  will  direct  it  to  the  ground  it  marched 
from,  and  command  : 

Guide  left ; 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc.         315 

in  time  for  the  guides  to  cover.  The  column  having 
arrived  on  its  ground,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Column.     2,   Halt  ; 

form  it  in  order  of  battle,  and  cause  the  ranks  to  be 
opened.  The  review  will  terminate  by  the  whole  sa- 
luting as  at  the  beginning. 

If,  however,  instructions  have  been  previously  given 
to  march  the  troops  past  in  quick  time  also,  the  colonel 
will,  instead  of  changing  the  guides,  halting  the 
column,  and  wheeling  it  into  line,  as  above  directed, 
give  the  command : 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

In  passing  the  reviewing  officer  again,  no  salute  will 
be  offered  by  either  officers  or  men.  The  music  will 
have  kept  its  position  opposite  the  reviewing  officer, 
and  at  the  last  command  will  commence  playing,  and, 
as  the  column  approaches,  will  place  itself  in  front  of, 
and  march  off  with  the  column,  and  continue  to  play 
until  the  battalion  is  halted  on  its  original  ground  of 
formation.  The  review  will  terminate  in  the  same 
manner  as  prescribed  above.* 

The  colonel  will  afterwards  cause  the  troops  to  per- 
form such  exercises  and  manoeuvres  as  the  reviewing 
officer  may  direct. 

When  two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  reviewed, 
they  will  be  formed  in  parade  order,  with  the  proper 
intervals,  and  will  also  perforin  the  same  movements 
that  are  laid  down  for  a  single  battalion,  observing  the 
additional  directions  that  are  given  for  such  move- 
ments when  applied  to  the  line.  The  brigadier  gene- 
ral and  his  staff,  on  foot,  will  place  themselves  opposite 


*  Or  the  battalion  may  pass  a  third  time  at  double  quick,  and 
then  re-form. 


316  Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

the  centre  of  the  brin;ade  ;  the  brigadier-t];eneral  two 
paces  in  front  of  the  rank  of  colonels  ;  his  aid  two 
paces  on  his  rij^jht,  and  one  retired  ;  and  the  other 
brigade  staff  officers,  those  having  the  rank  of  field 
officers,  in  the  rank  of  lieutenant  colonels  and  majors; 
and  those  below  that  rank,  in  the  rank  of  company 
officers. 

In  passing  in  review,  a  major-general  will  be  four 
paces  in  front  of  the  colonel  of  the  leading  battalion 
of  his  division  ;  and  the  brigadier-general  will  be  on 
the  right  of  the  colonels  of  the  leading  battalions  of 
their  brigades;  staff  officers  on  the  left  of  their  gen- 
erals. 

When  the  line  exceeds  two  battalions,  the  reviewing 
officer  may  cause  them  to  march  past  in  quick  time 
only.  In  such  cases  the  mounted  officers  only  will 
salute. 

A  number  of  companies  leas  than  a  battalion  will 
be  reviewed  as  a  battalion,  and  a  single  company  as 
if  it  were  with  the  battalion.  In  the  latter  case,  the 
company  may  pass  in  column  of  platoons. 

If  the  several  brigades  are  to  be  reviewed  together, 
or  in  one  line,  this  further  difference  will  be  observed  : 
the  reviewing  personage,  joined  by  the  general  of  the 
division,  on  the  right  of  his  division,  will  proceed 
down  the  line,  parallel  to  its  front,  and  when  near  the 
brigadier-generals  respectively,  will  be  saluted  by 
their  brigades  in  succession.  The  music  of  each, 
after  the  prescribed  salute,  will  play  while  the  review- 
ing personage  is  in  front,  or  in  rear  of  it,  and  only 
then. 

In  marching  in  review,  with  several  battalions  in 
common  time,  the  music  of  each  succeeding  battalion 
will  commence  to  play  when  the  music  of  the  prece- 
ding one  has  ceased,  in  order  to  follow  its  battalion. 
When  marching  in  quick  time,  the  music  will  begin 
to  play  when  the  rear  company  of  the  preceding  bat- 
talion has  passed  the  reviewing  officer. 


Honors  Paid  ly  the   Troops^  etc.  317 

The  reviewing  officer  or  personage  will  acknowledge 
the  salute  by  raising,  or  taking  off,  his  hat  or  cap, 
when  the  commander  of  the  troops  salutes  him  ;  and 
also  when  the  colors  pass.  The  remainder  of  the 
time  occupied  by  the  passage  af  the  troops  he  will  be 
covered. 

Guard-mounting. 

742.  At  the  first  call  for  guard-mounting,  the  men 
warned  for  duty  turn  out  on  their  company  parades 
for  inspection  bv  the  first  sergeants  ;  and  at  the  second 
call,  repair  to  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade,  con- 
ducted by  the  first  sergeants.  Each  detachment,  as  it 
arrives,  will,  under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant,  take 
post  on  the  left  of  the  one  that  preceded  it,  in  open 
order,  arms  shouldered,  and  bayonets  fixed  ;  the  su- 
pernumeraries five  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  men  of 
their  respective  companies  ;  the  first  sergeants  in  rear 
of  them.  The  sergeant-major  will  dress  the  ranks, 
count  the  files,  verify  the  details,  and  when  the  guard 
is  formed,  report  to  the  adjutant,  and  take  post  two 
paces  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank.  ,. 

The  adjutant  then  commands /rovii!,  when  the  othcer 
of  the  guard  takes  post  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the 
centre,  the  sergeants  in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  officers;  and  the  corporals  in  onerank, 
four  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  sergeants— all  facing  to 
the  front.  The  adjutant  then  assigns  their  places  in 
the  guard. 

The  adjutant  will  then  command  : 

1.    Officer  and  non-commissioned  officers.     2.  About— YhQ^. 
3.  Inspect  your  guards — March. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  then  take  their  posts. 
The  commander  of  the  guard  then  commands : 

1.   Orrfcr— Aems.     2.  Inspection— k-Ryis  ] 


318  Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

and  inspects  his  guard.  When  there  is  no  commis- 
sioned officer  on  the  guard,  the  adjutant  will  inspect 
it.     During  inspection,  the  band  -will  play. 

The  inspection  ended,  the  ofi&cer  of  the  guard  takes 
post  as  though  the  guard  were  a  company  of  a  batta- 
lion, in  open  order,  under  review  ;  at  the  same  time, 
also,  the  officers  of  the  day  will  take  post  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  guard ;  the  old  officer  of  the  day 
three  paces  on  the  right  of  the  new  officer  of  the  day, 
one  pace  retired. 

The  adjutant  will  now  command  : 

1.  Parade — Rest.     2,   Troop — Beat  off; 

when  the  music,  beginning  on  the  right,  will  beat 
down  the  line  on  front  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  to 
the  left,  and  back  to  its  place  in  the  right,  where  it 
will  cease  to  play. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Shoulder — Arms.     3.   Close  order—' 
March. 

At  the  word  close  order,  the  officer  will  face  about ; 
at  marcJi,  resume  his  post  in  line. 
The  adjutant  then  commands: 

Present — Arms. 

At  which  he  will  face  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day, 
salute,  and  report,  "  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed.'^  The 
new  officer  of  the  day,  after  acknowledging  the  salute, 
will  direct  the  adjutant  to  march  the  guard  in  review, 
or  by  flank  to  its  post.  But  if  the  adjutant  be  senior 
to  the  officer  of  the  day,  he  will  report  without  sa- 
luting with  the  sword  then,  or  when  marching  the 
guard  in  review. 

In  review,  the  guard  march  past  the  officer  of  the 
day,  according  to  the  order  of  review,  conducted  by 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   TroopSj  etc.         319 

the  adjutant,  marching  on  the  left  of  the  first  divi- 
sion ;  the  sergeant-major  on  the  left  of  the  last 
division. 

When  the  column  has  passed  the  officer  of  the  day, 
the  oflficer  of  the  guard  marches  it  to  its  post,  the  ad- 
jutant and  sergeant-major  retiring.  The  music,  which 
has  wheeled  out  of  the  column,  and  taken  post  oppo- 
site the  officer  of  the  day,  will  cease,  and  the  old  offi- 
cer of  the  day  salute,  and  give  the  old  or  standing 
orders  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day.  The  supernume- 
raries, at  the  same  time,  will  be  marched  by  the  first 
sergeants  to  their  respective  company  parades,  and 
dismissed. 

In  bad  weather,  or  at  night,  or  after  fatiguing 
marches,  the  ceremony  of  turning  off  may  be  dis- 
pensed with,  but  not  the  inspection. 

Grand  guards,  and  other  brigade  guards,  are  organ- 
ized and  mounted  on  the  brigade  parade  by  the  staff 
officer  of  the  parade,  under  the  direction  of  the  field 
officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade,  according  to  the  prin 
ciples  here  prescribed  for  a  police  guard  of  a  regi 
ment.  The  detail  of  each  regiment  is  assembled  or 
the  regimental  parade,  verified  by  the  adjutant,  and 
marched  to  the  brigade  parade  by  the  senior  officer  of 
the  detail.  After  inspection  and  review,  the  officer  of 
the  day  directs  the  several  guards  to  their  respective 
posts. 

The  officer  of  the  old  guard,  having  his  guard  para- 
ded, on  the  approach  of  the  new  guard,  commands : 

Present — Arms. 

The  new  guard  will  march,  in  quick  time,  past  the 
old  guard,  at  shouldered  arms,  officers  saluting,  and 
take  post  four  paces  on  its  right,  where,  being  aligned 
with  it,  its  commander  will  order : 

Present — Arms. 


on 


820  Honors  Paid  hy  tJie   Troops,  etc. 

The  two  officers  "will  then  approach  each  other,  and 
salute.  They  will  then  return  to  their  respective 
guards,  and  command  : 

1.  Shotdder — Arms.     2.   Order — Arms. 

The  officer  of  the  new  guard  will  now  direct  the  de- 
tail for  the  advanced  guard  to  be  formed  and  marched 
to  its  post,  the  list  of  the  guard  made  and  divided  into 
three  reliefs,  experienced  soldiers  placed  over  the  arms 
of  the  guard,  and  at  the  remote  and  responsible  posts, 
and  the  youug  soldiers  in  posts  near  the  guard  for  in- 
struction in  their  duties,  and  will  himself  proceed  to 
take  possession  of  the  guardhouse,  or  guard-tent,  and 
the  articles  and  prisoners  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

During  the  time  of  relievinor  the  sentinels,  and  of 
calling  in  the  small  posts,  the  old  commander  will 
give  to  the  new  all  the  information  and  instructions 
relating  to  his  post. 

The  first  relief  having  been  designated  and  ordered 
two  paces  to  the  front,  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard 
will  take  charge  of  it,  and  go  to  relieve  the  sentinels, 
accompanied  by  the  corporal  of  the  old  guard,  who 
vrill  take  command  of  the  old  sentinels,  when  the 
wh(de  are  relieved. 

If  the  sentinels  are  numerous,  the  sergeants  are  to 
be  employed,  as  well  as  the  corporals,  in  relieving 
them. 

The  relief,  with  arms  at  a  support,  in  two  ranks, 
will  march  by  a  flank,  conducted  by  the  corporal  on 
the  side  of  the  leading  front-rank  man  ;  and  the  men 
will  be  numbered  alternately  in  the  front  and  rear 
rank,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  being 
No.  1.  Should  an  officer  approach,  the  corporal  will 
command  cm^ri/  arms,  and  resume  the  sitppoii  arms 
when  the  officer  is  passed. 

The  sentinels  at  the  guard-house  or  guard-tent  will 
be  the  first  relieved  and  left  behind ;  the  others  are  re- 
lieved in  succession. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   TroopSy  etc.         321 

When  a  Fentlnel  sees  the  relief  approaching,  he 
will  halt  and  face  to  it  with  his  arms  at  a  shoulder. 
At  six  paces,  the  corporal  will  command : 

1.  Relief.      2.  Halt. 

When  the  relief  will  halt  and  carry  arms.  The 
corporal  will  then  add,  "No.  1,"  or  "No.  2,"  or  "No. 
3,"  according  to  the  number  of  the  post : 

Arms — Port. 

The  two  sentinels  will,  with  arms  at  port,  then  ap- 
proach each  other,  when  the  old  sentinel,  under  the 
correction  of  the  corporal,  will  whisper  the  instruc- 
tions to  the  new  sentinel.  This  done,  the  two  senti- 
nels will  shoulder  arms,  and  the  old  sentinel  will  pass, 
in  quick  time,  to  his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief.  The 
corporal  will  then  command  : 

1.  Support — Arms.      2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

And  the  relief  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  until 
the  whole  are  relieved. 

The  detachments  and  sentinels  from  the  old  guard 
having  come  in,  it  will  be  marched,  at  shouldered  arms, 
along  the  front  of  the  new  guard,  in  quick  time,  the 
new  guard  standing  at  presented  arms ;  officers  sa- 
luting, and  the  music  of  both  guards  beating,  except 
at  the  outposts. 

On  arriving  at  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade, 
the  commander  of  the  old  guard  will  send  the  detach- 
ments composing  it,  under  charge  of  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  to  their  respective  regiments.  Before 
the  men  are  dismissed,  their  pieces  will  be  drawn  or 
discharged  at  a  target.  On  rejoining  their  compan- 
ions, the  chiefs  of  squads  will  examine  the  arras,  etc., 
of  their  men,  and  cause  the  whole  to  be  put  away  ia 
good  order. 


322         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc. 

"When  the  old  guard  has  marched  off  fifty  paces,  the 
officer  of  the  new  guard  will  order  his  men  to  stack 
their  arms,  or  place  them  in  the  arm-racks. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  will  then  make  him- 
self acquainted  with  all  the  instructions  for  his  post, 
visit  the  sentinels,  and  question  them  and  the  non- 
commissioned officers  relative  to  the  instructions  they 
may  have  received  from  other  persons  of  the  old 
guard. 

Reception  of  one  hody  of  troops  hy  another. 

745.  The  commanding  officer  of  the  receiving  corps, 
having  notified  the  commander  of  the  other  body  of 
his  intention,  brings  his  command  into  line,  so  that  it 
shall  be  on  the  inght  of  the  route  which  it  is  intended 
the  other  shall  take.  The  commander  of  the  body 
receiving  the  compliment,  should  have  his  command 
in  column  right  in  front;  and  when  he  sees  the  other 
body  in  a  line,  or  receives  an  intimation  from  its  com- 
manding officer,  that  he  is  ready  to  receive  him,  he 
puts  his  column  in  motion  ;  when  its  head  is  within 
six  paces  of  the  left  of  the  line  on  its  right,  the  latter 
will  be  brought  to  a  present,  and  will  continue  in  that 
position  until  the  rear  of  the  column  has  passed  the 
right  of  the  line.  The  column  passes  at  shouldered 
arms,  each  officer  saluting  as  soon  as  he  comes  within 
six  paces  of  the  left  of  the  line.  When  the  rear  of 
the  column  has  passed  some  twenty-five  or  thirty 
paces  beyond  the  right  of  the  line,  the  column  is 
brought  into  line,  on  the  same  side  with  the  first  line. 
As  soon  as  this  is  done,  the  first  line  breaks  into  col- 
umn right  in  front,  and  marches  past  the  second,  re- 
ceiving the  same  compliments  that  it  extended  when 
the  other  body  passed.  After  marching  past,  it  may 
be  formed  into  line  again  as  it  was  at  first,  when  both 
commands  may  be  brought  to  an  order,  the  officers 
advancing  and  being  presented;  or  the  column  may 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc.         323 

halt  long  enough  to  allow  the  other  command,  now  in 
line,  to  re-form  column,  when  both  take  up  the  march, 
the  leading  column  serving  as  an  escort  lor  the  other. 

Masters. 

747.  Musters  of  the  volunteers  and  militia  are  made 
at  least  once  a  year,  by  the  brigade  inspectors.  Where 
troops  are  in  actual  service  musters  are  made  every 
two  months ;  usually  on  the  last  day  of  every  second 
month.  In  this  case  they  are  made  by  an  inspector- 
general,  if  present,  otherwise  by  an  officer  specially 
designated  by  the  commander  of  the  army,  division, 
or  brigade  ;  and  in  the  absence  of  the  inspector-gene- 
ral or  officer  specially  designated,  the  muster  is  made 
by  the  commander  of  the  post. 

When  one  inspecting  officer  cannot  inspect  all  the 
troops  himself  on  the  day  specified,  the  commanding 
officer  will  designate  sucli  other  competent  officers  as 
may  be  necessary  to  assist  him.  All  stated  musters 
of  the  troops  should  be  preceded  by  a  minute  and 
careful  iiiHpeciion  in  the  prescribed  mode  ;  and  if  the 
command  be  more  than  a  company,  by  a  review,  before 
inspection. 

The  mustering  officer  having  inspected  the  compa- 
nies in  succession,  beginning  on  the  right,  returns  to 
the  first  company  to  muster  it.  The  company  being 
at  ordered  arms,  with  open  ranks,  as  when  inspected, 
the  captains  will,  as  the  mustering  officer  approaches, 
command  : 

1.    Attention.      2.     Company.      3.    Shoulder — Arms.      4. 
Support — AiiMS. 

The  mustering  officer  will  then  call  over  the  names 
on  the  roll,  and  each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  will 
distinctly  answer  here,  and  bring  his  piece  to  a  carry, 
and  to  an  order. 


324         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

After  each  company  is  mustered,  the  captain  -will 
order  it  to  be  marched  to  the  company  parade,  and 
there  dismissed  to  quarters,  to  await  the  inspector's 
visit.  After  mustering  the  companies,  the  mustering 
officer,  attended  by  the  company  commanders,  vrill 
visit  the  guard  and  hospital,  to  verify  the  presence  of 
the  men  reported  there.  The  muster  and  pay  rolls 
are  made  on  printed  forms  in  accordance  with  the  di- 
rections on  them.  On  the  muster  rolls  companies 
are  designated  by  the  name  of  the  captain,  whether 
present  or  absent.  The  pay  roll  is  left  blank  to  fill 
up  by  the  paymaster. 

The  roster,  or  details  for  service. 

748.  The  duties  performed  by  detail  are  of  three 
classes.  The  first  class  comprises,  first,  grand  guards 
and  outposts ;  second,  interior  guards,  as  of  maga- 
zine, hospital,  etc.;  third,  orderlies;  fourth,  police 
guards. 

The  second  class  comprises,  first,  detachments  to 
protect  labor  on  military  works,  as  field  works,  com- 
munications, etc. ;  second,  working  parties  on  such 
works  ;    third,  detachments  to  protect  fatigues. 

The  third  class  are  all  fatigues,  without  arms,  in  or 
out  of  camp.  In  the  cavalry,  stable-guards  form  a 
separate  roster,  and  count  before  fatigue. 

The  rosters  are  distinct  for  each  class.  Officers  are 
named  on  them  in  the  order  of  rank.  The  details  are 
taken  in  succession  in  the  order  of  the  roster,  begin- 
ning at  the  head.  Lieutenants  form  one  roster;  the 
first  and  second  lieutenants  are  entered  on  it  alter- 
nately. The  senior  first  lieutenant  is  the  first  on  the 
roster ;  the  senior  second  lieutenant  is  the  second,  etc. 
The  captains  form  one  roster,  and  are  exempt  from 
fatigue,  except  to  superintend  issues.  A  captain  com- 
manding a  battalion  temporarily  isexcrapt  from  de- 
tail,   and   duty   falling  to  him   passes.      Lieutenant- 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc.         325 

colonels  and  majors  are  on  one  roster.  They  may  be 
detailed  for  duties  of  the  first  and  second  classes, 
when  the  importance  of  the  guards  and  detachments 
requires  it.  Their  roster  is  kept  at  division  and  bri- 
gade head-quarters.  The  rosters  of  the  captains  and 
lieutenants  are  kept  at  regimental  head-quarters,  and 
those  of  the  companies  by  the  first  sergeants.  In  the 
company,  sergeants,  corporals,  and  privates  form  dis- 
tinct rosters. 

Officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  soldiers, 
take  duties  of  the  first  class,  in  the  order  stated,  viz : 
the  first  for  the  detail  takes  the  grand  guards  ;  the 
next,  the  interior  guards  ;  the  last,  the  police  guard  ; 
and  the  same  rule  in  regard  to  the  details  and  duties 
of  the  second  class.  In  the  details  for  the  third  class, 
the  senior  officer  takes  the  largest  party.  The  party 
first  for  detail  takes  the  service  out  of  camp. 

When  the  officer  whose  tour  it  is  is  not  able  to  take 
it,  or  is  not  present  at  the  hour  of  marching,  the  next 
after  him  takes  it.  When  a  guard  has  passed  the 
chain  of  sentinels,  or  an  interior  guard  has  reached 
its  post,  the  officer  whose  tour  it  was  cannot  then  take 
it.  He  takes  the  tour  of  the  officer  who  has  taken 
his.  When  an  officer  is  prevented  by  sickness  from 
taking  his  tour,  it  passes.  These  rules  apply  equally 
to  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers. 

Duties  of  the  first  and  second  class  are  credited  on 
the  roster  when  the  guards  or  detachments  have  passed 
the  chain  of  sentinels,  or  an  interior  guard  has  reached 
its  post ;  fatigue  duties  when  the  parties  have  passed 
the  chain  or  begun  the  duties  in  camp. 

Every  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier, 
on  duty  of  the  first  class,  or  who  is  of  the  next  detail 
for  such  duty,  takes,  when  relieved,  the  duty  of  the 
second  or  third  class  that  has  fallen  to  him  during 
that  time,  unless  he  has  marched  for  detachment  of 
more  than  twenty-four  hours. 

Soldiers  march  with  knapsacks  for  all  duties  of  the 
28 


326         Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc. 

first  class  ;  and  with  arms  and  equipments  complete 
on  all  working  parties  out  of  camp,  unless  otherwise 
ordered.  In  the  cavalry,  horses  are  packed  for  all 
mounted  service ;  and  dismounted  men,  and  those 
whose  horses  are  not  in  order,  are  preferred  for  the 
detail  for  dismounted  service.  Those  who  are  mounted 
are  never  employed  on  those  services,  if  the  number 
of  the  other  class  is  sufficient. 

Every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier  in  the 
cavalry  detailed  for  dismounted  service  must,  before 
he  marches,  take  to  the  first  sergeant  of  his  troop,  or 
sergeant  of  his  squad,  his  horse  equipments  and  valise 
ready  packed.  In  case  of  alarm,  the  first  sergeant  sees 
that  the  horses  of  these  men  are  equipped  and  led  to 
the  rendezvous. 

In  the  field,  artillery-men  are  not  called  upon  for 
any  duty  outside  of  their  own  batteries  or  camps. 

These  rules  in  regard  to  the  roster  apply  also  to 
service  in  garrison. 

Duties  of  guards. 

749.  Sentinels  will  be  relieved  every  two  hours, 
unless  the  state  of  the  weather,  or  other  causes,  should 
make  it  necessary  or  proper  that  it  be  done  at  shorter 
or  longer  intervals. 

Each  relief,  before  mounting,  is  inspected  by  the 
commander  of  the  guard,  or  of  its  post.  The  corporal 
reports  to  him,  and  presents  the  old  relief  on  its 
return. 

The  coiuiiersign,  or  watchword,  is  given  to  such  per- 
sons as  are  entitled  to  pass  during  the  night,  and  to 
officers,  non-commis^^ioned  officers,  and  sentinels  of  the 
guard.  Interior  guards  receive  the  countersign  only 
when  ordered  by  the  commander  of  the  troops. 

The  parole  is  imparted  to  such  officers  only  as  have 
a  right  to  visit  the  guards,  and  to  make  the  grand 
rounds  ;  and  to  officers  commanding  guards. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc.         327 

As  soon  as  the  new  guard  has  been  marched  off,  the 
officer  of  the  day  will  repair  to  the  office  of  the  com- 
mandino;  officer  and  report  for  orders. 

The  officer  of  the  day  must  see  that  the  officer  of 
the  guard  is  furnished  with  the  parole  and  countersign 
before  retreat. 

The  officer  of  the  day  visits  the  guards  during  the 
day  at  such  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary,  and 
makes  his  rounds  at  night  at  least  once  after  12  o'clock. 

Upon  being  relieved,  the  officer  of  the  day  will  make 
such  remarks  in  the  report  of  the  officer  of  the  guard 
as  circumstances  require,  and  present  the  same  at 
head-quarters. 

Commanders  of  guards  leaving  their  posts  to  visit 
their  sentinels,  or  on  other  duty,  are  to  mention  their 
intention,  and  the  probable  time  of  their  absence,  to 
the  next  in  command. 

The  officers  are  to  remain  constantly  at  their  guards, 
except  while  visiting  their  sentinels,  or  necessarily  en- 
gaged elsewhere  on  their  proper  duty. 

Neither  officers  nor  soldiers  are  to  take  off  their 
clothing  or  accoutrements  while  they  are  on  guard. 

The  officer  of  the  guard  must  see  that  the  counter- 
sign is  duly  communicated  to  the  sentinels  a  little 
before  twilight. 

When  a  tire  breaks  out,  or  any  alarm  is  raised  in 
a  garrison,  all  guards  are  to  be  immediately  under 
arms. 

Inexperienced  officers  are  put  on  guard  as  supernu- 
meraries, for  the  purpose  of  instruction. 

Sentinels  will  not  take  orders  or  allow  themselves 
to  be  relieved,  except  by  an  officer  or  non-commis- 
sioned officer  of  their  guard  or  party,  the  officer  of  the 
day,  or  the  commanding  officer ;  in  which  case  the 
orders  will  be  immediately  notified  to  the  commander 
of  the  guard  by  the  officer  giving  them. 

Sentinels  will  report  every  breach  of  orders  or  reg- 
ulations they  are  instructed  to  enforce. 


328         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops j  etc. 

Sentinel:?  must  keep  themselves  on  the  alert,  observ- 
ing everythino;  that  takes  place  within  sight  and 
hearing  of  their  post.  They  will  carry  their  arms  ha- 
bitually at  support,  or  on  either  shoulder,  but  will 
never  quit  them.  In  wet  weather,  if  there  be  no  sen- 
try box,  they  will  secure  arms. 

No  sentinel  shall  quit  his  post  or  hold  conversation 
not  necessary  to  the  proper  discharge  of  his  duty. 

All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are 
required  to  observe  respect  towards  sentinels. 

In  case  of  disorder,  a  sentinel  must  call  out  the 
guard;  and  if  a  fire  take  place,  he  must  cry — "Fire!" 
adding  the  number  of  his  post.  If  in  either  case  the 
danger  be  great,  he  must  discharge  his  firelock  before 
calling  out. 

It  is  the  duty  of  a  sentinel  to  repeat  all  calls  made 
from  posts  more  distant  from  the  main  body  of  the 
guard  than  his  own,  and  no  sentinel  will  be  posted  so 
distant  as  not  to  be  heard  by  the  guard,  either  directly 
or  through  other  sentinels. 

Sentinels  will  halt,  come  to  attention,  and  present 
arms  to  general  and  field  officers,  to  the  officer  of  the 
day,  and  to  the  commanding  officer  of  the  post.  To 
all  other  officers  they  will  carry  arms. 

When  a  sentinel  in  his  sentry-box  sees  an  officer 
approach,  he  will  stand  at  attention,  and  as  the  officer 
passes,  will  salute  him  by  bringing  the  left  hand 
briskly  to  the  musket,  as   high  as  the  right  shoulder. 

The  sentinel,  at  any  post  of  the  guard,  when  he  sees 
any  bftdy  of  troops,  or  an  officer  entitled  to  compli- 
ment, approach,  must  call :  "  Turn  out  the  guards'* 
and  announce  who  approaches. 

Guards  do  not  turn  out  as  a  matter  of  compliment 
after  sunset;  but  sentinels  will,  when  officers  in  uni- 
form approach,  pay  them  proper  attention,  by  facing 
to  the  proper  front,  and  standing  steady  at  shouldered 
arms.  This  will  be  observed  until  the  evening  is  so 
far  advanced  that  the  sentinels  begin  challenging. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops,  etc.         329 

After  retreat  (or  the  hour  appointed  by  the  com- 
manding officer),  until  broad  daylight,  a  sentinel  chal- 
lenges every  person  who  approaches  him,  taking,  at 
the  same  time,  the  position  of  arms  port.  He  will 
sniFer  no  person  to  come  nearer  than  within  reach  of 
his  bayonet,  until  the  person  has  given  the  countersign. 

A  sentinel,  in  challenging,  will  call  out — "Who 
comes  (here F"  If  answered — ''Friend,  with  the  coun- 
tersign," and  he  be  instructed  to  pass  persons  with 
the  countersign,  he  will  reply — '' Adimnce,  friend,  with 
the  countersign."  If  answered — ''Friends,"  he  will 
reply — "Halt,  friends,  Advance,  one,  with  the  counter- 
sign." If  answered — "Relief,"  "Patrol,"  or  "Grand 
rounds,"  he  will  reply — "Halt.  Advance,  sergeant  (or 
corporal)  with  the  countersign,"  and  satisfy  himself 
that  the  party  is  what  it  represents  itself  to  be.  If  he 
have  no  authority  to  pass  persons  with  the  counter- 
sign, if  the  wrong  countersign  be  given,  or  if  the 
persons  have  not  the  countersign,  he  will  cause  them 
to  stand,  and  call — "Corporal  of  the  guard." 

In  the  daytime,  when  the  sentinel  before  the  guard 
sees  the  officer  of  the  day  approach,  he*will  call — 
"Tarn  out  the  guard,  officer  of  the  day."  The  guard 
will  be  paraded,  and  salute  with  presented  arms. 

AVhen  any  person  approaches  a  post  of  the  guard  at 
night,  the  sentinel  before  the  post,  after  challenging, 
causes  him  to  halt  until  examined  by  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard.  If  it  be  the  officer  of  the 
day,  or  any  other  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard 
and  to  make  the  rounds,  the  non-commissioned  officer 
will  call — "  Turn  out  the  guard,"  when  the  guard  will 
be  paraded  at  shouldered  arms,  and  the  officer  of  the 
guard,  if  he  thinks  necessary,  may  demand  the  coun- 
tersign and  parole. 

The  officer  of  the  day,  wishing  to  make  the  rounds, 
will  take  an  escort  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  and 
two  men.  When  the  rounds  are  challenged  by  a  sen- 
tinel, the  sergeant  will  answer — "Grand  rounds,"  and 


330         Honors  Paid  hy  the   TroojpSy  etc. 

the  sentinel  will  reply — ^^Halt,  grand  rounds.  Ad- 
vance, sergeant,  with  the  countersign.''  Upon  which 
the  sergeant  advances  and  gives  the  countersign.  The 
sentinel  will  then  cry — ''Advance,  roundSy'  and  stand 
at  a  shoulder  till  they  have  passed. 

When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  challenges,  and 
is  answered — ''Grand  rounds,"  he  will  reply — "Halt, 
grand  rounds.  Turn  out  the  guard  ;  grand  rounds." 
Upon  which  the  guard  will  be  drawn  up  at  shouldered 
arms.  The  officer  commanding  the  guard  will  then 
order  a  sergeant  and  two  men  to  advance ;  when 
within  ten  paces,  the  sergeant  challenges.  The  ser- 
geant of  the  grand  rounds  answers — "Grand  rounds." 
The  sergeant  of  the  guard  replies — "Advance,  ser- 
geant, with  the  countersign."  The  sergeant  of  the 
rounds  advances  alone,  gives  the  countersign,  and  re- 
turns to  his  round.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  calls 
to  his  officer — "  The  countersign  is  right,"  on  which 
the  officer  of  the  guard  calls — "Advance,  rounds." 
The  officer  of  the  rounds  then  advances  alone,  the 
guard  standing  at  shouldered  arms.  The  officer  of 
the  rounds  4)asses  along  the  front  of  the  guard  to  the 
officer,  who  keeps  his  post  on  the  right,  and  gives  him 
the  parole.  He  then  examines  the  guard,  orders  back 
his  escort,  and,  taking  a  new  one,  proceeds  in  the  same 
manner  to  other  guards. 

All  material  instructions  given  to  a  sentinel  on  post 
by  persons  entitled  to  make  grand  rounds,  ought  to  be 
promptly  notified  to  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

Any  general  officer,  or  the  commander  of  a  post  or 
garrison,  may  visit  the  guards  of  his  command,  and 
go  the  grand  rounds,  and  be  received  in  the  same 
manner  as  prescribed  for  the  officer  of  the  day. 

Guards. 

750.  Guards,  in  time  of  war,  are  bodies  of  men 
whose  duties  are  to  secure  an  army  or  place  from  be- 
ing surprised  by  an  enemy. 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troojps,  etc.         331 

By  a  proper  disposition  of  the  guards,  and  by  a 
faithful  discharge  of  the  duties  imposed  upon  them,  a 
whole  army  can  at  all  times,  and  under  all  circum- 
stances, be  kept  in  readiness  for  action  ;  the  larger 
part  of  the  army,  even  in  the  pursuit  of  an  enemy, 
and  momentarily  expecting  to  meet  him,  may  with 
safety  seek  that  repose  which  is  so  necessary  to  keep 
up  the  physical  energies  of  the  forces ;  and  as  tho 
guards  generally  constitute  but  a  comparatively  small 
portion  of  the  command,  and  are  frequently  relieved, 
no  soldier  is  likely  to  be  called  upon  to  endure  an 
amount  of  fatigue  greater  than  a  man  in  his  vigor 
ought  to  bear. 

In  order  that  the  guards  of  an  army  may  protect  ifc 
properly,  they  must  be  so  posted  as  to  cover  both  tho 
front  and  flanks  of  the  position,  and  at  the  same  time 
have  possession  of  all  the  avenues  of  approach  to  it. 
The  ordinary  arrangement  of  guards  is  such,  that  no 
matter  how  far  the  outer  line  may  lie  from  the  main 
body,  it  may  rally  from  point  to  point,  if  driven  in  by 
an  advancing  enemy,  gaining  strength  each  time,  un- 
til it  finally  reaches  the  main  body.  Thus  even  the 
most  advanced  posts  need  never  be  cutoff,  while  it  would 
be  impossible  for  an  enem}'^  to  surprise  the  main  body. 

The  usual  arrangement  consists  of  two  or  three  lines 
of  posts,  within  relief  of  each  other,  and  extending 
around  the  main  body  as  a  centre,  the  exterior  lino 
throwing  out  a  chain  of  sentinels  in  its  front,  and  so 
distributed  as  to  prevent  the  approach  of  any  one 
without  being  seen. 

751.  The  inner  line  consists  of  what  are  denomina- 
ted police  g^tards ;  there  is  a  police  guard  for  each 
regiment,  which  is  posted  within  the  regimental  camp. 
These  guards  are  of  sufficient  strength  to  supply  a 
chain  of  sentinels  along  the  front  and  rear  of  the 
regiment,  connecting  it  with  the  regiments  on  the 
right  and  left,  thus  forming  a  chain  of  sentinels  close 
to  and  all  around  the  camp. 


332         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

The  next  line  consists  of  a  number  of  strong  de- 
taehmenta,  termed  pickets ;  they  are  posted  upon  the 
main  avenues  of  approach  to  the  position,  and  serve 
as  supports  to  the  exterior  lines,  upon  which  they 
rally  when  driven  in  by  the  enemy. 

Next  beyond  the  pickets  is  the  line  of  grand  guards, 
and  of  course  occupying;  a  wider  circumference  ;  they 
aie  y)OSted  in  the  most  favorable  position  for  observing 
^he  enemy,  and  throw  out  the  extreme  line,  called  the 
line  of  outposts.  The  line  of  grand  guards,  while 
supported  by  the  pickets,  in  turn  furnishes  support  to 
the  outposts  when  necessary. 

Besides  these  various  lines,  patrols  are  kept  up  be- 
tween the  various  posts,  to  keep  the  one  intormed  of 
the  condition  of  the  other ;  and,  also  between  the  out- 
posts and  the  extreme  line  of  sentinels,  to  see  that  the 
duties  of  the  latter  are  properly  performed. 

This  arrangement  secures  positions  favorable  for 
observation,  and  mutual  support. 

"  The  duties  of  the  outposts,  and  of  the  grand  guards 
which  form  their  supports,  are  strictly  those  of  obser- 
vation. If  attacked,  they  offer  no  resistance  further 
than  to  enable  them  to  feel  the  enemy  perfectly,  and 
never  lose  sight  of  him.  The  task  of  holding  the 
enemy  in  check  by  a  vigorous  resistance,  so  as  to  pro- 
cure sufficient  time  for  the  main  body  to  make  its 
disposition  for  battle,  is  consigned  to  the  pickets." 
(Maban). 

Police   Guards. 

752.  The  police  guard  is  detailed  eveiy  day  from 
each  regiment,  and  consists  of  two  sergeants,  three 
corporals,  two  musicians,  and  men  enough  to  furnish 
the  necessary  sentinels  and  patrols.  The  men  are 
taken  from  all  the  companies,  from  each  in  proportion 
to  its  strength. 

The  guard  is  commanded  by  a  lieutenant,  under  the 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troopsy  etc.         333 

supervision  of  a  captain  as  regimental  oflScer  of  the 
day.  It  furnishes  ten  sentinels  at  the  camp;  one  over 
the  arms  of  the  guard  ;  one  at  the  colonel's  tent ;  three 
on  the  color  front ;  one  of  them  over  the  colors ;  three, 
fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  oflBcer's  tents  ;  and  one 
on  each  flank,  between  it  and  the  next  regiment.  If 
it  is  a  flank  regiment,  one  more  sentinel  is  posted  on 
the  outer  flank. 

An  advanced  post  is  detached  from  the  police  guard, 
composed  of  a  sergeant,  a  corporal,  a  drummer,  and 
nine  men  to  furnish  sentinels  and  the  guard  over  the 
prisoners.  The  men  are  the  first  of  the  guard  roster 
from  each  company.  The  men  of  the  advanced  post 
must  not  leave  it  under  any  pretext.  Their  meals  are 
sent  to  tbe  post.  The  advanced  post  furnishes  three 
sentinels  ;  two  a  few  paces  in  front  of  the  post  oppo- 
site the  right  and  left  wing  of  the  regiment,  posted  so 
as  to  see  as  far  as  possible  to  the  front,  and  one  over 
the  arms. 

In  the  cavalry,  dismounted  men  are  employed  in 
preference  on  the  police  guard.  The  mounted  men  on 
guard  are  sent  in  succession,  a  part  at  a  time,  to  groom 
their  horses.  The  advanced  post  is  always  formed  of 
mounted  men. 

In  each  company,  a  corporal  has  charge  of  the  stable 
guard.  His  tour  begins  at  retreat,  and  ends  at  morn- 
ing stable-call.  The  stable  guard  is  large  enough  to 
relieve  the  men  on  post  every  two  hours.  They  sleep 
in  their  tents,  and  are  called  by  the  corporal  when 
•wanted.  At  retreat  he  closes  the  streets  of  the  camp 
with  cords,  or  uses  other  precautions  to  prevent  the 
escape  of  loose  horses. 

The  officer  of  the  day  is  charged  with  the  order  and 
cleanliness  of  the  camp:  a  fatigue  is  furnished  to  him 
when  the  number  of  prisoners  is  insufficient  to  clean 
the  camp.  He  has  the  calls  beaten  by  the  drummer 
of  the  guard. 


334         Honors^ Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc. 

The  police  guard  and  the  advanced  post  pay  the 
game  honors  as  other  guards.  They  take  arras  when 
an  armed  body  approaches. 

The  sentinel  over  the  colors  has  orders  not  to  permit 
them  to  be  moved  except  in  the  presence  of  an  escort ; 
to  let  no  one  touch  them  but  the  color-bearer,  or  the 
Rerp;eant  of  the  police  guard  when  he  is  accompanied 
bj  two  armed  men. 

The  sentinels  on  the  color  front  permit  no  soldier  to 
takearmsfromthestacks,  except  by  order  of  some  officer, 
oranon-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard.  The  sentinel 
at  the  colonel's  tent  has  orders  to  warn  him,  day  or 
night,  of  any  unusual  movement  in  or  about  the  camp. 

The  sentinels  on  the  front,  flanks  and  rear,  see  that 
no  soldier  leaves  camp  with  horse  or  arms  unless  con- 
ducted by  a  non-commissioned  officer.  They  prevent 
non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  from  passing 
out  at  night,  except  to  go  to  the  sinks,  and  mark  if 
they  return.  They  arrest,  at  any  time,  suspicious  per- 
sons prowling  about  the  camp,  and  at  night,  everyone 
who  attempts  to  enter,  even  the  soldiers  of  other  corps. 
Arrested  persons  are  sent  to  the  officer  of  the  guard, 
who  sends  them,  if  necessary,  to  the  officer  of  the  day. 

The  sentinels  on  the  front  of  the  advanced  posts 
have  orders  to  permit  neither  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers nor  soldiers  to  pass  the  line,  without  reporting  at 
the  advanced  post ;  to  warn  the  advanced  post  of  the 
approach  of  any  armed  body,  and  to  arrest  all  suspi- 
cious persons.  The  sergeant  sends  persons  so  arrested 
to  the  officer  of  the  guard,  and  warns  him  of  the  ap- 
proach of  any  armed  body. 

The  sentinel  over  the  arms*  at  the  advanced  post 
guards  the  prisoners,  and  keeps  sight  of  them,  and 
sufi'ers  no  one  to  converse  with  them  without  permis- 
sion. They  are  only  permitted  to  go  to  the  sinks  one 
at  a  time,  and  under  a  sentinel. 

If  any  one  is  to  be  passed  out  of  camp  at  night,  the 
officer  of  the  guard  sends  him  under  escort  to  the  ad- 


Honors  Paid  hy  the   Troops^  etc.         335 

vanced  post,  and  the  sergeant  of  the  post  has  him 
passed  over  the  chain. 

At  retreat,  the  officer  of  the  guard  has  the  roll  of 
his  f*uard  cjilled,  and  inspects  arms  to  see  that  they 
are  los^t^d  and  in  order  ;  and  visits  the  advanced  posts 
for  the  same  purpose.  The  sergeant  of  the  police 
guard,  accompanied  by  two  armed  soldiers,  folds  the 
colors  and  lays  them  on  the  trestle  in  rear  of  the  arms. 
lie  sees  that  the  sutler's  stores  are  then  closed,  and 
the  men  leave  them,  and  that  the  kitchen  fires  are  put 
out  at  the  appointed  hour. 

The  officer  of  the  day  satisfies  himself  frequently 
during  the  night  of  the  vigilance  of  the  police  guard 
and  advanced  post.  lie  prescribes  patrols  and  rounds 
to  be  made  by  the  officer  and  non-commissioned  officers 
of  the  guard.  The  officer  of  the  guard  orders  them 
when  he  thinks  necessary.  He  visits  the  sentinels 
frequently. 

At  reveille,  the  police  guard  takes  arms  ;  the  officer 
of  the  guard  inspects  it  and  the  advanced  post.  The 
sergeant  replants  the  colors  in  place.  At  retreat  and 
reveille  the  advanced  post  takes  arms;  the  sergeant 
makes  his  report  to  the  officer  of  the  guard  when  he 
visits  the  post. 

When  necessary,  the  camp  is  covered  at  night  with 
small  outposts,  forming  a  double  chain  of  sentinels. 
These  posts  are  under  the  orders  of  the  commander 
of  the  police  guard,  and  are  visited  by  his  patrols  and 
rounds. 

The  officer  of  the  guard  makes  his  report  of  his  tour 
of  service,  including  the  advanced  post,  and  sends  it, 
after  the  guard  is  marched  off,  to  the  officer  of  the 
day. 

When  the  regiment  marches,  the  men  of  the  police 
guard  return  to  their  companies,  except  those  of  the 
advanced  post.  In  the  cavalry,  at  the  sound  "boot 
and  saddle,"  the  officer  of  the  guard  sends  one  half  of 
the  men  to  saddle  and  pack  ;  when  the  regiment  assem- 
bles, all  the  men  join  it. 


33G         Honors  Paid  hy  the   Iroops,  etc. 

"When  the  camping  party  precedes  the  regiment,  and 
the  new  police  guard  marches  with  the  camping  party, 
the  guard,  on  reaching  the  camp,  forms  in  line  thirty 
paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  ground  marked  for 
the  regiment.  The  officer  of  the  guard  furnishes  the 
8entinels  required  by  the  commander  of  the  camping 
party.     The  advanced  post  takes  its  station. 

The  advanced  post  of  the  old  police  guard  takes 
charge  of  the  prisoners  on  the  march,  and  marches, 
bayonets  fixed,  at  the  centre  of  the  regiment.  On 
reaching  camp,  it  turns  over  the  prisoners  to  the  new 
advanced  post. 

PICKETS. 

753.  The  detail  for  the  picket  is  made  daily,  and  is 
composed  of  a  lieutenant,  two  sergeants,  four  corporals, 
a  drummer,  and  about  forty  privates  for  each  regi- 
ment. For  a  smaller  force,  the  picket  is  in  proportion 
to  the  strength  of  the  detachment.  The  duty  of  the 
pickets  is  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check,  and  the  points 
which  they  take  up  should,  if  possible,  be  susceptible 
of  good  defence ;  such  as  villages,  defiles,  etc. :  when 
these  advantages  do  not  present  themselves,  temporary 
obstacles,  such  abatis,  etc.,  should  be  resorted  to.  The 
points  occupied  by  the  pickets  should  be  about  mid- 
way between  the  line  of  outposts  and  the  position  of 
tlie  main  body. 

Small  posts  should  be  thrown  forward  by  the  pick- 
ets, between  them  and  the  line  of  grand  guards.  These 
give  greater  security  to  the  pickets,  and  furnish  sup- 
port to  the  grand  guard. 

GRAND  GUARDS  AND  OUTPOSTS. 

754.  The  numbers,  strength,  and  position  of  grand 
guards  are  regulated  by  the  commanders  of  brigades  ; 
in  detached  corps,  by  the  commanding  oflficer.    When 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops^  etc.         337 

it  can  be  done,  the  grand  guards  of  infantry  and  cav- 
alry are  combined,  the  cavalry  furnishing  the  advanced 
sentinels.  When  the  cavalry  is  weak,  the  grand 
guards  are  infantry,  but  furnished  v^'ith  a  few  cavalry 
soldiers,  to  get  and  carry  intelligence  of  the  enemy. 

The  strength  of  the  grand  guard  of  a  brigade  will 
depend  on  the  strength  of  the  regiments,  the  nature 
of  the  country,  the  position  of  the  enemy,  and  the 
disposition  of  the  inhabitants.  It  is  usually  com- 
manded by  a  captain. 

Under  the  supervision  of  the  generals  of  division 
and  brigade,  the  grand  guards  are  especially  under 
the  direction  of  a  tield  officer  of  the  day  in  each  bri- 
gade. In  case  of  necessity,  captains  may  be  added  to 
the  roster  of  lieutenant-colonels  and  majors  for  this 
detail. 

Grand  guards  usually  mount  at  the  same  time  as 
the  other  guards,  but  may  mount  before  daybreak  if 
the  general  of  brigade  thinks  it  necovssary  to  double 
the  outposts  at  this  time.  In  this  case  they  assemble 
and  march  without  noise  and  during  the  march  throw 
out  scouts ;  this  precaution  should  always  be  taken  in 
the  first  posting  of  a  grand  guard.  The  doubling  of 
guards  weakens  the  corps  and  fatigues  the  men,  and 
should  seldom  b^  resorted  to,  and  never  when  prepar- 
ing to  march  or  fight. 

755.  A  grand  guard  is  conducted  to  its  post  in  the 
first  instance  by  the  field  officer  of  the  day,  guided  by 
one  of  the  stafi"  officers  who  accompanied  the  general 
in  his  reconnoissance.  After  the  post  has  been  estab- 
lished, the  commander  sends  to  the  field  officer  of  the 
day,  when  necessary,  a  soldier  of  the  guard  to  guide 
the  relieving  guard  to  the  post.  He  also  sends  to  him 
in  the  evening  a  corporal  or  trusty  man  of  the  guard, 
for  the  note  containing  the  parole  and  countersign, 
and  sends  them  before  dark  to  the  outposts.  He  will 
not  sufi'er  his  guard  t©  be  relieved  except  by  a  guard 
29 


338         Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops ^  etc. 

of  the  brigade,  or  by  special  orders  from  competent 
authority. 

If  there  is  no  pass  to  be  observed  -or  defended,  the 
grand  guards  are  placed  near  the  centre  of  the  ground 
they  are  to  observe,  on  sheltered,  and,  if  possible, 
high  ground,  the  better  to  conceal  their  strength  and 
observe  the  enemy ;  they  ought  not  to  be  placed  near 
the  edge  of  a  wood.  When,  during  the  day,  they  are 
placed  very  near,  or  in  sight  of  the  enemy,  they  fall 
back  at  night  on  parts  selected  farther  to  the  rear. 

After  a  grand  guard  is  posted,  the  first  care  of  the 
commander  and  of  the  field  officer  of  the  day  is  to  get 
news  of  the  enemy ;  then  to  reconnoitre  his  position, 
and  the  roads,  bridges,  fords,  and  defiles.  This  recon- 
noissance  determines  the  force  and  position  of  the  out- 
posts and  their  sentinels  day  and  night.  These  posts, 
when  of  infantry,  should  be  about  200  paces  in  front 
of  the  line  of  grand  guards,  and  of  cavalry  from  600 
to  800 ;  and  are  commanded  by  officers  or  non-com- 
missioned officers,  according  to  their  importance. 
Cavalry  posts  may  be  relieved  every  four  or  eight 
hours. 

The  commander  of  a  grand  guard  receives  detailed 
instructions  from  the  general  and  field  officers  of  the 
day  of  the  brigade,  and  instructs  the  commanders  of 
the  outposts  as  to  their  duties,  and  the  arrangements 
for  the  defence  or  retreat.  The  commanders  of  grand 
guards  may,  in  urgent  cases,  change  the  positions  of 
the  outposts.  If  the  outposts  are  to  change  their  posi- 
tion at  night,  they  wait  until  the  grand  guard  has 
gotten  its  position,  and  darkness  hides  their  move- 
ments from  the  enemy ;  then  march  silently  and  rapidly 
under  charge  of  an  ofl&cer. 

In  detached  corps,  small  posts  of  picked  men  are  at 
night  sent  forward  on  the  roads  by  which  the  enemy 
may  attack  or  turn  the  position.  They  watch  the 
forks  of  the  roads,  keep  silence,  conceal  themselves, 
light  no  fires,  and  often  change  place.     They  announce 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops,  etc.         339 

the  approach  of  in  enemy  hy  signals  agreed  upon,  and 
retreat  by  routes  examined  during  the  day,  to  places 
selected,  and  rejoin  the  guard  at  daybreak. 
•  Grand  guards  have  special  orders  in  each  case,  and 
the  following  in  all  cases  :  to  inform  the  nearest  posts 
and  the  field  officer  of  the  day,  or  the  general  of  bri- 
gade, of  the  march  and  movements  of  the  enemy,  and 
of  the  attacks  they  receive  or  fear  ;  to  examine  every 
person  passing  near  the  post,  particularly  those  com- 
ing from  without ;  to  arrest  suspicious  persons,  and 
all  soldiers  and  camp  followers  who  try  to  pass  out 
without  permission,  and  to  send  to  the  general,  unless 
otherwise  directed  all  country  people  who  come  in. 

756.  All  out-guards  stand  to  arms  at  night  on  the 
approach  of  patrols,  rounds,  or  other  parti*  ;  the  sen- 
tinel o"'^er  the  arms  will  call  them  out. 

The  sentinels  and  videttes  are  placed  on  points  from 
which  they  can  see  farthest,  taking  care  not  to  break 
their  connection  with  each  other  or  with  their  posts. 
They  are  concealed  from  the  enemy  as  much  as  pos- 
sible by  walla,  or  trees,  or  elevated  ground.  It  is  gen- 
erally even  of  more  advantage  not  to  be  seen  than  to 
see  far.  They  should  not  be  placed  near  covers,  where 
the  enemy  may  capture  them.  A  sentinel  should  al- 
ways be  ready  to  fire;  videttes  carry  their  carbines 
or  pistols  in  their  hands.  A  sentinel  must  be  sure  of 
the  presence  of  an  enemy  before  he  fires  ;  once  satis- 
fied of  that,  he  must  fire,  though  ^1  defence  on  his 
part  be  useless,  as  the  safety  of  the  post  may  depend 
on  it.  Sentinels  fire  on  all  persons  deserting  to  the 
enemy. 

If  a  sentinel's  post  must  be  where  he  cannot  com- 
municate with  the  guard,  a  corporal  and  three  men 
are  detached  for  it,  or  the  sentinels  are  doubled,  that 
one  may  communicate  with  the  guard.  During  the 
day  communication  may  be  made  by  signals,  such  as 
raising  a  cap  or  handkerchief.  At  night  the  sentinels 
are  placed  on  low  ground,  the  better  to  see  objects 
against  the  sky. 


340         Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops,  etc. 

To  lessen  the  duty  of  rounds,  and*  keep  more  men 
on  the  alert  at  night,  sentinels  on  outposts  are  relieved 
every  hour.  To  prevent  sentinels  from  being  sur- 
prised, it  is  sometimes  well  to  precede  the  countersign 
by  signals,  such  as  striking  the  musket  with  the  hand,  1 
striking  the  hands  together,  etc.  \ 

On  the  approach  of  any  one  at  night,  the  outpost 
sentinel  orders — ''Halt!''     If  the  order  is  not  obeyed    | 
after  being  repeated  once,    he  fires.     If  obeyed,    he    > 
calls — '*  Wlio  goes  there?"     If  answered — ""Rounds"    ' 
or  ^'Patrol"  he  says — ''Advance tvith the  countersign." 
If  more  than  one  advance  at  the  same  time,  or  the 
person  who  advances  fails  to  give  the  countersign  or 
signal  agreed  on,  the  sentinel  fires,  and  falls  back  on 
his  guard.  *  The  sentinel  over  the  arms,  as  soon  as  his 
hail  is  answered,  turns  out  the  guard,  and  the  corpo- 
ral goes  to  reconnoitre.     When  it  is  desirable  to  hide 
the  position  of  the  sentinel  from  the  enemy,  the  hail 
is  replaced  hj  signals ;  the  sentinels  give  the  signal, 
and  those  approaching  the  counter  signal. 

With  raio  troops,  or  when  the  light  troops  of  the 
enemy  are  numerous  and  active,  and  when  the  country 
is  broken  or  wooded,  the  night  stormy  or  dark,  senti- 
nels should  be  doubled.  In  this  case,  while  one 
watches,  the  other,  called  a  flying  sentinel,  moves 
about,  examining  the  paths  and  hollows. 

The  commanders  of  grand  guards  visit  the  sentinels 
often  ;  change  their  positions  when  necessary ;  make 
them  repeat  their  orders  ;  teach  them  under  what  cir- 
cumstances and  at  what  signals  to  retire,  and  par- 
ticularly not  to  fall  back  directly  on  their  guard  if 
pursued,  but  to  lead  the  enemy  in  a  circuit. 

757.  At  night,  half  the  men  of  the  grand  guard  ofi" 
post  watch  under  arms,  while  the  rest  lie  down,  arms 
by  their  side.  The  horses  are  always  bridled ;  the 
horsemen  hold  the  reins  and  must  not  sleep.  An  hour 
before  break  of  day,  infantry  grand  guards  stand  to 
arms,  and  cavalry  mount.     At  the  outposts  some  of 


Honors  Paid  hy  the  Troops j  etc.         341 

the  infantry  are  all  night  under  arms,  some  of   the 
cavalry  on  horseback. 

The  commander  of  a  grand  guard  regulates  the 
numbers,  the  hours,  and  the  march  of  patrols  and 
routids,  according  to  the  strength  of  his  command, 
and  the  necessity  for  precaution  ;  and,  accompanied 
by  those  who  are  to  command  the  patrols  and  rounds 
during  the  night,  he  will  reconnoitre  all  the  routes 
they  are  to  follow.  Patrols  and  rounds  march  slowly, 
in  silence,  and  with  great  precaution  ;  halt  frequently 
to  listen  and  examine  the  ground.  The  rounds  con- 
sist of  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer,  and  two 
or  three  men.  Towards  the  break  of  day  the  patrols 
ought  to  be  more  frequent,  and  sent  to  greater  dis- 
tances. They  examine  the  hollow  ways  and  ground 
likely  to  conceal  an  enemy,  but  with  great  caution,  to 
avoid  being  cut  off,  or  engaged  in  an  unequal  coml)at; 
if  they  meet  the  enemy,  they  fire  and  attempt  to  stop 
his  march.  While  the  patrols  are  out,  the  outposts  are 
under  arms. 

Cavalry  patrols  should  examine  the  country  to  a 
greater  distance  than  infantry,  and  report  to  the  in- 
fantry guard  every  thing  they  observe.  The  morning 
patrols  and  scouts  do  not  return  until  broad  daylight ; 
and  when  they  return,  the  night  sentinels  are  with- 
drawn, and  the  posts  for  the  day  resumed. 

On  their  return,  commanders  of  patrols  report  in 
regard  to  the  ground  and  everything  they  have  ob- 
served of  the  movements  of  the  enemy,  or  of  his  posts, 
and  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard  reports  to  the 
field  officers  of  the  day.  The  fires  of  grand  guards 
should  be  hidden  by  a  wall,  ditch,  or  other  screen.  To 
deceive  the  enemy,  fires  are  sometimes  made  on  unoc- 
cupied ground.  Fires  are  not  permitted  at  small  posts 
liable  to  surprise. 

If  a  body  of  troops  attempt  to  enter  the  camp  at 
night,  unless  their  arrival  has  been  announced,  or  the 
commander  is  known  te,  or  is  the  bearer  of  a  written 


342         Honors  Paid  hy  the  TroopSj  etc. 

order  to  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard,  he  stops 
thera,  and  sends  the  command  under  escort  to  the 
field  oflficer  of  the  day,  and  at  the  same  time  warns 
the  posts  near  him. 

Bearers  of  flags  are  not  permitted  to  pass  the  outer 
chain  of  sentinels  ;  their  faces  are  turned  from  the 
post  or  army ;  if  necessary  their  eyes  are  bandaged  ; 
a  non-commissioned  officer  stays  with  them  to  prevent 
indiscretion  on  the  part  of  sentinels. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  receipts  for  dispatches, 
and  sends  thera  to  the  field  officer  of  the  day  or  gene- 
ral of  brigade,  and  dismisses  the  bearer ;  but  if  he 
has  discovered  what  ought  to  be  concealed  from  the 
enemy,  he  is  detained  as  long  as  necessary. 

Deserters  are  disarmed  at  the  outposts,  and  sent  to 
the  commander  of  the  grand  guard,  who  gets  from 
them  all  the  information  he  can  concerning  the  enemy. 
Jf  many  come  at  night,  they  are  received  cautiously, 
a  few  at  a  time.  They  are  sent  in  the  morning  to  the 
field  officer  of  the  day,  or  to  the  nearest  post  or  camp, 
to  be  conducted  to  the  general  of  the  brigade.  All 
suspected  persons  are  secreted  by  the  commanders  of 
the  outposts. 


ARTICLE  XIII. 

DUTIES  OF  CAPTAINS— COMPANIES— DUTIES 
IN  CAMP  AND  GARRISON,  Etc. 

758.  Captains  or  commanders  of  companies  fill  one 
of  the  most  important  stations  in  the  service,  when 
they  are  viewed  in  relation  to  the  direct  influence  they 
exercise  ypon  the  soldiery  ;  to  them  attaches  the  high 
responsibility  of  the  instruction,  good  order,  efficiency, 
and  discipline  of  their  companies ;  and  no  one  should 
be  willing  to  accept  the  post  who  is  not  qualified,  or 
ready  to  qualify  himself,  for  a  faithful  discharge  of  all 
the  duties  of  the  office. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  captain  to  make  himself 
familiar  with  tactics,  or  at  least  so  much  of  it  as  will 
enable  him  to  command  his  company  properly  in  every 
situation  ;  and  to  become  perfectly  acquainted  with  its 
interior  management. 

In  the  case  of  vacancy  in  the  office  of  captain,  or  in 
his  absence,  the  command  of  the  company  devolves  on 
the  officer  next  in  rank.  Captains  should  require  their 
lieutenants  to  assist  them  in  the  performance  of  all 
company  duties,  the  knowledge  thus  acquired  being 
essential  to  every  company  officer. 

762.  When  a  militia  company  is  called  into  service, 
the  captain  should,  at  the  earliest  possible  moment, 
have  it  properly  uniformed  and  equipped,  and  taught 
how  to  take  care  of  its  arms,  clothing,  etc. ;  each  man 
should  be  provided  with  his  knapsack,  haversack, 
blanket,  knife  and  fork,  spoon,  tin  plate,  and  cup. 

Canteens  are  also  necessary  in  most  cases;  they  are 
"worn  over  the  haversack. 


344       Duties  of  captains — companiesj  etc. 

763.  The  captain  should  cause  the  men  of  his  com- 
pany to  be  numbered  in  a  regular  series,  including 
the  non-commissioned  officers,  and  divided  into  several 
squads,  each  to  be  put  under  the  charge  of  a  non-com- 
missioned officer.  As  far  as  practicable,  the  men  of 
each  squad  are  quartered  together. 

Each  of  the  lieutenants  is  charged  with  a  squad  for 
the  supervision  of  its  order  and  cleanliness ;  and  cap- 
tains should  require  their  subalterns  to  assist  them  in 
the  performance  of  all  company  duties. 

The  utmost  attention  should  be  paid  by  captains  to 
the  cleanliness  of  their  men,  as  to  their  persons,  cloth- 
ing, arms,  accoutrements,  and  equipments,  and  also 
as  to  their  quarters  or  tents.  jr 

The  name  of  each  soldier  should  be  labelled  on  his 
bunk  in  quarters,  and  his  company  number  should  be 
placed  against  his  arms  and  accoutrements. 

The  arms  are  placed  in  arm-racks,  the  stoppers  in 
the  muzzles,  the  cocks  let  down,  and  the  bayonets  in 
their  scabbards,  the  accoutrements  suspended  over  the 
arms,-  and  the  swords  or  sabres,  when  these  are  worn, 
hung  by  the  belts  on  pegs. 

The  knapsack  of  each  man  should  be  placed  at  the 
foot  of  his  bunk  when  he  is  in  quarters,  packed  with 
his  effects,  and  ready  to  be  slung ;  the  overcoat  rolled, 
strapped,  and  placed  under  the  knapsack ;  the  cap  on 
a  shelf,  and  his  boots  well  cleaned.  Dirty  clothes 
should  be  kept  in  an  appropriate  part  of  the  knap- 
sack ;  nothing  to  be  put  under  the  bedding. 

Cooking  utensils  and  table  furniture  should  be  clean, 
and  in  their  appropriate  places  ;  blacking  and  brushes 
out  of  sight ;  the  fuel  in  boxes. 

The  cleaning  up  should  take  place  at  least  once  a 
week.  The  chiefs  of  squads  should  cause  bunks  and 
bedding  to  be  overhauled,  floors  cleaned,  and  arms, 
accoutrements,  etc.,  all  put  in  order. 

Non-commissioned  officers,  in  charge  of  squads, 
should  be  held  immediately  responsible  that  their  men 


Duties  of  captains — companies^  etc.       845 

observe  what  is  prescribed  above;  that  they  wash  their 
hands  and  faces  daily  ;  that  they  brush  or  comb  their 
heads  and  beards  ;  tnat  those  who  go  on  duty  put  their 
arms,  accoutrements,  dress,  etc.,  in  the  best  order. 

Commanders  of  companies  should  see  that  the  arms 
and  accoutrements  in  possession  of  the  men  are  always 
kept  in  good  order,  and  that  proper  care  is  taken  in 
cleaning  them. 

Arms  should  not  be  taken  to  pieces  without  permission 
of  an  officer.  Bright  barrels  should  be  kept  clean  and 
free  from  rust  without  polishing  them  ;  care  should  be 
taken  not  to  bruise  or  bend  the  barrel.  After  firing, 
wash  out  the  bore,  wipe  it  dry,  and  then  pass  a  bit  of 
cloth  slightly  greased,  to  the  bottom.  In  these  opera- 
tions, a  rod  of  wood  with  a  loop  on  one  end  is  to  be 
used  instead  of  the  rammer.  The  barrel,  when  not  in 
use,  should  bo  closed  with  a  stopper.  For  exerwse, 
each  man  should  keep  himself  provided  with  a  piece 
of  sole  leather  to  fit  the  cap  or  countersink  of  the  ham- 
mer, to  prevent  breaking  the  nipple. 

Arms  should  not  be  left  loaded  in  armories;  quarters, 
or  tents,  or  when  the  men  are  ofi"  duty,  except  by 
special  orders.  The  ammunition  in  the  possession  of 
the  men  should  be  inspected  frequently,  and  any  dam- 
aged, wasted,  or  lost  by  neglect,  should  be  paid  for. 

In  camp  or  quarters,  the  officers  should  visit  the 
kitchen  daily  and  inspect  the  kettles,  food,  etc.,  and 
at  all  times  carefully  attend  to  the  messing  and  econ- 
omy of  their  companies. 

The  company  rations  are  usually  taken  charge  of  by 
the  orderly  sergeant,  and  issued  daily  to  the  cooks  by 
whom  they  are  prepared  and  served  to  the  company. 
The  men  of  the  company  serve  in  turn  as  cooks,  two 
being  the  usual  number  serving  at  once.  AVhen  in 
camp,  the  men  present  themselves  at  meal  times  to 
the  cooks,  who  issue  to  each  man  in  turn  his  proper 
allowance  ;  in  garrison,  or  quarters  the  tables  are  set 


346       Duties  0/  captains — companies^  etc. 

out,  and  the  cooks  place  each  man's  ration  on  his  plate, 
and  in  his  cup,  before  the  compaijy  is  marched  in. 

When  not  actually  in  the  field  the  ration  is  in  most 
cases  more  than  sufficient,  so  that  by  care  on  the  part 
of  the  orderly  sergeant  and  cooks,  there  is  more  or 
less  saved  on  the  rations  of  the  company  ;  this  saving 
is  sold  for  the  benefit  of  the  company,  and  constitutes 
what  is  denominated  the  Company  Fund, 

DUTIES  IN  CAMP  AND  GARRISON. 

764.  The  duties  in  camp  and  garrison  are  to  be  con- 
ducted, as  far  as  practicable,  in  the  same  manner  and 
on  the  same  principles. 

The  Reveille  is  the  signal  for  the  men  to  rise,  and 
the  ^entinels  to  leave  off  challenging.  It  is  usually 
soutided  at  the  dawn  of  day,  except  when  the  troops 
are  on  the  march,  when  the  signal  may  be  sounded  at 
a  much  earlier  hour.  The  men  form  on  their  com- 
pany parade  grounds,  and  as  soon  as  thejeveille  ceases 
the  rolls  are  called  by  the  orderly  sergeants,  superin- 
tended hy  a  commissioned  officer. 

Immediately  after  the  roll  call,  (after  stable  duty  in 
the  cavalry  and  light  artillery),  the  tents  or  quarters 
should  be  put  in  order  by  the  men  of  the  companies, 
superintended  by  chiefs  of  squads  ;  the  parades,  streets 
of  the  camp,  etc.,  are  cleaned  by  the  police  party  of 
the  day,  in  charge  of  a  non-commissioned  officer,  and 
superintended  by  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  the  guard 
house  or  guard  tent  by  the  guard  or  the  prisoners,  if 
there  are  any. 

Breakfast  call  is  sounded  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  is  the  signal  for  breakfast. 

The  Troop  sounds  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning  for 
the  purpose  of  assembling  the  men  for  duty,  inspection 
at  guard  mounting,  and  morning  dress  parade,  when 
the  commanding  officer  commands  it. 


Duties  of  captains — companies^  etc.       347 

The  Surgeon's  call  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock 
in  the  morning,  when  the  sick,  able  to  go  about,  are 
conducted  to  the  hospital  by  the  first  sergeants  of  com- 
panies, who  hand  to  the  surgeon  a  list  of  all  the  sick 
in  the  company. 

After  the  surgeon  has  passed  upon  the  sick,  the  first 
sergeants  proceed  to  make  off  the  morning  reports  of 
their  companies,  which,  after  being  signed  by  their 
captains,  are  taken  to  regimental  head  quarters  at  first 
sergeant's  call. 

The  morning  report  of  the  company  is  made  off  in 
a  book  kept  for  that  purpose,  called  the  morning  report 
hook. 

The  Dinner  call  is  sounded  at  —  o'clock,  and  is  the 
signal  for  dinner. 

The  Retreat  is  sounded  at  sunset,  when  there  is  a 
roll-call  and  the  orders  for  the  day  are  read.  When 
the  weather  permits,  there  is  a  dress  parade  at  retreat, 
and  the  orders  are  read  out  at  the  close  of  it.  Each 
regiment  or  battalion  has  an  independent  parcde,  com- 
manded by  the  colonel. 

The  Tattoo  is  sounded  at  —  o'clock  in  the  evening, 
when  the  rolls  are  called  ;  no  soldier  is  allowed  to  be 
out  of  his  tent  or  quarters  after  this  hour,  without 
special  permission. 

The  Drummers'  call  is  beaten  by  the  drums  of  the 
police  guard  five  minutes  before  the  time  of  beating 
the  stated  calls,  when  the  field  music  assembles  before 
the  colors  of  their  respective  regiments,  and  as  soon 
as  the  beat  begins  on  the  right  is  taken  up  along  the 
line. 

Calls  for  drills  are  sounded  at  such  hours  as  the 
commanding  officer  may  designate. 

765.  Daily  duties  must  be  announced  in  order,  and 
the  officers  to  perform  them  are  detailed  according  to 
the  rules  of  the  roster. 

The  number  and  rank  of  the  officers  for  daily  duty, 
are  to  be  regulated  by  the  strength  and  circumstances 


348       Duties  of  captains — companies j  etc, 

of  the  camp  or  garrison  ;  th«  officers  detailed  for  duty, 
should  remain  in  or  about  the  camp  or  garrison  during 
their  tours  of  duty. 

Besides  the  officers  detailed  for  guard  duty,  the  offi- 
cers for  daily  duties  in  large  commands  are  as  follows : 

JL  General  officet^  of  the  day  for  each  division ;  afeld 
officer  of  the  day  for  each  brigade ;  and  a  regimental 
officer  of  the  day  for  each  regiment. 

In  camps  or  garrisons  of  one  regiment  or  less,  the 
officers  are  as  follows :  officer  of  the  day,  and  officer  of 
the  guard. 

The  General  of  the  day  is  to  superintend  the  regu- 
larity and  discipline  of  the  camp  of  the  division,  visit 
the  guards  and  outposts,  call  out  and  inspect  the 
guards  as  often  and  at  such  times  as  he  thinks  proper ; 
to  receive  all  reports  of  guards,  and  make  immediate 
communication  of  any  extraordinary  circumstances, 
to  his  commanding  officer,  or  to  the  General-in-chief. 

The  Field  officer  of  the  day  has  the  immediate  super- 
intendence of  the  camp  of  the  brigade ;  he  is  to  be 
present  at  the  mounting  and  dismounting  of  the  bri- 
gade or  grand  guards  ;  he  is  to  call  them  out  to  inspect 
them ;  to  order  such  patrols,  posts,  and  outposts  as 
may  be  necessary  ;  to  see  that  the  grand  guard  is  vigi- 
lant, that  none  are  absent,  and  that  their  arms  and 
accoutrements  are  in  order;  that  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  are  acquainted  with  their  duty, 
and  that  the  sentries  are  properly  posted,  and  have 
received  proper  orders. 

The  Regimental  officer  of  the  day  in  each  regiment, 
and  in  commands  less  than  a  regiment,  is  charged 
with  the  order  and  cleanliness  of  the  camp  or  garri- 
son ;  he  has  the  calls  beaten  by  the  drummer  of  the 
police  guard  ;  he  attends  the  parading  of  the  guards, 
and  orders  the  roll  to  be  called  frequently  and  at  unex- 
pected periods,  and  reports  everything  extraordinary 
to  the  commander  of  the  garrison  or  camp ;  he  is  to 
visit  the  hospital  at  various  hours  and  make  a  report 


Duties  of  captains — companies,  etc.       349 

of  its  state  to  the  commanding  oflBcer.  He  should 
satisfy  himself  frequently  during  the  night,  of  the 
vigilance  of  the  police  guard,  and  prescribe  patrols  and 
rounds  to  be  made  by  the  oflBcer  of  the  guard.  He 
should  give  attention  to  the  condition  of  the  sinks,  the 
regulation  of  the  camp  fires,  the  removal  of  rubbish, 
etc. ;  and  for  these  purposes  a  fatigue  party  will  be 
furnished  him  when  necessary. 

CAMPS. 
Camp  of  Infantry. 

7G6.  Each  company  has  its  tents  in  two  files,  facing 
on  a  street  perpendicular  to  the  color  line.  The  width 
of  the  street  depends  on  the  front  of  the  camp,  but 
should  not  be  less  than  five  paces.  The  interval  be- 
tween the  ranks  of  tents  is  two  paces  ;  between  the 
files  of  tents  of  adjacent  companies,  two  paces  ;  be- 
tween regiments,  twenty-two  paces. 

The  color  line*  is  ten  paces  in  front  of  the  front 
rank  of  tents.  The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  behind 
the  rear  rank  of  company  tents ;  the  non-commis- 
sioned staflf  and  sutler,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
kitchens  ;  the  company  oflftcers,  twenty  paces  farther 
in  rear ;  and  the  field  and  staflf,  twenty  paces  in  rear 
of  the  company  oflficers. 

The  company  oflficers  are  in  rear  of  their  respective 
companies  ;  the  captains  on  the  right. 

The  colopel  and  lieutenant-colonel  are  near  the  cen- 
tre of  the  line  of  field  and  staflf;  the  adjutant,  a  major 
and  surgeon,  on  the  right;  the  quartermaster,  a  ma- 
jor and  assistant  surgeon,  on  the  left. 

The  police  guard  is  at  the  centre  of  the  line  of  the 
non-commissioned  staflf,  the  tents  facing  to  the  front, 
the  stacks  of  arms  on  theleft. 

The  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  about  200 
*  paces  in  front  of  the  color  line,  and  opposite  the  centre 
30 


350       Duties  of  captains — companies^  etc. 

of  the  regiment  or  on  the  best  ground  ;  the  prisoners* 
tent  about  four  paces  in  rear.  In  a  regiment  of  the 
second  line,  the  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is 
200  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  its  field  and  staff. 

The  horses  of  the  staff  officers  and  of  the  baggage 
train  are  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  tents  of  the 
field  and  staff;  the  wagons  are  parked  on  the  same 
line,  and  the  men  of  the  train  camped  near  them. 

The  sinks  of  the  men  are  150  paces  in  front  of  the 
color  line — those  of  the  officers  100  paces  in  rear  of 
the  train.  Both  are  concealed  by  bushes.  When 
convenient,  the  sinks  of  the  men  may  be  placed  in 
rear  or  on  a  flank.  A  portion  of  the  earth  dug  out 
for  sinks  to  be  thrown  back  occasionally. 

The  front  of  the  camp  of  a  regiment  of  1000  men 
in  two  ranks  will  be  400  paces,  or  one-fifth  less  paces 
than  the  number  of  files,  if  the  camp  is  to  have  the 
same  front  as  the  troops  in  order  of  battle.  But  the 
front  may  be  reduced  to  190  paces  by  narrowing  the 
company  streets  to  five  paces  ;  and  if  it  be  desirable 
to  reduce  the  front  still  more,  the  tents  of  companies 
may  be  pitched  in  single  file — those  of  a  division 
facing  on  the  same  street. 

Cantonments. 

770.  The  cavalry  should  be  placed  under  shelter 
whenever  the  distance  from  the  enemy,  and  from  the 
ground  where  the  troops  are  to  form  for  battle,  permit 
it.  Taverns  and  farm-houses,  with  large  i^tables  and 
free  access,  are  selected  for  quartering  them. 

The  colonel  indicates  the  place  of  assembling  in 
case  of  alarm.  It  should  generally  be  outside  the 
cantonment;  the  egress  from  it  should  be  free;  the 
retreat  upon  the  other  positions  secure,  and  roads 
leading  to  it  on  the  side  of  the  enemy  obstructed. 

The  necessary  orders  being  given,  as  in  establish- 
ing a  camp,  the  picket  and  grand  guards  are  posted. 


Duties  of  captains — companies j  etc.       351 

A  sentinel  may  be  placed  on  a  steeple  or  high  house, 
and  then  the  troops  are  marched  to  the  quarters.  The 
men  sleep  in  the  stables,  if  it  is  thought  necessary. 

The  above  applies  in  the  main  to  infantry.  Near 
the  enemy,  companies  or  platoons  should  be  collected, 
as  much  as  possible,  in  the  same  houses.  If  compa- 
nies must  be  separated,  they  should  be  divided  by 
platoons  or  squads.     All  take  arms  at  daybreak. 

When  cavalry  and  infantry  canton  together,  the 
latter  furnish  the  guards  by  ^jjpht,  and  the  former  by 
day. 

Troops  cantoned  in  presence  of  the  enemy  should 
be  covered  by  advanced  guards  and  natural  or  arti- 
ficial obstacles.  Cantonments  taken  during  a  cessa- 
tion of  hostilities  should  be  established  in  rear  of  a 
line  of  defence,  and  in  front  of  the  point  on  which  the 
troops  would  concentrate  to  receive  an  attack.  The 
general  commanding-in-chief  assigns  the  limits  of 
their  cantonments  to  the  divisions,  the  commanders  of 
divisions  to  brigades,  and  the  commanders  of  brigades 
post  theil*  regiments.  The  position  for  each  corps  in 
case  of  attack  is  carefully  pointed  out  by  the  generals. 

Marches. 

771.  For  marching,  the  force,  if  a  large  one,  is  di- 
vided into  as  many  columns  as  circumstances  permit, 
■without  weakening  any  one  too  much.  The  object  of 
the  movement  and  the  nature  of  the  ground  deter- 
mine the  order  of  march,  the  kind  of  troops  in  each 
column,  and  the  number  of  columns.  They  ought  to 
preserve  their  communications,  and  be  within  sup- 
porting distance  of  each  other.  The  commander  of 
each  column  ought  to  know  the  strength  and  direction 
of  the  others. 

The  advance  and  rear-guards  are  usually  light 
troops  ;  their  strength  and  composition  depend  on  the 
nature  of  the  ground  and  the  position  of  the  enemy. 


352       Duties  of  captains — companies^  etc. 

They  serve  to  cover  the  movements  of  the  army,  and 
to  hold  the  enemy  in  check  until  the  general  has  time 
to  make  his  arrangements. 

The  ^'general''  sounded  one  hour  before  the  time  of 
marching,  is  the  signal  to  strike  tents,  to  load  the 
wagons,  pack  horses,  etc.,  and  send  them  to  the  place 
of  assembling.  The  fires  are  then  put  out,  and  care 
taken  to  avoid  burning  straw,  etc.,  or  giving  the  en- 
emy any  other  indication  of  the  movements. 

The  "  march  "  beatAin  the  infantry,  and  the  "  ad- 
vance" is  sounded  in  the  cavalry,  in  succession,  as 
each  is  to  take  its  place  in  the  column.  The  infantry 
forms  in  column  of  companies  or  platoons ;  the  cav- 
alry in  column  of  twos,  fours,  or  of  platoons ;  and  the 
artillery  by  sections. 

When  the  army  should  form  suddenly  to  meet  the 
enemy,  the  '^  long-roll"  is  beat,  and.*'i!o  horse" 
sounded.  The  troops  form  rapidly  in  front  of  their 
camp. 

Batteries  of  artillery  and  their  caissons  move  with 
the  corps  to  which  they  are  attached ;  the  field  train 
and  ambulances  march  at  the  rear  of  the  column  ;  and 
the  baggage  with  the  rear-guard. 

After  the  march  has  commenced,  the  troops  habit- 
ually take  the  route  step.  The  men  should  not  be 
allowed  to  straggle,  or  leave  ranks  for  any  but  a  ne- 
cessary purpose,  and  then  but  for  a  few  moments  at  a 
time. 

The  general  and  field  officers  frequently  stop,  or 
send  officers  to  the  rear,  to  see  that  the  troops  march 
in  the  prescribed  order,  and  keep  their  distances. 

In  approaching  a  defile,  the  colonels  are  warned  ; 
they  close  their  regiments  as  they  come  up  ;  each  reg- 
iment passes  separately,  at  an  accelerated  pace,  and  in 
as  close  order  as  possible.  The  leading  regiment  hav- 
ing passed,  and  left  room  enough  for  the  whole  col- 
umn in  close  order,  halts,  and  moves  again  as  soon  as 
the  last  regiment  is  through.     In  the  cavalry,  each 


Duties  of  captains — companies^  etc.       353 

squadron,  before  quickening  the  pace  to  rejoin  the 
column,  takes  its  original  order  of  march. 

When  a  march  is  to  be  continued  from  day  to  day, 
the  daily  march  should  commence  at  a  very  early 
hour  ;  the  rate  of  going  should  be  as  regular  as  possi- 
ble, not  more  than  two  and  a  half  miles  an  hour  ;  and 
the  guides  should  be  careful  to  preserve  their  distance, 
so  as  to  prevent  oscillations  in  the  rear  of  the  column, 
which  are  verv  fatiguing  to  the  men.  At  the  expira- 
tion of  every  Iiour,  or  little  more,  the  halt  is  sounded, 
when  the  men  are  allowed  to  take  their  ease  for  about 
ten  minutes,  when  the  march  is  resumed.  In  this 
way  a  day's  march  of  twenty  miles  or  more  may  be 
made  by  mid-day,  or  a  little  later:  the  men  get  their 
dinners  after  getting  into  camp,  have  the  afternoon  to 
rest,  wash  their  clothing,  clean  their  arms,  etc.,  and 
are  fresh  for  an  early  start  on  the  following  day. 

In  forced  marches,  or  where  the  march  is  a  long  one, 
the  halt  at  noon  may  be  from  an  hour  to  an  hour  and 
a  half,  when  the  men  may  loosen  their  belts,  take  a 
lunch,  smoke  and  take  their  ease  in  any  way  they 
choose,  until  the  hour  for  resuming  the  march  ;  the 
march  may  be  continued  until  the  middle  of  the  after- 
noon, and  still  the  men  will  have  time  to  get  their  cup  of 
hot  coffee  for  supper,  and  make  themselves  comfortable 
for  the  night.  The  march  of  the  first  two  days  should 
be  short,  after  that  it  may  be  increased  to  the  required 
number  of  miles  ;  the  march  from  day  to  day  should 
be  as  nearly  of  equal  length  as  the  convenience  of 
fuel  and  water,  etc.,  for  camping  purposes  will  admit. 

772.  A  camping  party,  headed  by  the  quartermaster 
of  the  command,  precedes  the  column  for  the  purpose 
of  selecting  and  marking  off  the  camp  before  the  arri- 
val of  the  troops.  The  camp  is  marked  by  placing 
camp-colors  on  the  line  intended  for  the  color  line  of 
the  command. 

When  the  column  reaches  the  camp-ground,  the  in- 
fantry comes  into  line  on  the  color  line. 


354       Duties  of  captains — companies^  etc. 

The  number  of  men  to  be  furnished  for  guards, 
pickets  and  orderlies ;  the  fatigue  parties  to  be  sent 
for  wood  and  water  for  the  cooks,  etc.;  the  hour  of 
marching,  etc.,  are  then  announced  by  the  brigadier- 
genera-ls  to  the  colonels,  and  by  them  to  the  field  offi- 
cers— the  adjutant  and  captains  formed  in  front  of  the 
regiment,  the  first  sergeants  taking  post  behind  their 
captains.  The  adjutant  then  makes  the  details,  and 
the  first  sergeants  warn  the  men.  The  regimental 
officer  of  the  day  forms  the  picket,  and  sends  the 
guards  to  their  posts.  The  colors  are  then  planted  at 
the  centre  of  the  color  line,  and  the  arms  are  stacked 
on  the  line.  The  fatigue  parties  proceed  to  their  du- 
ties, and  the  men  of  the  company  not  on  detail  pitch 
the  tents. 


SOLDIER'S  RATIONS 

AND  MODE  OF   COOKINGfc.THEM. 


The  regular  daily  ration  of  food  issued  to  the  troops 
in  the  Confederate  States  service,  is.three-fourths  pound 
of  fresh  or  salt  beef;  eighteen  ounces  of  bread,  or  one 
and  a  fourth  pounds  of  corn  meal,  and  at  the  rate  of 
one  hundred  rations  of  eight  quarts  of  peas  or  beans, 
or,  in  lieu  thereof,  ten  pounds  of  rice;  six  pounds  of 
coffee,  twelve  pounds  of  sugar,  four  quarts  of  vinegar, 
and  one  and  a  half  pounds  of  tallow,  or  one  and  a 
fourth  pounds  of  adamantine,  or  one  pound  of  sperm 
candles ;  four  pounds  of  soap,  and  two  quarts  of  salt. 

On  a  campaign,  or  on  marches,  or  on  board  trans- 
ports, the  ration  of  hard  bread  is  one  pound. 

Fresh  beef,  when  it  can  be  procured,  should  be  fur- 
nished at  least  twice  a  week  ;  the  beef  to  be  procured, 
if  possible,  by  contract. 

RECEIPTS. 

Soldier\<i  Soup  for  25  Men. — Take  15  quarts  of 
water  to  25  pounds  of  meat,  2  small  tablespoonfuls  of 
salt,  half  a  one  of  pepper ;  about  two  pounds  of  rice, 
put  in  while  boiling,  and  what  vegetables,  fresh  or 
preserved,  that  can  be  procured — say  three  pounds. 

Po7'k  Soup  for  25  Men. — In  G  gallons  of  cold  water 
put  12  pounds  of  pork,  3  quarts  of  beans,  2  pounds  of 
rice,  season  to  suit;  let  boil  one  hour  and  a  half;  soak 
the  beans  overnight 

Irish  Stew  for  Men. — Take  25  pounds  mutton,  veal, 
beef,  or  pork,  cut  into  pieces  six  inches  square,  4 
pounds  of  onions,  8  pounds  of  potatoes,  4  tablespoon- 


356  Soldier^s  Rations^  etc. 

fuls  of  salt,  1  of  pepper,  8  quarts  of  water ;  cook  it  from 
one  to  two  hours,  slowly,  thicken  the  gravy  with  flour 
mixed  into  smooth  paste  with  water  or  potatoes 
mashed  fine. 

Tea  for  25  J^en. — Allow  12  quarts  of  water ;  put 
the  rations  of  tea — a  large  teaspoonful  to  each — in  a 
cloth  tied  up  very  loosely,  throw  it  into  the  boiler 
while  it  is  boiling  hard  for  a  moment ;  then  take  oflf  the 
boiler,  cover  it,  and  let  it  stand  full  10  minutes,  when 
it  will  be  ready  for  use  ;  first  add  sugar  and  milk,  if  to 
be  had,  at  the  rate  of  3  pints  or  2  quarts  of  milk,  and  1 
or  1|  pounds  of  sugar. 

Pork  with  Peas  or  Beans  for  25  Men. — To  14  pounds 
of  pork  add  6  pounds  of  peas  or  beans,  put  them  in  a 
cloth  to  boil,  tying  it  very  loosely ;  place  them  both  in 
the  boiler,  let  them  boil  about  two  hours  ;  then  take 
out  the  pork,  add  some  flour  to  the  gravy,  and  put  the 
peas  or  beans  in  it,  with  two  or  three  onions  cut  up 
fine ;  let  it  boil  a  little  longer,  mash  up  the  vegetables 
very  finely,  and  serve  them  round  the  dish  with  the 
meat. 

Plain  Steived  Meat  for  25  Mem. — Take  14  pounds  of 
mutton,  beef,  veal  or  pork,  cut  it  into  chunks  and  put 
it  into  the  boiler  ;  add  4  quarts  of  water,  2  quarts  to  a 
teaspoonful  of  salt  and  half  teaspoonful  of  pepper,  8  or 
10  onions  cut  in  pieces  ;  let  it  boil  half  an  hour,  then 
let  it  stew  slowly  from  half  an  hour  to  one  hour  longer, 
adding  one  pound  of  rice,  potatoes,  or  any  vegetable 
that  can  be  obtained ;  thicken  the  gravy  with  flour 
mixed  to  a  smooth  paste  in  cold  water. 

Salt  Pork  ivith  Potatoes  and  Cahbage  for  25  Men. — 
Take  15  pounds  of  pork,  extract  the  bones,  3  pounds 
of  potatoes,  2  winter  cabbages,  let  it  boil  for  two  hours, 
10  quarts  of  water,  serve  the  meat  with  the  vegetable 
round  it;  the  gravy  will  make  a  good  broth  with  peas, 
beans  or  rice  added,  also  a  little  onion.  Ship  bis- 
cuit broken  into  the  broth  makes  a  very  nutricious 
soup.  * 


Solflier's  Rations^  etc.  357 

To  Fry  any  kind  of  Meat. — Get  your  frying  pan 
very  hot,  put  in  some  fat  pork  which  will  immediately 
melt,  then  put  in  the  meat  you  wish  to  fry ;  (a  small 
teaspoonful  of  salt,  and  a  quarter  of  a  teaspoonful  of 
pepper,  to  every  pound  of  meat ;)  when  done,  lay  the 
meat  on  a  dish,  add  one  pint  of  water  to  the  fat  in  the 
frying  pan,  a  few  slices  of  onion,  or  two  teaspoonfuls 
of  vinegar;  thicken  it  with  a  little  flour  and  pour 
it  over  the  cooked  meat.  Any  sauce,  or  a  few  chopped 
pickles  may  be  substituted  for  the  vinegar  or  onions. 

Co  (fee  for  25  Men, — Take  12  quarts  of  water,  when 
it  boils  add  20  ounces  of  coifec,  mix  it  well,  and  leave 
it  on  the  fire  till  it  commences  to  boil,  then  take  it  off, 
and  pour  into  it  a  little  more  than  one  quart  of  cold 
water,  let  it  stand  in  a  warm  place  full  10  minutes  ; 
the  dregs  will  settle  to  the  bottom,  and  the  coffee  be 
perfectly  clear.  Pour  it  then  into  another  vessel, 
leaving  the  dregs  in  the  first.  Add  sugar,  four  tea- 
spoonfuls  to  the  quart.  If  you  can  get  milk,  leave 
out  five  quarts  of  water  in  the  above  receipt;  and  put 
milk  in  its  place. 

Peas  or  Bean  Soup  for  25  Men. — Take  14  pounds  of 
pork,  8  quarts  peas,  or  beans,  20  quarts  of  water,  25 
teaspoonfuls  of  sugar,  12  of  pepper,  and  several  large 
onions  ;  boil  gently  till  the  vegetables  are  soft — from 
four  to  five  hours. 

Receipt  for  a  small  quantity  of  Mashed  Meat. — Cut 
the  meat  in  very  small  pieces;  heat  the  frying  pan  ; 
put  into  it  one  pint  of  water,  half  a  teaspoonful  of 
salt,  and  a  teaspoonful  of  flour,  and  let  it  cook  fifteen 
minutes.  Salt  meat  must  be  cooked  the  same,  omit- 
ting the  salt,  in  its  place  putting  a  small  teaspoonful 
of  sugar,  spices,  or  pickles,  chopped  tine.  Dish  it  on 
some  ship  biscuit.  Steak,  chops,  sausages,  bacon, 
slices  of  any  kind  of  meat,  can  be  cooked  in  a  frying 
pan,  with  a  little  melted  fat  at  the  bottom-.  Salt  meat 
should  always  be  soaked. —  VeiVs  Hand-Book  of  Active 
Service. 


SUGGESTIONS  TO  SOLDIERS. 


In  an  ordinary  campaign  sickness  disables  or  de- 
stroys three  times  as  many  as  the  sword. 

On  a  march,  from  April  to  November,  the  entire 
clothing  should  be  a  colored  flannel  shirt,  with  a  loosely 
buttoned  collar,  cotton  drawers,  woolen  pantaloons, 
shoes  and  stockings,  and  a  light-colored  felt  hat,  with 
broad  brim  to  protect  the  eyes  and  face  from  the  glare 
of  the  sun  and  from  the  rain,  and  a  substantial  but 
not  heavy  coat  when  off  duty. 

Sun-stroke  is  most  effectually  prevented  by  wearing 
a  silk  handkerchief  in  the  crown  of  the  hat. 

Colored  blankets  are  best,  and  if  lined  with  brown 
drilling  the  warmth  and  durability  are  doubled,  while 
the  protection  against  dampness  from  lying  on  the 
ground  is  almost  complete. 

Never  lie  or  sit  down  on  the  grass  or  bare  earth  for 
a  moment;  rather  use  your  hat — a  handkerchief,  even, 
is  a  great  protection.  The  warmer  you  are  the  greater 
need  for  this  protection,  as  a  damp  vapor  is  immedi- 
ately generated,  to  be  absorbed  by  the  clothing,  and 
to  cool  you  off  too  rapidly. 

While  marching,  or  on  other  active  duty,  the  more 
thirsty  you  are  the  more  essential  is  it  to  safety  of  life 
itself  to  rinse  out  the  mouth  two  or  three  times,  and 
then  take  a  swallow  of  water  at  a  tinfe,  with  short 
intervals.  A  brave  French  General,  on  a  forced  march, 
fell  dead  on  the  instant  by  drinking  largely  of  cold 
water,  when  snow  was  on  the  ground. 

Abundant  sleep  is  essential  to  bodily  efficiency,  and 
to  that  alertness  of  mind  which  is  all-important  in  an 
engagement ;  and  few  things  more  certainly  and  more 


Suggestions  to  Soldiers.  359 

effectually  prevent  sound  sleep  than  eating  heartily 
after  sundown,  especially  after  a  heavy  march  or  des- 
perate battle. 

Nothing  is  more  certain  to  secure  endurance  and 
capability  of  long-continued  effort,  than  the  avoidance 
of  everything  as  a  drink  except  cold  water,  not  exclu- 
ding coffee  at  breakfast.  Drink  as  little  as  possible  of 
even  cold  water. 

After  any  sort  of  exhausting  effort,  a  cup  of  coffee, 
hot  or  cold,  is  an  admirable  sustainer  of  the  strength, 
until  nature  begins  to  recover  herself. 

Never  eat  heartily  just  before  a  great  undertaking  ; 
because  the  nervous  power  is  irresistibly  drawn  to 
the  stomach  to  manage  the  food  eaten,  thus  drawing 
off  that  supply  which  the  brain  and  muscle  so  much 
need. 

If  persons  will  drink  brandy,  it  is  incomparably 
safer  to  do  so  after  an  effort  than  before ;  for  it  can 
give  only  a  transient  strength,  lasting  but  a  few  min- 
utes ;  but  as  it  can  never  be  known  how  long  any  given 
effort  is  t<$  be  kept  in  continuance,  and  if  longer  than 
tJHe  few  minutes,  the  body  becomes  more  feeble  than 
it  would  have  been  without  the  stimulus,  it  is  clear 
that  its  use  before  an  effort  is  always  hazaydous  and  is 
always  unwise. 

Never  go  to  sleep,  especially  after  a  great  effort,  even 
in  hot  weather,  without  some  covering  over  you. 

Under  all  circumstances,  rather  than  lie  down  on 
the  bare  ground,  lie  in  the  hollow  of  two  logs  placed 
together,  or  across  several  smaller  pieces  of  wood,  laid 
side  by  side ;  or  sit  on  your  hat,  leaning  against  a 
tree.  A  nap  of  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  in  that  position 
will  refresh  you  more  than  an  hour  on  the  bare  earth, 
with  the  additional  advantage  of  perfect  safety. 

A  cut  is  less  dangerous  than  a  bullet  wound  and 
heals  more  rapidly. 

If  from  any  wound  the  blood  spirts  out  in  jets,  in- 
stead of  a  steady  stream,  you  will  die  in  a  few  min- 


360  Suggestions  to  Soldiers. 

utes  unless  it  is  remedied;  because  an  artery  has  been 
divided,  and  that  takes  the  blood  directly  from  the 
fountain  of  life.  To  stop  this  instantly,  tie  a  hand- 
kerchief or  other  cloth  very  loosely  between  the  wound 
and  the  heart;  put  a  stick,  bayonet,  or  ramrod  between 
the  skin  and  the  handkerchief,  and  twist  around  until 
the  bleeding  ceases,  and  keep  it  thus  until  the  surgeon 
arrives. 

If  the  blood  flows  in  a  slow,  regular  stream,  a  vein 
has  been  pierced,  and  the  handkerchief  must  be  on 
the  other  side  of  the  wound  from  the  heart — that  is, 
helow  the  wound. 

A  bullet  through  the  abdomen  (belly  or  stomach)  is 
more  certainly  fatal  than  if  aimed  at  the  head  or  heart ; 
for  in  the  latter  cases  the  bill  is  often  glanced  off  by 
the  bone,  or  follow's  round  it  under  the  skin  ;  but  when 
it  enters  the  stomach  or  bowels,  from  any  direction, 
death  is  inevitable  under  all  conceivable  circuhistancs, 
but  is  scarcely  ever  instantaneous. 

Let  the  whole  beard  grow,  but  not  longer  than  some 
three  inches.  This  strengthens  and  thickens  its 
growth,  and  thus  makes  a  more  perfect  protection  for 
the  lungs  against  dust,  and  of  the  throat  against  winds 
and  cold  in  winter,  while  in  the  summer  a  greater 
perspiration  of  the  skin  is  induced,  with  an  increase  of 
evaporation  ;  hence  greater  coolness  of  the  parts  on 
the  outside,  while  the  throat  is  less  feverish,  thirsty, 
and  dry. 

Avoid  fats  and  fat  meat  in  summer  and  all  warm 
days. 

Whenever  possible,  take  a  plunge  into  any  lake  or 
running  stream  every  morning  as  soon  as  you  get  up.  If 
none  at  hand,  endeavor  to  wash  the  body  all  over  as 
soon  as  you  leave  your  bed,  for  cleanliness  acts  like  a 
charm  against  all  diseases,  always  either  warding  them 
off  altogether,  or  greatly  mitigating  their  severity  and 
shortening  their  duration. 


Date  Due 


,73.ni    R526 


176384 


<4m 


'.^IJ:  --^.'''^  \ 


